diff options
Diffstat (limited to '22595.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 22595.txt | 12394 |
1 files changed, 12394 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/22595.txt b/22595.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d9b658 --- /dev/null +++ b/22595.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12394 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: At the Point of the Sword + +Author: Herbert Hayens + +Release Date: September 14, 2007 [EBook #22595] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + + + + + + +[Frontispiece: "In a short time they had bound our arms tightly with +strips of hide."] + +[Transcriber's note: frontispiece missing from book.] + + + + + + +At the Point of the Sword + + +A Story for Boys + + +By + +HERBERT HAYENS + + + + Author of "Ye Mariners of England," "Under the Lone Star," + "For the Colours," "A Captain of Irregulars," + "In the Grip of the Spaniard," + &c., &c. + + + + +THOMAS NELSON & SONS, LTD. + +LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK + +1903 + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + I. A BIRTHDAY EVE + II. AN EXCITING VOYAGE + III. THE END OF THE "AGUILA" + IV. THE SILVER KEY + V. IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY + VI. WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY + VII. WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG + VIII. A FRIENDLY OPPONENT + IX. A GLEAM OF HOPE + X. A STORMY INTERVIEW + XI. A NARROW ESCAPE + XII. A STERN PURSUIT + XIII. HOME AGAIN + XIV. FRIEND OR FOE? + XV. WE CATCH A TARTAR + XVI. GLORIOUS NEWS + XVII. DUTY FIRST + XVIII. DARK DAYS + XIX. FALSE PLAY, OR NOT? + XX. "SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!" + XXI. ROUGH JUSTICE + XXII. THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN + XXIII. AN OPEN-AIR PRISON + XXIV. A DANGEROUS JOURNEY + XXV. BACK TO DUTY + XXVI. THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN + XXVII. A DISASTROUS RETREAT + XXVIII. THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS + XXIX. HOME AGAIN + + + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. + + +"IN A SHORT TIME THEY HAD BOUND OUR ARMS TIGHTLY + WITH STRIPS OF HIDE" . . . . . . _Frontispiece_ + +"'HELP, HELP!' I EXCLAIMED FAINTLY; BUT HE HEARD ME, + AND I KNEW I WAS SAVED." + +"PUSHING OFF HIS SANDY BED-CLOTHES AT OUR APPROACH, + HE STRUGGLED TO HIS FEET." + +"'SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!'" + +"HE GLANCED CONTEMPTUOUSLY AT THE GIGANTIC SORILLO." + +"'A SOLDIER FROM AYACUCHO! HERE IS ONE OF OUR BRAVE + DELIVERERS!'" + + + + +AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD. + + +CHAPTER I. + +A BIRTHDAY EVE. + +In spite of my English name--Jack Crawford--and my English blood, I +have never set foot on that famous little island in the North Sea, and +now it is quite unlikely that I ever shall do so. + +I was born in Peru, on the outskirts of beautiful Lima, where, until +the year 1819, on the very eve of my fourteenth birthday, the days of +my childhood were passed. + +I expect you know that in ancient days Peru was called the "Land of the +Sun," because the sun was worshipped by the natives. Their great city +was Cuzco, built, it is said, in 1043 A.D., by Manco Capac, the first +of the Incas, or Emperors of Peru. + +The natives believed Manco to be a child of the sun; but I have heard +an old story that his father was a shipwrecked Englishman, who married +the daughter of a Peruvian chief. I do not think this tale correct, +but it is full of interest. + +Most of the Incas ruled very wisely, and the remains of palaces, +temples, and aqueducts show that the people were highly civilized; but +in 1534 the Spaniards, under Pizarro, invaded the country, and swept +away the glorious empire of the Incas. + +After that Peru became a part of Spanish America, and Pizarro founded +the city of Lima, which he made the capital. + +My father, who settled in the country when quite a young man, married a +Peruvian lady of wealthy and influential family. The estate near Lima +formed part of her marriage portion, and a beautiful place it was, with +a fine park, and a lake which served me both for boating and bathing. +I had several friends, chiefly Spaniards, but two English boys, whose +fathers were merchants in Callao, often visited me, and many a pleasant +game we had together. + +At this time Peru was a Spanish colony, but some people, among whom was +my father, wanted to make it an independent country, having its own +ruler. Being still a boy, I did not hear much of these things, though, +from certain talk, I understood that the country was in a most +unsettled state, and that the Spanish governor had thrown many good men +into prison for urging the people to free themselves. + +One evening, in March 1819, I was busy in my workshop painting a small +boat. My father had been absent for nearly a week, but he had promised +to return for my birthday, and every moment I expected to see him +crossing the courtyard. + +Presently, hearing old Antonio unfasten the wicket-gate, I put down my +brush, wiped my hands, and ran out joyously. + +The happy welcome died on my lips. It was not my father who had +entered, but Rosa Montilla, the young daughter of a famous Spanish +officer. She was nearly a year younger than myself, and a frequent +visitor at our house. Often we had gone together for a row on the +lake, or for a gallop on our ponies round the park. + +She was very pretty, with deep blue eyes and fair hair, quite unlike +most Spanish girls, and generally full of fun and good spirits. Now, +however, she was very pale and looked frightened. I noticed, too, that +she had no covering on her head or shoulders, and that she had not +changed the thin slippers worn in the house. + +These things made me curious and uneasy. I feared some evil had +befallen her father, and knew not how to act. On seeing me she made a +little run forward, and, bursting into tears, cried, "O Juan, Juan!" +using, as also did my mother, the Spanish form of my name. + +Now, being only a boy, and being brought up for the most part among +boys, I was but a clumsy comforter, though I would have done anything +to lessen her grief. + +"What is it, Rosa?" I asked; "what has happened?" But for answer she +could only wring her hands and cry, "O Juan, Juan!" + +"Do not cry, Rosa!" I said, and then doing what I should have done in +the first place, led her toward the drawing-room, where my mother was. +"Mother will comfort you. Tell her all about it," I said confidently, +for it was to my mother I always turned when things went wrong. + +On this her tears fell faster, but she came with me, and together we +entered the room. + +"Juan!" cried my mother.--"Rosa! what is the matter? Why are you +crying? But come to me, darling;" and in another moment she was +pressing the girl to her bosom. + +At a sign from her I left the room, but did not go far away. Rosa's +action was so odd that I waited with impatience to hear the reason. +She must have left her home hurriedly and unobserved, since it was an +unheard-of thing that the daughter of Don Felipe Montilla should be out +on foot and unattended. I was sure that should her father discover it +he would be greatly annoyed. The whole affair was so mysterious that I +could make nothing of it. The girl's sobs were more under control now, +and she began to speak. As she might not wish me to hear her story, I +walked away, meaning to chat with Antonio at the gate, and to await my +father's return. + +He might not come for hours yet, as it was still early evening, but I +hoped he would, and the more so now on Rosa's account. She might need +help which I was not old enough to give; while, as it chanced, Joseph +Craig, my father's trusty English servant, had gone that afternoon into +Callao. However, he also might be back at any moment now, and would +not, in any case, be late. + +Half an hour had perhaps passed, and I was turning from the gate, when +two horsemen dashed up at full speed. One was Joseph Craig, or Jose as +the Spaniards called him, and my feeling of uneasiness returned as I +noticed that his face, too, wore a strange and startled look. + +Jose, as I have said, was my father's servant; but we all regarded him +more as a friend, and treated him as one of ourselves. He was a +well-built man of medium height, with good features and keen gray eyes. +He spoke English and Spanish fluently, and could make himself +understood in several Indian dialects. He kept the accounts of the +estate, and might easily have obtained a more lucrative situation in +any counting-house in Callao. He excelled, too, in outdoor sports, and +had taught me to fence, to shoot, and to ride straight. + +The second man I did not know. He seemed to be an Indian of the +mountains, and was of gigantic stature. His dress was altogether +different from that of the Spaniards, and in his cap he wore a plume of +feathers. His face was scarred by more than one sword-cut, his brows +were lowering, and his massive jaw told of great animal strength. +Jose's horse had galloped fast, but the one ridden by the stranger was +flaked with foam. + +Antonio would have opened the big gate without question: but I, +thinking of Rosa, forbade him, saying to Jose in English, "Does he mean +harm to the girl?" + +You see, my head was full of the one idea, and I could think of nothing +else. I imagined that Rosa had run away from some peril, and that this +man with the savage face and cruel eyes had tracked her to our gate. +So I put the question to Jose, who looked at me wonderingly. + +"The girl?" he repeated slowly; "what girl?" + +"Rosa Montilla," I answered. + +We spoke in English; but at the mention of Rosa's name the mountaineer +scowled savagely, and leaned forward as if to take part in the +conversation. + +"The man has come from the mountains with a message for your mother," +said Jose; "I met him at the entrance to the park. But if Rosa +Montilla is here, the news is known already." + +His face was very pale, and he spoke haltingly, as if his words were +burdensome, and there was a look in his eyes which I had never seen +before. + +I motioned to Antonio, and the two passed through. What message did +they bring? What news could link dainty little Rosa with this wild +outlaw of the hills? + +Jose jumped to the ground and walked with me, laying a hand on my +shoulder. Until then I had no thought of the truth, but the touch of +his fingers sent a shiver of fear through me, and I looked at his face +in alarm. + +"What is it, Jose?" I asked; "what has happened? Why did Rosa steal +here alone and sob in my mother's arms as if her heart would break?" + +"The little maid has heard bad news," he answered quietly, "though how +I do not know." + +"And as she had no mother, she came to mine for comfort," I said. "It +was a happy thought: mother will make her forget her trouble." + +Jose stopped, and looked searchingly in my face. + +"Poor boy!" he said. "You have no idea of the truth, and how can I +tell you? The little maid did not weep for her own sorrow, but for +yours and your mother's." + +At that I understood without further words, though I was to learn more +soon. The reason of it I guessed, though not the matter; but I knew +that somewhere my dear father lay dead--killed by order of the Spanish +viceroy. + +Jose saw from my face that I knew, and there was sympathy in the very +touch of his hand. + +"It is true," he whispered. "The Spaniards trapped him in the +mountains, whither he had gone to meet the Indians. They wished to +rise against the government; but he knew it was madness just now, and +thought to keep them quiet till his own plans were ready." + +"And the Spaniards slew him?" + +"Yes," replied Jose simply. "Here," pointing to the mountaineer, "is +our witness." + +"But how did Rosa hear of it? she was not in the mountains. Ah, I +forgot! Her father stands high in the viceroy's favour. And so my +father is dead!" + +The thought unnerved me, and I could have cried aloud in my sorrow. + +"Hold up your head, boy!" exclaimed the harsh voice of the mountaineer. +"Tears are for women and girls. Years ago my father's head was cut +off, but I did not cry. I took my gun and went to the mountains," and +he finished with a bitter laugh. + +"But my mother!" I said. "The news will break her heart." + +"The world will not know it," he answered, and he spoke truly. + +"I am glad the little maid has told her," remarked Jose, giving his +horse and that of the stranger to a serving-man. "Jack, do you go in +and prepare her for our coming." + +A single glance showed that Rosa had indeed told her story. She sat on +a lounge, looking very miserable. My mother rose and came toward me. +Taking my hands, she clasped them in her own. She was a very beautiful +woman, famous for her beauty even among the ladies of Lima. She was +tall and slightly built, with black hair and glorious dark eyes that +shone like stars. I have heard that at one time she was called the +"Lady of the Stars," and I am not surprised. They shone now, but all +gentleness had gone from them, and was replaced by a hard, fierce +glitter which half frightened me. Her cheeks were white, and her lips +bloodless; but as far as could be seen, she had not shed a tear. + +Still holding my hands, and looking into my face, she said, "You have +heard the news, Juan? You know that your father lies dead on the +mountains, slain while carrying a message of peace to the fierce men +who live there?" + +I bowed my head, but could utter no sound save the anguished cry of +"Mother, mother!" + +"Hush!" she exclaimed; "it is no time for tears now. I shall weep +later in my own room, but not before the world, Juan. Our grief is our +own, my son, not the country's. And there is little Rosa, brave little +Rosa, who came to bring me the news; she must go back. Let Miguel +bring round the carriage, and see that half a dozen of the men ride in +attendance. Don Felipe's daughter must have an escort befitting her +father's rank." + +I began to speak of the strange visitor outside; but Rosa was her first +care, and she would see no one until Rosa had been attended to. So I +hurried Miguel, the coachman, and the men who were to ride on either +side of the carriage, returning to the room only when all was ready. + +Mother had wrapped Rosa up warmly, and now, kissing her, she said, +"Good-bye, my child. You were very good to think of me, and I shall +not forget. Tell your father the truth; he will not mind now." + +Rosa kissed my mother in reply, and walked unsteadily to the coach. +She was still sobbing, and the sight of her white face added to my +misery. + +"Don't cry, Rosa," said I, as I helped her into the carriage and wished +her good-bye, neither of us having any idea of the strange events which +would happen before we met again. + +As soon as the carriage had gone, my mother directed that the stranger +should be admitted, and he came in accompanied by Jose. I would have +left the room, but my mother stopped me, saying,-- + +"No, Juan; your place is here. An hour ago you were but a thoughtless +boy; now you must learn to be a man.--Senor, you have brought news? +You have come to announce the death of my husband; is it not so?" + +The mountaineer bowed almost to the ground. + +"It is a sad story, senora, but it will not take long to tell. The +Spaniards pretended he was stirring up our people to revolt; they +waited for him in the passes, and shot him down like a dog." + +"Did you see him fall?" + +The fellow's eyes flashed with savage rage. "Had I been there," he +cried, "not a soldier of them all would have returned to his quarters! +But they shall yet pay for it, senora. My people are mad to rise. +Only say the word, and send the son of the dead man to ride at their +head, and Lima shall be in flames to-morrow." + +My mother made a gesture of dissent. + +"Don Eduardo liked not cruelty," she exclaimed; "and it would be but a +poor revenge to slay the innocent. But Juan shall take his father's +place, and work for his country's freedom. When the time comes to +strike he shall be ready." + +"Before the time comes he will have disappeared," cried the +mountaineer, with a harsh laugh. "Do you think Don Eduardo's son will +be allowed to live? Accidents, senora, are common in Peru!" + +"It is true," remarked Jose; "Juan will never be out of danger." + +"But the country is not ready for revolt, and only harm can come from a +rising now. Should the Indians leave their mountain homes, the trained +soldiers will annihilate them." + +"But Juan must be saved!" + +"Yes," assented my mother; "we must save Juan to take his father's +place." + +After this there was silence for a time. Then Jose spoke, "There is +one way," said he slowly. "He can find a refuge in Chili till San +Martin is ready; but he must go at once." + +A spasm of fresh pain shot across my mother's face, but it disappeared +instantly; even with this added grief she would not let people know how +she suffered. Only as her hand rested on mine I felt it tremble. + +"Let it be so, Jose," she said simply. "I leave it to you." + +Then she thanked the mountaineer who had ridden so far to break the +terrible news to her, and the two men went away, leaving us two +together. + +"Mother," I said, "must I really leave you?" + +For answer she clasped me in her arms and kissed my face passionately. + +"But you will come back, my boy!" she cried; "you will come back. Now +that your father is no more, you are my only hope, the only joy of my +life. O Juan, Juan! it is hard to let you go; but Jose is right--there +is no other way. I will be brave, dear, and wait patiently for your +return. Follow in your father's footsteps. Do the right, and fear not +whatever may happen; be brave and gentle, and filled with love for your +country, even as he was. Keep his memory green in your heart, and you +cannot stray from the path of honour." + +"I will try, mother." + +"And if--if we never meet again, my boy, I will try to be brave too." + +She wiped away the tears which veiled like a mist the brilliance of her +starry eyes, and we sat quietly in the darkening room, while outside +Jose was making preparations for our immediate departure. + +At last he knocked at the door, and without a tremor in her voice she +bade him enter. + +"The horses are saddled, senora." + +"Yes; and your plan, what is it?" she asked. + +"It is very simple, senora. Juan and I will ride straight to Mr. +Warren at Callao. He may have a vessel bound for Valparaiso; if not, +he will find us one for my master's sake. Once at sea, we shall be out +of danger. General San Martin will give us welcome, and there are many +Peruvians in his army." + +Once my mother's wonderful nerve nearly failed her. "You will take +care of him, Jose," she said brokenly. + +"I will guard him with my life, senora!" + +"I know it, I am sure of it; and some day yon will bring him back to +me. God will reward you, Jose.--Good-bye, Juan, my boy. Oh how +reluctant I am to let you go!" + +I will not dwell on the sadness of that parting. The horses were +waiting in the courtyard, and after the last fond embrace I mounted. + +"Good-bye, mother!" + +"Farewell, my boy. God keep you!" and as we moved away I saw her white +handkerchief fluttering through the gloom. + +At the gate the Indian waited for us, and he followed a few paces in +the rear. + +I thought this strange, and asked Jose about it. + +"It may be well to have a friend to guard our backs," he replied. + +So in the gathering darkness I stole away from my home, with my heart +sore for my father's death and my mother's suffering. And it was the +eve of my birthday--the eve of the day to which I had looked forward +with such delight! + +Being so young, I did not really understand the peril that surrounded +me; but my faith in Jose was strong, and I felt confident that in +taking me away he was acting for the best. + +Our path through the park led us near the lake, and I glanced +sorrowfully at its calm waters and fern-fringed border. I would have +liked to linger a moment at its margin, dwelling on past joys; but Jose +hurried me on, remarking there was no time to waste. + +Only, as the great gates swung open, he let me stop, so that I might +bid a silent adieu to the beautiful home where my happy days of +childhood had been passed. + +"Keep a brave heart," said he kindly; "we shall be back some day. And +now for a word of advice. Ride carefully and keep your eyes open. I +don't want to frighten you, but the sooner we're clear of Lima the +better I shall be pleased." + +With that he put spurs to his horse, and with the clanging of the gate +in our ears we rode off on the road to Callao, while the gigantic +Indian followed about twenty paces behind. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +AN EXCITING VOYAGE. + +It may be that Jose's fears on my account had exaggerated the danger, +as we reached Callao without interruption, and dismounted outside Mr. +Warren's villa. Here the Indian took leave of us, but before going he +unfastened a silver key from the chain round his neck, and pressed it +into my hand. + +"It may happen," said he, "that at some time or other you will need +help. That key and the name of Raymon Sorillo will obtain it for you +from every patriot in the mountains of Peru. For the present, +farewell. When you return from Chili we shall meet again." + +Without waiting for my thanks he bade adieu to Jose and then, spurring +his horse into a gallop, he disappeared. + +From the man who opened the gate in answer to our summons we learned +that my father's friend was at home, and leaving our horses, we went +immediately into the house. This English merchant had often been our +guest, and it was soon abundantly evident that we had done right in +trusting him. He was a short, round-faced man, with a florid +complexion, twinkling eyes, and sandy hair. He was very restless and +irritable, and had a queer habit of twiddling his thumbs backward and +forward whenever his hands were unoccupied. + +"How do, Joseph?" exclaimed he, jumping up. "Come to take that berth I +offered you? No? Well, well, what a fool a man can be if he tries! +Why, bless me, this is young Jack Crawford! Eight miles from home, and +at this time of night too! Anything the matter? Get it out, Joseph, +and don't waste time." + +While Joseph was explaining the circumstances, the choleric little man +danced about the room, exclaiming at intervals, "Ted Crawford gone? +Dear, dear! Not a better fellow in South America! I'd shoot 'em all +or string 'em up! The country's going to the dogs, and a man isn't +safe in his own house! Eh? What? Hurt the boy? What's the boy to do +with it? They can't punish him if his father had been fifty times a +rebel!" + +"That is so, sir," remarked Jose; "but he might meet with an +unfortunate accident, or vanish mysteriously, or something of that +kind. What's the use of making believe? Those who have got rid of the +father won't spare the son, should he happen to stand in their way." + +"Which he will," interrupted Mr. Warren. "My poor friend was hand in +glove with the Indians, and they'll rally round the boy." + +"There are other things, too, which need not be gone into now, +however," said Jose; "but the long and the short of it is that Jack +must be got out of the way at present." + +"And his mother?" + +"She has sent him to you." + +"But he can't be hidden here. The rascally Dons will have him in the +casemates before one can say 'Jack Robinson!'" + +"We don't mean to stay here, sir," replied Jose. "Our idea is to go to +Valparaiso, and we thought if you had a ship--" + +"The very thing, Joseph," and the thumbs went backward and forward +taster than ever. "Maxwell has a schooner leaving in the morning. You +can go on board to-night if you choose, but you had better have some +supper first." + +As it happened, both Jose and I had been some time without food, so we +were glad to have something to eat; after which Mr. Warren took us to +the quay, where the schooner _Aguila_ lay moored. + +"There she is," he remarked; "let us go aboard. Most likely we shall +find Maxwell there.--Hi, you fellows, show a light!--Lazy dogs, aren't +they? Mind your foot there, and don't tumble into the harbour; you +won't get to Valparaiso that way.--That you, Maxwell? I have brought a +couple of friends who are so charmed with your boat that they want to +make a trip in her. Where do you keep your cabin? Let's go down +there; we can't talk on deck." + +Mr. Maxwell was another English merchant at Callao, and as soon as he +heard what had happened, he readily agreed to give us a passage in the +_Aguila_. We must be prepared to rough it, he said. The schooner had +no accommodation for passengers, but she was a sound boat, and the +Chilian skipper was a trustworthy sailor. Then he sent to his +warehouse for some extra provisions, and afterwards introduced us to +the captain, whose name was Montevo. + +As the schooner was to sail at daylight, our friends remained with us, +and, sitting in the dingy cabin, chatted with Jose about the state of +the country. By listening to the talk I learned that General San +Martin was a great soldier from Buenos Ayres, who, having overthrown +the Spanish power in Chili, was collecting an army with which to drive +the Spanish rulers from Peru. At the same time another leader, General +Bolivar, was freeing the northern provinces, and it was thought that +the two generals, joining their forces, would sweep Peru from north to +south. + +"And a good thing, too!" exclaimed Mr. Warren. "Perhaps we shall have +a little peace then!" + +"Pooh! stuff!" said his friend; "things will be worse than ever! These +people can't rule themselves. They're like disorderly schoolboys, and +need a firm master who knows how to use the birch. I am all for a +stern master." + +"So am I," agreed Jose, "if he's just, which the Spaniards aren't." + +"That is so," cried Mr. Warren. "What would our property be worth if +it wasn't for the British frigate lying in the harbour? Tell me that, +Maxwell; tell me that, sir! They'd confiscate the whole lot, and clap +us into prison for being paupers," and the thumbs revolved like the +sails of a windmill. + +So the talk continued until daybreak, when the skipper, knocking at the +cabin door, informed us that the schooner was ready to sail; so we all +went on deck, where the kindly merchants bade us good-bye, and hoped we +should have a pleasant voyage. + +"Keep the youngster out of mischief, Joseph. There's plenty of food +for powder without using him," were Mr. Warren's last words as he +stepped ashore, followed by his friend. + +It was the first time I had been on board a ship, and I knew absolutely +nothing of what the sailors were doing; but presently the boat began to +move, the merchants, waving their hands, shouted a last good-bye, and +very quickly we passed to the outer harbour. + +I have been in many dangers and suffered numerous hardships since then, +some of which are narrated in this book, but I have never felt quite so +wretched and miserable as on the morning of our departure from Callao. + +Wishing to divert my thoughts, Jose pointed out the beauties of the bay +and the shore; but my gaze went far inland--to the lonely home where my +mother sat with her grief, to the mighty cordillera where my father lay +dead. Time softened the pain, and brought back the pleasures of life, +but just then it seemed as if I should never laugh or sing or be merry +again. + +The first day or two on the _Aguila_ did not tend to make me more +cheerful, though the skipper did what he could to make us comfortable. +We slept in a dirty little box, which was really the mate's cabin, and +had our meals, or at least Jose had, at the captain's table. + +By degrees, however, my sickness wore off, and on the fourth morning I +began to take an interest in things. By this time the land was out of +sight; for miles and miles the blue water lay around us--an +interminable stretch. There was not a sail to be seen, and the utter +loneliness impressed me with a feeling of awe. + +Jose was as ignorant of seafaring matters as myself; but the captain +said we were making a good voyage, and with that we were content. A +stiff breeze blew the schooner along merrily, the blue sky was flecked +only by the softest white clouds, and the swish, swish of the water +against the vessel's sides sounded pleasantly in our ears. I began to +think there were worse ways of earning a living than by going to sea. + +That same evening I turned in early, leaving Jose on deck, but I was +still awake when he entered the cabin. + +"There's an ugly storm brewing," said he, kicking off his boots, "and I +don't think the skipper much likes the prospect of it. He has all +hands at work taking in the sails and getting things ready generally. +Rather a lucky thing for us that the _Aguila_ is a stout boat. Listen! +That's the first blast!" as the schooner staggered and reeled. + +Above us we heard the captain shouting orders, the answering cries of +the sailors, and the groaning of the timbers, as if the ship were a +living being stretched on a rack. Slipping out of my bunk and dressing +quickly, I held on to a bar to steady myself. + +"Let us go on deck before they batten down the hatches," said Jose, +putting on his boots again. "I've no mind to stay in this hole. If +the ship sinks, we shall be drowned like rats in a trap." + +He climbed the steps, and I followed, shuddering at the picture his +words had conjured up. The scene was grand, but wild and awful in the +extreme. I hardly dared to watch the great waves thundering along as +if seeking to devour our tiny craft. Now the schooner hung poised for +a moment on the edge of a mountainous wave; the next instant it seemed +to be dashing headlong into a fathomless, black abyss. The wind tore +on with a fierce shriek, and we scudded before it under bare poles, +flying for life. + +Two men were at the wheel; the captain, lashed aft, was yelling out +orders which no one could understand, or, understanding, obey. The +night, as yet, was not particularly dark, and I shivered at sight of +the white, scared faces of the crew. They could do nothing more; in +the face of such a gale they were helpless as babies; those at the +wheel kept the ship's head straight by great effort, but beyond that, +everything was unavailing. Our fate was in the hands of God; He alone +could determine whether it should be life or death. + +Once, above the fury of the storm, the howling of the wind, the +straining of the timber, there rose an awful shriek; and though the +tragedy was hidden from my sight, I knew it to be the cry of an unhappy +sailor in his death-agony. A huge wave, leaping like some ravenous +animal to the deck, had caught him and was gone; while the spirit of +the wind laughed in demoniacal glee as he was tossed from crest to +crest, the sport of the cruel billows. + +The captain had seen, but was powerless to help. The schooner was but +the plaything of the waves, while to launch a boat--ah, how the +storm-fiends would have laughed at the attempt! So leaving the hapless +sailor to his fate, we drove on through a blinding wall of rain into +the dark night, waiting for the end. No sky was visible, nor the light +of any star, but the great cloud walls stood up thick on every side, +and it seemed as if the boat were plunging through a dark and dreary +tunnel. + +Close to me, where a lantern not yet douted [Transcriber's note: +doused?] cast its fitful light, a man lay grovelling on the deck. He +was praying aloud in an agony of fear, but no sound could be heard from +his moving lips. Suddenly there came a crash as of a falling body, the +light went out, and I saw the man no more. How long the night lasted I +cannot tell; to me it seemed an age, and no second of it was free from +fear. Whether we were driving north, south, east, or west no one knew, +while the fury of the storm would have drowned the thunder of waves on +a surf-beaten shore. But the _Aguila_ was an English boat, built by +honest English workmen, and her planks held firmly together despite the +raging storm. + +For long hours, as I have said, we were swallowed up in darkness, +feeling ourselves in the presence of death; but the light broke through +at last, a cold gray light, and cheerless withal, which exactly suited +our unhappy condition. The wind, too, as though satisfied with its +night's work, sank to rest, while by degrees the tossing of the angry +billows subsided into a peaceful ripple. + +We looked at each other and at the schooner. One man had been washed +overboard; another, struck by a falling spar, still lay insensible; the +rest were weary and exhausted. Thanks to the skipper's foresight, the +_Aguila_ had suffered less than we had expected, and he exclaimed +cheerfully that the damage could soon be repaired. But though our good +ship remained sound, the storm had wrought a fearful calamity, which +dazed the bravest, and blanched every face among us. + +The skipper brought the news when he joined us at breakfast, and his +lips could scarcely frame the words. + +"The water-casks are stove in," he exclaimed, "and we have hardly a +gallon of fresh water aboard!" + +"Then we must run for the nearest port," said Jose, trying to speak +cheerily. + +The captain spread out his hands dramatically. + +"There is no port," he replied, in something of a hopeless tone, "and +there is no wind. The schooner lies like a log on the water." + +We went on deck, forgetting past dangers in the more terrifying one +before us. The captain had spoken truly: not a breath of air stirred, +and the sea lay beneath us like a sheet of glass. The dark clouds had +rolled away, and though the sun was not visible, the thin haze between +us and the sky was tinged blood-red. It was such a sight as no man on +board had seen, and the sailors gazed at it in awestruck silence. + +Hour after hour through the livelong day the _Aguila_ lay motionless, +as if held by some invisible cable. No ripple broke the glassy +surface, no breath of wind fanned the idle sails, and the air we +breathed was hot and stifling, as if proceeding from a furnace. + +The men lounged about listlessly, unable to forget their distress even +in sleep. The captain scanned the horizon eagerly, looking in vain for +the tiniest cloud that might promise a break-up of the hideous weather. +Jose and I lay under an awning, though this was no protection from the +stifling atmosphere. + +Every one hoped that evening would bring relief, that a breeze might +spring up, or that we might have a downpour of rain. Evening came, but +the situation was unchanged, and a great fear entered our hearts. How +long could we live like this--how long before death would release us +from our misery? for misery it was now in downright, cruel earnest. + +Once Jose rose and walked to the vessel's side, but, returning shortly, +lay face downward on the deck. + +"I must shut out the sight of the sea," he said, "or I shall go mad. +What an awful thing to perish of thirst with water everywhere around +us!" + +This was our second night of horror, but very different in its nature +from the first. Then, for long hours, we went in fear of the storm; +now, we would have welcomed the most terrible tempest that ever blew, +if only it brought us rain. + +Very slowly the night crept by, and again we were confronted by the +gray haze, with its curious blood-red tint. We could not escape from +the vessel, as our boats had been smashed in the hurricane; we could +only wait for what might happen in this sea of the dead. + +"Rain or death, it is one or the other!" remarked Jose, as, rising to +our feet, we staggered across to the skipper. + +Rain or death! Which would come first, I wondered. + +The captain could do nothing, though I must say he played his part like +a man--encouraging the crew, foretelling a storm which should rise +later in the day, and asserting that we were right in the track of +ships. We had only to hold on patiently, he said, and all would come +right. + +Jose also spoke to the me cheerfully, trying to keep alive a glimmer of +hope; but as the morning hours dragged wearily along, they were fain to +give way to utter despair. No ships could reach us, they said, while +the calm lasted, and not the slightest sign of change could be seen. +Our throats were parched, our lips cracked, our eyes bloodshot and +staring. One of the crew, a plump, chubby, round-faced man, began +talking aloud in a rambling manner, and presently, with a scream of +excitement, he sprang into the rigging. + +"Sail ho!" he cried, "sail ho!" and forgetting our weakness, we all +jumped up to peer eagerly through the gauzy mist. + +"Where away?" exclaimed the captain. + +The sailor laughed in glee. "Oho! Here she comes!" cried he; "here +she comes!" and, tearing off his shirt, waved it frantically. + +The action was so natural, the man seemed so much in earnest, that we +hung over the schooner's side, anxiously scanning the horizon for our +rescuer. Again the fellow shouted, "Here she comes!" and then, with a +frenzied laugh, flung himself into the glassy sea. + +A groan of despair burst from the crew, and for several seconds no one +moved. Then Jose, crying, "Throw me a rope!" jumped overboard, and +swam to the spot where the man had gone down. + +"Come back!" cried the skipper hoarsely; "you will be drowned! The +poor fellow has lost his senses." But Jose, unheeding the warning, +clutched the man as he came to the surface a second time. + +We heard the demented laugh of the drowning sailor, and then the two +disappeared--down, down into the depths together. + +"He has thrown his life away for a madman!" said the captain, and his +words brought me to my senses. + +With a prayer in my heart I leaped into the sea, hoping that I might +yet save the brave fellow. + +A cry from the schooner told me that he had reappeared, and soon I saw +him alone, and well-nigh exhausted. A dozen strokes took me to his +side, and then, half supporting him, I turned toward the vessel. The +men flung us a rope, and willing hands hauled first Jose and then me +aboard. + +"A brave act," said the skipper gruffly, "but foolhardy!" + +Jose smiled, and, still leaning on me, went below to the cabin, where, +removing our wet things, we had a good rub down. + +"Thanks, my boy!" said Jose, "but for your help I doubt if I could have +got back. The poor beggar nearly throttled me, down under!" and I +noticed on his throat the marks of fingers that must have pressed him +like a vice. + +"Do you feel it now?" I asked. + +"Only here," touching his throat; "but for that, I should be all the +better for the dip. Let us go on deck again; I am stifling here. And +keep up your spirits, Jack. Don't give way the least bit, or it will +be all over with you. We are in a fearful plight, but help may yet +come." And I promised him solemnly that I would do my best. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +THE END OF THE "AGUILA." + +The drowning of the crazy sailor had a bad effect on the rest of the +crew, and it became evident that they had abandoned all hope. They +hung about so listlessly that even the captain could not rouse them, +and indeed there was nothing they could do. + +This utter inability to help ourselves was the worst evil of the case. +Even I, though only a boy, wanted to do something, no matter what, if +it would help in the struggle for life; but I, like the rest, could +only wait--wait with throat like a furnace, peeling lips, smarting +eyes, and aching head, till death or rain put an end to the misery. + +I tried not to think of it, tried to shut out the horrible end so close +at hand; but in vain. Jose sat beside me, endeavouring to rouse me. +It must rain, he said, or the wind would spring up, and we should meet +with a ship; but in his heart I think he had no hope. + +The day crawled on, afternoon came, and I fell into a troubled sleep. +The pain of my throat directed my wandering thoughts perhaps, and +conjured up horrible visions. I was lashed to the wheel of the +_Aguila_, and the schooner went drifting, drifting far away into an +unknown sea. All was still around me, though I was not alone. Sailors +walked the deck or huddled in the forecastle--sailors with skin of +wrinkled parchment, with deep-set, burning yet unseeing eyes, with +moving lips from which no sound came; and as we sailed away ever +further and further into the darkness, the horror of it maddened me. I +struggled desperately to free myself, calling aloud to Jose to save me. +Then a hand was laid softly on my forehead, and a kind, familiar voice +whispered,-- + +"Jack! Jack! Wake up. You are dreaming!" Opening my eyes I saw Jose +bending over me, his face stricken with fear. My head burned, but my +face and limbs were wet as if I had just come from the sea. "Get up," +said Jose sharply, "and walk about with me. You must not dream again." + +It seems that in my sleep I had screamed aloud; but the sailors took no +notice of me either then or afterwards. They had troubles enough of +their own, and were totally indifferent to those of others. + +The red tinge had now gone from the haze, leaving it cold and gray; the +sea was dull and lifeless, no ripple breaking the stillness of its +surface. + +"Is there any hope, Jose?" I asked in a whisper, and from his face, +though not from his speech, learned there was none. + +The captain had stored two bottles of liquor in the cabin for his own +use. These he shared amongst us; but it was fiery stuff, and even at +the first increased rather than allayed our thirst. Most of the crew +were lying down now; but one had climbed to the roof of the forecastle, +and stood there singing in a weak, quavering voice. Jose spoke to him +soothingly; but he only laughed, and continued his weird song. His +face haunted me; even when darkness closed like a pall around us I +could still see it. He sang on and on in the gloom, and it appeared to +me that he was wailing our death-chant. Presently there was silence, +followed by a slight shuffling sound as the man moved to another part +of the deck; then the song began again, and was followed by a burst of +uncanny laughter. Suddenly it seemed as if the poor fellow realized +his position, as he broke into a sob and called on God to save him. + +Making our way to the other side of the vessel, we found him sitting +disconsolately on a coil of rope, and did our best to cheer him. The +skipper joined us, but no other man stirred hand or foot. Apparently +their terrible suffering had overpowered all feeling of sympathy. + +"Don't give way," said Jose brightly, laying a hand on his shoulder; +"bear up, there's a good fellow. Rain may fall at any moment now, and +then we shall be saved." + +"Ah, senor," cried the poor fellow huskily, "my throat is parched, +parched; my head is like a burning coal! but I will be quiet now and +brave--if I can." + +"This is terrible," exclaimed the captain piteously, as after a time we +turned away. + +"Hope must be our sheet-anchor," said Jose. "Once cut ourselves adrift +from that, and we shall go to ruin headlong." + +He spoke bravely, but his words came from the lips only, and this we +all knew. Sitting down on a coil of rope, we waited for the night to +pass, longing for yet dreading the appearance of another dawn. It was +dreadfully silent, except when some poor fellow broke the stillness +with his groans and cries of anguish. + +It was, as nearly as I could judge, about one o'clock in the morning, +when Jose suddenly sprang to his feet with a cry of joy. + +"What is it?" I asked; and he, clapping his hands, exclaimed,-- + +"Lightning! See, there is another flash.--Get up, my hearties; the +wind's rising. There's a beautiful clap of thunder. We shall have a +fine storm presently!" + +One by one the men staggered to their feet. They heard the crash of +the thunder, and a broad sheet of lightning showed them banks of cloud +gathering thick and black overhead. Directed by the captain and helped +by Jose, they spread every sail and awning that could be used, +collected buckets and a spare cask, and awaited the rain eagerly and +expectantly. Would it come? Fiery snakes played about the tops of the +masts or leaped from sky to sea; the thunder pealed and pealed again +through the air; the wind rose, the sails filled, the schooner moved +through the water, but no rain fell. + +I cannot tell you a tithe of the hopes and fears which passed through +our hearts during the next half-hour. Now we exulted in the certainty +of relief; again we were thrown into the abyss of despair. We stood +looking at the darkness, hoping, praying that the life-giving rain +might fall speedily upon our upturned faces. + +Another terrific crash, and then--ah, how earnestly we gave thanks to +God for His mercy--the raindrops came pattering to the deck, lightly at +first, lightly and softly, like scouts sent forward to spy out the +land, and afterwards the main body in a crowd beating fiercely, heavily +upon us. How we laughed as, making cups of our hands, we lapped the +welcome water greedily! What cries of delight ascended heavenward as +we filled our spare cask and every vessel that would hold water! The +rain came down in a steady torrent, soaking us through; but we felt no +discomfort, for it fed us with new life. + +Presently the captain got some of the men to work, while the others ate +the food which had lain all day untasted, and then, doubly refreshed, +they relieved their comrades. Jose and I, too, ate sparingly of some +food; but even this little, with the water, made new beings of us. + +As yet the wind was no more than a fair breeze, but by degrees it +became boisterous, and the crew, still weak and now short of three men, +could barely manage the schooner. Jose and I knew nothing of +seamanship, but we bore a hand here and there, straining at this rope +or that as we were bidden, and encouraging the crew to the best of our +ability. + +As yet we gave little thought to the new danger that menaced us, being +full of thanks for our escape from a horrible death; but the fury of +the storm increased, the wind battered against the schooner in howling +gusts, and presently the topgallant mast fell with a crash to the deck. +Fortunately no one was hurt, and we quickly cut the wreckage clear; but +misfortune followed misfortune, and at length, with white, scared face, +the carpenter announced that water was fast rising in the hold. + +Here, at least, Jose and I were of service. Taking our places at the +pumps, we toiled with might and main to keep the water down. Thus the +remainder of the night passed with every one working at the pumps or +assisting the captain to manage the vessel. + +Morning brought no abatement of the storm, but the light enabled us to +realize more clearly how near we were, a second time, to death. The +rain still poured down in torrents, the wind leaped at us with +hurricane fury, the schooner tossed, a helpless wreck, in the midst of +a mountainous sea. The carpenter reported that, in spite of all our +labours, the water was fast gaining on us. The sailors now lost heart, +and one of them left his post, saying sullenly they might as well drown +first as last. It was a dangerous example, but the skipper checked the +mischief. Running forward with loaded pistol, he shouted,-- + +"Go back to the pumps, you coward, or I will shoot you down like a dog! +Call yourself a man? Why, that youngster there is worth fifty of you!" + +The fellow returned to his work; but as the hours passed we became more +and more certain that no amount of pumping would save the ship. Even +now she was but a floating wreck, and soon she would be engulfed by the +raging sea. + +While Jose and I were taking a rest, the captain told us that, even +should the storm cease, the _Aguila_ must go down in less than +twenty-four hours, and that he knew not whether we were close to the +shore or a hundred leagues from it. Jose received the news coolly. He +came of a race that does not believe in whimpering, and his only care +was on my account. + +"I am sorry for your mother, Jack," said he, "and for you too. We're +in a fair hole, and I don't see any way of getting out; but for all +that we will keep our heads cool. Never go under without a fight for +it--that's as good a motto as any other. You heard the skipper say the +schooner is bound to go down, and you know we have no boats--they +wouldn't be any good if we had, while this storm lasts; but if the sea +calms, a plank will keep you afloat a long time, and maybe a ship will +come along handy. Anyhow, make a fight for it, my boy. Now we'll have +a snack of something to eat, and then for another spell at the pumps." + +By this time a feeling of despair had seized the crew, and but for fear +of the captain's pistol they would have stopped work in a body. +However, he kept them at it, and towards noon the tempest ceased almost +as suddenly as it had begun. The gale dropped to a steady breeze, and +the surface of the ocean became comparatively calm. + +The change cheered us; we looked on it as a good omen, and toiled at +the pumps even harder than before. We could not lessen the quantity of +water, but for a time we kept it from gaining, and a germ of hope crept +back into our hearts. Every hour now was likely to be in our favour, +as the captain judged the wind was blowing us to some part of the +coast, where we might either fall in with a vessel or effect a landing. +Thus, between hope and fear, the afternoon passed, and then we saw that +the captain's judgment was correct. + +Straight before us, though far off as yet, appeared the dark line of +coast with a barrier of mountains in the background, and in front a +broad band of snow-white foam. + +Would the schooner cover the distance? If so, would she escape being +dashed to pieces in the thundering surf? These were the questions +which agitated our minds as, impelled by the breeze, she drove through +the water. We of ourselves could do nothing save work at the pumps and +wait for what might happen. + +Afternoon merged into evening, and evening into night. A few stars +peeped forth in the sky, but were soon veiled by grayish clouds. The +broad white band along the shore was startlingly distinct, and still +the issue was undecided. + +The end came with such unexpected suddenness that the men hardly had +time to cry out. Jose and I were resting at the moment, when the +schooner lurched heavily, tried to right herself and failed, filled +with water, and sank like a stone. + +I often think of that shipwreck as a horrible dream. Down, down I +went, holding my breath till it seemed impossible to stay longer +without opening my mouth and swallowing the salt water. By an effort I +restrained myself till my head shot above the surface and once more I +was free to breathe. + +The ship had disappeared entirely, and it was too dark to see such a +small object as a man's head. By great good fortune I managed to seize +a floating spar, and, resting on it, called aloud for Jose. The only +answer was the anguished cry of a drowning man across the waste of +waters. Twice again it came, and then all was silent, though in +imagination I still could hear that anguished cry. The sea rolled in +long surges, carrying me forward without effort and at a great rate +toward the clear white line. Live or die, I could not help myself now, +but was entirely at the mercy of the waves. I thought of Jose's advice +to make a fight for it, but there was nothing to be done. Clinging to +my spar, I was tossed from crest to depth like a ball bandied about by +boys. + +And now my ears were filled with a great roaring as I approached nearer +to the crested foam; then feeling that the end was very near, I prayed +silently yet fervently that God would comfort my mother in this her new +trial, and prepared myself to die. + +From the top of a high wave I went down into the depths, rose again to +the crest of a second huge roller, and then was flung with the velocity +of lightning into the midst of the great sea-horses with their snowy +manes. + +Of this part of the adventure I remember but little, only that for a +moment I lay bruised and battered at the foot of a high rock. + +Once more Jose's advice sounded in my ear, and loosing my spar, I +clambered, dizzy and half blind, to the top. The ramping white horses +raced after as if to drag me back, but finding that impossible, retired +sullenly to spring yet once again. Shrieking and hissing, the great +white monsters tore along, dashing in fury and breaking in impotence +against the immovable rocks. The wild, weird scene, too, frightened +me; for I was but a boy, remember, who up to this had never met with a +more stirring adventure, perhaps, than a tussle with a high-spirited +pony. I was worn out, too, by hard toil, faint from loss of blood, +saddened by the loss of my faithful Jose, and by the awful calamity +that had overtaken the crew of the schooner. Yet, in spite of all, so +strong was the instinct to live, that, almost without thought, I +clambered along the rocky ridge which jutted out from the mainland, +while the baffled waves raced hungrily on either side of me, as if even +now loath to abandon their expected prey. + +At length the line of white foam was at my back. I found myself on a +boulder-strewn beach, and for the time safe! Although half dead with +privation and exposure, I wandered some way along the beach, calling +aloud on Jose and the sailors, forgetful that the roar of the surf +drowned my voice. + +Presently I could go no further, the beach in that direction being +walled in by a rocky cliff, steep and high, and but for a narrow +fissure upon which I happily came, insurmountable. + +I say happily, for at the summit of the cliff I fancied I saw the flash +of a lantern. A lantern meant human beings, who on hearing my story +would search the shore, and find, perhaps, that others besides myself +had escaped from the wreck. With this idea in my head, I began to +climb, going very steadily; for, as I have said, the track was little +more than a fissure in the rock, and my head was far from clear. I +toiled on, cutting my hands and legs with the jagged rocks, but making +some progress, till at length I had covered the greater part of the +distance; then I could do no more. A tiny crevice gave me foothold, +and I was able to rest my arms on a wide ledge, but had no strength to +draw myself up to it. Twice I tried and failed; then fearful lest my +strength should give way, I strove no more, but, raising my voice, +shouted loudly for help. Very mournful the cry sounded in the silent +night, as I hung there utterly helpless on the face of the cliff. + +Again and again I shouted with all my might, to be answered at first +only by the roar of the surf below. Presently, on the summit of the +cliff, not far above me, a lantern flashed, then another, and another, +and a voice hailed me through the darkness. + +"Help!" I cried, "help!" and my voice was full of despair, for my +strength was fast ebbing. I must soon lose my hold, and be dashed to +pieces at the foot of the cliff. + +The lanterns flashed to and fro above me. Would they never come +nearer? What was that? A big stone bounding and bouncing from rock to +rock whizzed past my head, and disappeared in the gloom below. +Collecting all my strength, I shouted again, fearing that it must be +for the last time. + +But now--oh, how sincerely I gave thanks to God!--a light had come over +the edge of the cliff, and though moving slowly, it certainly advanced +in my direction. Yes, I saw a man's outline. In one hand he carried a +lantern, in the other a noosed rope, and he felt his way carefully. + +"Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly enough now; but he heard me, and I +knew I was saved. Putting the lantern on the ledge and grasping the +collar of my coat, he got the noose round my body under the arms, and +those above drew me up. + +[Illustration: "Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly; but he heard me, and +I knew I was saved.] + +The lanterns showed a group of men in uniform, who crowded around me as +I reached the top; but being uncertain how long my strength would last, +I cried,-- + +"A wreck! Search the beach. There may have been others washed ashore." + +Upon this there was much talking, and then two men carried me away, +leaving their companions, as I hoped, to search for any chance +survivors. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE SILVER KEY. + +It would be hard for me to tell just what happened during the next day +or two. I did not lose consciousness altogether, but my nerves were so +shattered that I mixed up fact and fancy, and could hardly separate my +dreams from events which actually took place. + +On the third or fourth day my senses became clearer I lay on a bed in a +small cell-like apartment. In the opposite corner was a mattress, with +a blanket and rug rolled neatly at the head; above it, on the wall, +hung a sword and various military articles, as if the room belonged to +a soldier. + +Presently, as I lay trying to recall things, the door was pushed open, +and a man entered. He was young; his face was frank and open, and he +had fine dark eyes. He was in undress uniform, and I judged, rightly +as it turned out, that he was a Spanish officer. Seeing me looking at +him, he crossed to the bed, and exclaimed in the Spanish tongue, "Are +you better this morning?" + +I nodded and smiled, but could not speak--my throat hurt me so. + +"All right!" he cried gaily. "Don't worry; I understand," and at that +he went out, coming back presently with the military doctor. + +Now I had no cause, then or afterwards, to love the Spaniards; but I +hold it fair to give even an enemy his due, and it is only just to say +that this young officer, Captain Santiago Mariano, treated me royally. +In a sense I owed my life to him, and I have never forgotten his +kindness. + +As my strength returned he often sat with me, talking of the wreck, +from which I was apparently the only one rescued. Three men, he said, +had been washed ashore, but they were all dead. Two were ordinary +sailors, and from his description I easily recognized the third as +Montevo, the skipper. + +There was a rumour, the young officer continued, that a man had been +picked up by some Indians further along the coast; but no one really +knew anything about it, and for his part he looked on it as an idle +tale. + +There was small comfort in tills; yet, against my better judgment, I +began to hope that Jose had somehow escaped from the sea. He was a +strong man and a stout swimmer, while for dogged courage I have rarely +met his equal. + +One morning Santiago came into my room--or rather his--with a troubled +expression on his face. I was able to walk by this time, and stood by +the little window, watching the soldiers at exercise in the courtyard. + +"Crawford," said he abruptly, "have you any reason to be afraid of +General Barejo?" + +Now, until that moment I had not given a thought to the fact that in +escaping one danger I had tumbled headlong into another; but this +question made me uneasy. As far as safety went, I might as well have +stayed at my mother's side in Lima as have blundered into a far-off +fortress garrisoned by Spanish soldiers. + +"I ought not to speak of this," continued Santiago, "but the warning +may help you. Did you hear the guns last night?" + +"Yes," said I, wondering. + +"It was the salute to the general, who is inspecting the forts along +the coast." + +"I have heard my father speak of General Barejo." + +"Well, after dinner last evening the commandant happened to speak of +your shipwreck, and the general was greatly interested. 'A boy named +Crawford?' said he thoughtfully; 'is he in the fort now?' and on +hearing you were, told the commandant he would see you in the morning. +This is he crossing the courtyard. He is coming here, I believe." + +I had only time to thank Santiago for his kindness when the general +entered the room. He was a short, spare man, with closely-cropped gray +hair and a grizzled beard. His face was tanned and wrinkled, but he +held himself erect as a youth; and his profession was most pronounced. + +The young captain saluted, and, at a sign from the general, left the +room. + +Barejo eyed me critically, and with a grim smile exclaimed, "By St. +Philip, there's no need to ask. You're the son of the Englishman +Crawford, right enough." + +"Who was murdered by Spanish soldiers," said I, for his cool and +somewhat contemptuous tone roused me to anger. + +He smiled at this outburst, and spread out his hands as if to say, "The +boy's crazy;" but when he spoke, it was to ask why I had left Lima. + +"Because I had no wish to meet with my father's fate," I answered +brusquely; and he laughed again. + +"Faith," he muttered, "the young cockerel ruffles his feathers early!" +and then, again addressing me, he asked, "And where were you going?" + +"On a sea voyage, for the benefit of my health--and to be out of the +way." + +To this he made no reply, but his brows puckered up as if he were in +deep thought. I stood by the window watching him, and wondering what +would be the outcome of this visit. + +After a short time he said, slowly and deliberately, so that I might +lose nothing of his speech, "Listen to me, young sir. Though you are +young, there are some things you can understand. Your father tried, +and tried hard, to wrest this country from its proper ruler, our +honoured master, the King of Spain. He failed; but others have taken +his place, and though you are only a boy, they will endeavour to make +use of you. We shall crush the rebellion, and the leaders will lose +their lives. I am going to save you from their fate." + +I thought this display of kindness rather strange, but made no remark. + +"In this fortress," he continued, "you will be out of mischief, and +here I intend you shall stay till the troubles are at an end." + +"That sounds very much as if you mean to keep me a prisoner!" I +exclaimed hotly. + +"Exactly," said he; then turning on his heel he walked out. + +From the window I watched him cross the courtyard and enter the +commandant's quarters. Ten minutes afterwards Santiago appeared with a +file of soldiers. + +"Very sorry, my boy," said the young captain, coming into the room, +"but a soldier must obey orders. You are my prisoner." + +"I couldn't wish for a better jailer," said I, laughing. + +"I'm glad you take it like that, but unfortunately you won't be under +my care. Have you all your things? This way, then." + +We marched very solemnly side by side along the corridor, the soldiers +a few paces in the rear. At the end stood a half-dressed Indian, +holding open the door of a cell. + +"Oh, come," said I, looking in, "it's not so bad." + +The cell was, indeed, almost a counterpart of Santiago's room, only the +window was high up and heavily barred. The furniture consisted of +bedstead and rugs, a chair, small table, and one or two other articles. +The floor was of earth, but quite dry; and altogether I was fairly +satisfied with my new home. + +"You'll have decent food and sufficient exercise," said the captain, +who had entered with me; "but"--and here he lowered his voice to a +whisper--"don't be foolish and try to escape. Barejo's orders are +strict, and though it may not appear so, you will be closely guarded." + +"Thanks for the hint," said I as he turned away. + +The Indian shut the door, the bolts were shot, the footsteps of the +soldiers grew fainter, and I was alone. + +I shall not dwell long on my prison life. I had ample food, and twice +a day was allowed to wander unmolested about the courtyard. The +general had gone, and most of the officers, including Santiago, showed +me many acts of kindness, which, though trifling in themselves, did +much towards keeping me cheerful. + +Several weeks passed without incident, and I began to get very tired of +doing nothing. There seemed to be little chance of escape, however. +Every outlet was guarded by an armed sentry, and I was carefully +watched. One day I dragged my bedstead under the window, and making a +ladder of the table and chair, climbed to the bars. A single glance +showed the folly of trying to escape that way without the aid of wings. +That part of the fort stood on the brink of a frightful precipice which +fell sheer away for hundreds of feet to the rocky coast. + +Of course I had no weapon of any kind, but the Spaniards had allowed me +to keep the silver key, which hung around my neck by a thin, stout cord. + +I had almost forgotten the mountaineer's strange words, when a trifling +incident brought them vividly to my mind. One morning the Indian, as +usual, brought in my breakfast, and was turning to go, when he suddenly +stopped and stared at me with a look of intense surprise. He was a +short, stout, beardless man, with a bright brown complexion and rather +intelligent features. + +"Well," I exclaimed, "what is it? Have I altered much since yesterday?" + +The man bent one knee, and bowing low, exclaimed in great excitement, +"It is the key!" + +Then I discovered that, my shirt collar being unfastened, the silver +key had slipped outside, where it hung in full view. + +"Yes," said I, "it is the key right enough. What of it?" + +His eyes were flashing now, and the glow in them lit up his whole face. + +"What is the master's name?" he whispered eagerly. + +Now this was an awkward question for me to answer. In the first place, +the man might or might not be trustworthy; and in the second, the only +name I knew was that of the bandit chief. However, I concluded the +venture was worth making, and said, "Men call the owner of the key +Raymon Sorillo." + +"Ah!" exclaimed the Indian, with a sigh of satisfaction, "he is a great +chief. Hide the key, senor, and wait. A dog's kennel is no place for +the friend of our chief." + +With that he went out, and the door clanged after him, while I stood +lost in astonishment. What did he mean? Was it possible that he +intended to help me? Thrusting the mysterious key out of sight, I sat +down to breakfast with what appetite I could muster. All that day I +was in a state of great excitement, though at exercise I took care to +appear calm. I waited with impatience for the evening meal, which, to +my disgust, was brought by a strange soldier. + +"Hullo!" I exclaimed, "a change of jailers? What has become of the +other fellow?" + +"The dog of an Indian is ill," answered the man, who was evidently in a +very bad temper, "and I have his work to do." + +Placing the things on the table, he went out, slamming the door behind +him, and shooting the bolts viciously. The next morning he came again, +and indeed for four days in succession performed the sick man's duties. + +Now you may be sure I felt greatly interested in this sudden illness. +It filled me with curiosity, and to a certain extent strengthened my +hope that the Indian intended to help me to escape from the fort. What +his plans were, of course I could not conjecture. + +On the fifth night I undressed and lay down as usual. It was quite +dark in the cell, and the only sound that reached me was the periodical +"All's well!" of the sentry stationed at the end of the corridor. For +a long time I lay puzzling over the strange situation, but at length +dropped into a light sleep. + +Suddenly I was awakened by a queer sensation, and sat up in bed. It +was too dark to see anything, but I felt that some one was creeping +stealthily across the floor. Presently I heard a faint sound, and knew +that the object, whatever it might be, was approaching nearer. At the +side of the bed it stopped, and a muffled voice whispered, "Senor, are +you awake?" + +"Yes," said I. "Who's there?" + +"A friend of the silver key. Dress quickly and come with me; the way +is open." + +"Where is the sentry?" I asked. + +"Gagged and insensible," replied the voice. "Quick, while there is yet +time." + +Perhaps it was rather venturesome thus to trust myself in the hands of +an unknown man, but I slipped on my clothes, and keeping touch of his +arm, accompanied him into the dimly-lighted corridor. + +Turning to the left, we glided along close to the wall. At the end of +this passage the body of the sentry lay on the ground, while near at +hand crouched an Indian, keeping watch. + +This man joined us, and my guide immediately led the way into an empty +room, the door of which was open. As soon as we were inside he closed +it softly. + +"Keep close to me," he whispered, and then said something to an unseen +person in a patois I did not understand. + +Presently he stopped, and I could just distinguish the figure of a +third man, who, grasping my hand, whispered, "The silver key has +unlocked the door, senor." + +Before I could recover from my astonishment--for the man who spoke was +the sick jailer--my guide let himself down through a trap-door, and +called to me to follow. I found myself on a flight of steep steps in a +kind of shaft, very narrow, and so foul that breathing was difficult. +At the bottom was a fair-sized chamber, with a lofty roof--at least I +judged it so by the greater purity of the air--and here the guide +stopped until his companion caught up with us. The jailer, to my +surprise, had remained in the fort, but there was no time for +explanation. + +The exit from the chamber was by means of an aperture so low that we +had to lie flat on the ground, and so narrow that even I found it hard +work to wriggle through. + +Of all my adventures, this one impressed itself most strongly on my +mind. People are apt to smile when I speak of what one man called +"crawling along a passage;" yet had the terrors of the journey been +known beforehand, I think I could hardly have summoned the courage to +face them. + +We went in Indian file, I being second, and my shoulders brushed the +sides of what was apparently a stonework tube. There was not a glimmer +of light, and the foul air threatened suffocation at every yard. I +could breathe only with great difficulty, my throat seemed choked, I +was bathed in perspiration, while loathsome creatures crawled or +scampered over every part of me. + +Before half the distance was covered--and I make the confession without +shame--I was truly and horribly afraid. However, there was no turning +back--indeed there was no turning at all--so I crawled on, hoping and +praying for light and air. + +Presently I caught sight of a dull red glow like that from a burning +torch, my breath came more easily, and at the end of another hundred +yards the guide, rising to his feet, stood upright: we had arrived at +the exit from the tunnel. Clambering up, I once more found myself in +the open air, and was instantly followed by the second Indian. Two +other men waited for us, and the four, with some difficulty, rearranged +a huge boulder which effectually blocked the aperture. + +Then the light from the torch was quenched, and I was hurried off in +the darkness. For an hour perhaps we travelled, but in what direction +I had no idea. At first we had the roar of the thundering sea in our +ears, but presently that grew faint, until the sound was completely +lost. The route was rocky, and I should say dangerous; for the guide +clutched my arm tightly, and from time to time whispered a warning. + +At last he stopped and whistled softly. The signal was heard and +answered, and very soon I became aware of several dusky figures, +including both men and horses. No time was wasted in talk; a man +brought me a horse, and a loose cloak with a hood in which to muffle my +head. I mounted, the others sprang to their cumbrous saddles, and at a +word from the guide we set off. + +The route now lay over a desert of loose sand, in which the animals +sank almost to their fetlocks; every puff of wind blew it around us in +clouds, and but for the hood I think I must have been both blinded and +choked. + +I have not the faintest idea how the leader found his way, unless it +was by the direction of the wind, as there were no stars, and it was +impossible to see beyond a few yards. + +Hour after hour passed; dawn broke cold and gray. The choking sand was +left behind, and we approached a narrow valley shut in by two gigantic +ranges of hills. Here a voice hailed us from the rocks, the guide +answered the challenge, and the whole party passed through the defile +to the valley beyond. + +It was now light enough to observe a number of Indian huts dotted about +on both slopes; and the horsemen who had formed my escort quickly +dispersed, leaving me with the guide. + +"We are home," said he, "and the dogs have lost their prey." + +Dismounting and leading the horses, we approached a hut set somewhat +apart from the rest. An Indian boy standing at the entrance took our +animals away while we entered the hut. + +"Will you eat, senor, or sleep?" asked my rescuer. + +"Sleep," said I, "as soon as you have answered a question or two." + +I cannot repeat exactly what the man told me, as his Spanish was none +of the best, and he mixed it up with a patois which I only half +understood. However, the outline of the story was plain enough, and +will take but little telling. + +My late jailer belonged to the Order of the Silver Key, a powerful +Indian society, acting under the leadership of Raymon Sorillo. He had +been placed in the fort both as a spy on the garrison and to assist +comrades if at any time they endeavoured to capture the stronghold by +way of the secret passage. Only the commandant and his chief officer +were supposed to know of its existence, but a strange accident had +revealed it to the Indians some years previously. + +The jailer, of course, could have set me free, but in that case he must +have joined in my flight. The plan he adopted was to communicate with +his friends, and then, by feigning illness, to divert suspicion from +himself. As soon as we descended the steps, he replaced the trap-door, +removed all signs of disturbance, and crept cautiously back to his room. + +When the Indian had finished his explanation, I asked him to what place +he had brought me. + +"The Hidden Valley," he replied, "where no Spaniard has ever set foot. +Here you are quite safe, for all the armies of Peru could not tear you +from this spot." + +"Does Sorillo ever come here?" I asked. + +"Rarely; but his messengers come and go at their pleasure." + +"That is good news," I remarked, thinking of my mother. "I shall be +able to get a message through to Lima. And now, if you please, I will +go to sleep." + +He spread a rug on the earth floor, covered me with another, and in a +few minutes I was fast asleep, forgetful even of the dismal tunnel and +its horrible associations. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY. + +Perhaps my Indian host overstated the case, but he could not have been +far wrong in saying that no stranger had ever succeeded in finding the +Hidden Valley. + +Let me describe the coast of Peru, and then you may be able to form +some idea of the district between the Spanish fortress and my new home. +The coast is a sandy desert studded with hills, and having in the +background stupendous ranges of towering mountains. From north to +south the desert is cut at intervals by streams, which in the rainy +season are converted into roaring rivers. Little villages dot the +banks of these streams, and here and there are patches of cultivated +land. + +From one river to another the country is for the most part a dreary +desert of sand, where rain never falls nor vegetation grows--a dead +land, where the song of a bird is a thing unknown. Sometimes after a +sandstorm a cluster of dry bones may be seen--the sole remains of lost +travellers and their animals. At times even the most experienced +guides lose the track, and then they are seen no more. Over such a +desert I had ridden from the fort, and the Indians assured me that, +even in broad daylight, I could not go back safely without a guide. + +As for the valley itself, it was comparatively nothing but a slit in +the mass of mountains. A river ran through it, and the water was used +by the Indians to irrigate the surrounding land. Their live stock +consisted chiefly of oxen and horses, and the principal vegetables +cultivated were maize and coca. You may not know that this coca is a +plant something like the vine, and it grows to a height of six or eight +feet. The leaves are very carefully gathered one by one. They are +bitter to the taste, however, and as a rule strangers do not take +kindly to coca. The Indian is never without it. It is the first thing +he puts into his mouth in the morning, and the last thing that he takes +out at night. He carries a supply in a leathern pouch hung round his +neck, and with this and a handful of roasted maize he will go a long +day's journey. I had never chewed coca before, but soon got into the +habit of doing so, much to the delight of my new friends. + +My stay in the Hidden Valley, although lasting nearly two years, had +little of interest in it. The Indians treated me with every respect. +I was lodged in the best house, and was given the best fare the valley +produced. Within the valley I was master, but I was not allowed to +join any of their expeditions, and without their help it was +impossible, as I have explained, to get away. + +Their advice to stay quietly in my hiding-place was indeed the best +they could give. I was quite safe, the Spanish soldiers in the fort +being unable to follow me, and indeed, as we gathered from the spy, +quite at a loss to account for my escape. Away from the valley, too, I +should be utterly helpless. I could not return to Lima, and without +money there was little chance of making my way into Chili. + +The two things that troubled me most were Jose's fate and my mother's +unhappiness. At first I had ventured to hope that my friend still +lived; but as the weeks and months passed without any tidings, I began +to look upon him as dead. The Indians thought it certain I should +never see him again. + +As to my mother, she would be in no particular uneasiness until the +time came for the return of the _Aguila_; but I dreaded what would +happen when Mr. Maxwell had to confess the schooner was overdue, and +that nothing had been heard of her. Many miserable hours I spent +wandering about the valley, and thinking how my mother would watch and +wait, hoping against hope for some tidings of the missing ship. + +One night--it was in the December of 1819--I had gone to bed early, +when an unusual commotion in the valley caused me to get up. My Indian +host had already gone out, so, putting on my things, I followed. + +Naturally my first thought was of the Spaniards; but the natives, +though flocking towards the entrance to the valley, did not appear +alarmed. Several of them carried torches, and a strange picture was +revealed by the lurid flames. + +On the ground lay a horse so weak and exhausted that it could barely +struggle for breath. Close by, supported in the arms of two Indians, +was the rider, a short, rather stout man of brown complexion. His eyes +were glazed as if in death. Blood gushed from his ears and nostrils, +his head hung limply down: it was hard to believe that he lived. + +The natives gabbled to each other, and I heard the words frequently +repeated, "Sorillo's messenger!" Then an old, old woman--the _mother_ +of the village--tottered feebly down the path. In one hand she carried +a small pitcher, and in the other a funnel, whose slender stem they +inserted between the man's teeth. In this way a little liquid was +forced into his mouth, and presently his bared breast heaved +slightly--so slightly that the motion was almost imperceptible. + +However, the old woman appeared satisfied, and at a sign from her the +stricken man was carried slowly up the path. One native attended to +the horse, and the rest returned to their huts, talking excitedly of +what had happened. + +"Is that a messenger from Raymon Sorillo, Quilca?" I asked my host. + +"Yes," said he, "and he has had a very narrow escape. He has been +caught in a sandstorm. Perhaps he lost the track. Perhaps the +soldiers gave chase, and he went further round to baffle them. Who +knows? But we shall hear to-morrow." + +"Then he is likely to recover?" + +"Yes; the medicine saved him. Didn't you see his chest move?" + +"Yes," I replied, thinking that but a small thing to go on. + +"That showed the medicine was in time," returned Quilca. "It has begun +its work, and all will be well." + +Quilca spoke so confidently that, had I been the patient, I should have +started on the road to recovery at once. + +"Will he stay here long?" I asked. + +"Who knows?" replied Quilca. "The chief gives orders; the servants +obey." + +"But he will return at some time?" + +"It is likely." + +"And will he take a message to my mother, do you think?" + +"Oh yes," said the Indian; "I had forgotten. Besides"--and he touched +the cord supporting the silver key--"he is your servant, as I am." + +For three days the messenger was too weak to explain his errand; but +the medicine worked wonders, and at the end of a week he sent for +Quilca and the other leading men of the tribe. + +What orders he brought I did not learn; only my host told me that the +rising to which they looked forward had been put off. The Chilians +were not ready, and could not be in Peru for at least another six +months. + +Quilca was dreadfully disappointed; but the chief had spoken, and his +word was law. Indeed, it was most extraordinary to see with what +reverence his commands were treated. Had it been his pleasure, I am +sure his followers would have willingly gone to certain death. + +On the day following this I visited the messenger, who, on seeing the +silver key, bowed low before me. + +"What are my lord's commands?" asked he humbly. + +"They are very simple," I replied. "In a short time you are returning +to your chief. Say to him that Juan Crawford is safe in the Hidden +Valley, and ask him to tell Senora Maria Dolores Crawford at Lima so. +Can you remember that?" + +The blood mounted into the man's face as he said, "I will remember." +Then he added in quick, eager tones, "Are you the son of Don Eduardo?" + +"He was my father." + +At that the man bent again and kissed my hand, saying,-- + +"Senor, he was our best friend. He loved our people, and when he was +killed there was much weeping in the villages of the Indians." + +"He gave his life for you," said I slowly. + +"As we will give ours for his son," answered the man; and no one +hearing him could have doubted the sincerity of his words. + +At the end of a fortnight he was strong enough to travel, and his last +words as he struck into the narrow pass were, "I shall not forget, +senor." + +After his departure I felt much easier. True, there was a terrible +journey before him, which hardly one man in a thousand could hope to +accomplish successfully; but he was a daring and plucky rider, used +alike to desert and mountain. Then, too, any Indian on the route would +give him food and shelter, and warn him of any lurking soldiers. + +He would relate my story to Raymon Sorillo, and I knew that the +gigantic chief would carry the news to my mother. I no longer fretted +at being shut up in the valley, but passed my time merrily with the +boys and younger men of the tribe, learning their patois, riding, and +practising shooting with the musket, and with bow and arrow. + +On my fifteenth birthday Quilca organized some sports, and though not +gaining a first prize in any event, I performed so creditably that the +Indians were delighted with my prowess. + +"The young chief will make a warrior," said they, and I felt proud of +their praise. + +Let me try to give you a picture of myself at that time. I was tall +for my age, standing five feet five inches in height. I had curly dark +hair, cut rather short, and brown eyes. My face was tanned through +exposure to the weather and regular exercise had made my muscles hard +as iron. Like my companions, I wore a short woollen jacket, dark in +colour, and breeches open at the knees, and caught up with strips of +coloured cotton. My cap was of wool gorgeously embroidered; dark +woollen stockings without feet covered my legs, and in place of boots I +had a pair of goatskin sandals. Thrown over my left shoulder was a +small poncho, which dangled like the cloak worn by some of our cavalry +soldiers. + +Some time during the month of April Sorillo's messenger returned, +bringing me two letters--one from my mother, the other from the chief. + +I need not say how eagerly I opened the first. It was very long, +consisting of several closely-written pages, but it did not contain a +word too much. I read it over and over again, until I could almost say +it by heart. No word had reached Lima of the wreck of the _Aguila_; +but the British merchants, though bidding my mother be of good cheer, +had put the schooner down for lost. My message had shown their fears +to be well grounded, but at the same time it had carried joy and +thankfulness to my mother's breast. + +"I grieve for poor Jose," she wrote, "but I thank God every hour for +your safety." + +The letter from Sorillo was brief. After saying how glad he was to get +my message, he went on,-- + +"For the present, stay in the Hidden Valley; there is no safer place in +Peru. The fruit ripens slowly, and even yet is not ready for plucking. +San Martin has not left Valparaiso, and little beyond skirmishing will +be done this year." + +Apparently, however, he had sent definite orders to the tribe, as from +this date I noticed a great difference in our hitherto peaceful abode. +Every man went armed day and night, scouts were posted on the +mountains, and swift riders scoured the desert for miles. + +Once, too, a band of horsemen, twenty strong, led by Quilca, left the +valley at night. I could not learn their business, because Quilca said +they were acting under the secret orders of the great chief. They were +absent three days, and when, in the gray dawn of the fourth morning, +they rode back up the valley, three were missing. The leader had a +bloodstained bandage round his head, and several men bore signs of a +fierce conflict. + +"You are hurt?" said I, as Quilca dismounted. + +"It is nothing," replied he carelessly. + +"And three of your followers have not returned!" + +"It cost six lives to kill them," he answered, with fierce +satisfaction, passing into the hut. + +This expedition was followed by others, and from the talk in the valley +I gathered that Sorillo had started the Indians on the war-trail. +Already the Spaniards were safe only in large numbers, for on every +weak and isolated detachment the fierce mountaineers swept down like +hawks on their prey. + +Now and again they were beaten off; but this did not happen often, +because they knew the number of their enemy almost to a man, and had +learned the most effective method of attack. Generally speaking, the +little body of Spanish soldiers had no chance whatever, either of +flight or of victory. + +From time to time strange and startling rumours reached us. In +September we heard that the Chilian army had landed on the coast, and +soon afterwards that the Englishman Cochrane had swept the Spanish +fleet from the seas. Jose had often spoken of this daring sailor, who, +after performing many glorious deeds in the British navy, had taken +command of the Chilian fleet, and had done much to make Chili +independent of Spain. Now, with his ships and sailors, he was helping +to do the same for Peru. + +On hearing these things I became impatient, not wishing to remain +cooped up in the valley while the Liberating Army was marching on Lima. + +However, my deliverance, though slow in coming, came at length, but +before that time I had a most startling surprise. One morning, in the +last week of January 1821, I had gone out very early, half expecting to +see Quilca returning from one of his excursions. Most of the Indians +were astir, when suddenly a man came running from the mouth of the pass. + +"Here they are!" he cried; "here they are!" + +We pushed down quickly to meet them, I in the very front. Quilca +appeared first, riding slowly, as if his horse were tired out. His +men, lolling on their animals, followed, some of them with closed eyes +and half asleep. + +Presently I caught sight of Sorillo's messenger, nearly at the end of +the line; and then I opened my eyes wide, thinking they had played me +false. Was I awake, or was I dreaming? Was I-- + +"Jack!" + +That settled it! The Indians stared in astonishment, as with a +startled cry I ran past them to where in the rear a man had jumped from +his horse to the ground. + +"Jose!" I cried, "Jose!" and for the life of me could say no more, but +stood staring at him as if he had been some strange, unnatural animal. + +Had I the skill of an artist, I should love to draw his face as he +looked into mine. It was strong and firm and purposeful, but the gray +eyes softened into almost womanly tenderness. + +"Why, Jack," said he, shifting the reins and laying a hand on my +shoulder, "you're quite a man! Your mother would be proud of you!" + +"Have you seen her?" I asked. + +"Yes; all's well at home. But we'll talk of that later on. So you've +turned Indian, eh?" + +"It's better than living in a cell!" + +"So it is; and you didn't go down in the ship, after all?" + +"No; but I must tell you the story when you've had something to eat. +Give your horse to this youngster, and now come on to Quilca's hut; you +must be tired." + +"I was," replied he, "but the sight of you woke me up. I wondered if +you'd be waiting to see the braves come home. That Quilca of yours is +a born soldier. He'd make a good general if they didn't train him!" + +He rattled on, and I listened, glad just to hear the sound of his +voice, without reference to what he said. + +Quilca bade us welcome to the hut, and his womenfolk brought in the +food and drink they had prepared. + +Jose, as I have said, knew the Indian patois, which during the meal, he +used for the benefit of our host, whose Spanish was rather halting. He +talked of the war, and told how the Chilians had landed, and how the +Royalists were broken up and in full retreat. The campaign, he said, +was as good as over, and San Martin could be President of Peru any day +he chose. + +At that I was much astonished, for knowing the Spanish leaders, I had +expected them to fight to the death; but it was pleasing news, all the +same, and I began to speculate on how soon we should be in Lima. + +After breakfast Jose had a long nap, and then I took him for a stroll +in the valley, where we could talk without interruption. + +I was anxious to hear about my mother, but first I told my own +story--the rescue by the Spanish soldiers, the coming of General +Barejo, and the power of the silver key, as also the escape by the +underground passage, just as I have related it here. + +"Barejo's a dangerous man," remarked Jose thoughtfully. "He'll spend +the last drop of blood in his body to keep this country for Spain. +He's Loyalist and Royalist to the core. It's a pity, too, because he +is fighting for a lost cause." + +"The more honour to him!" I answered warmly. + +"Just so," exclaimed Jose, with a queer smile; "but, all the same, he +makes things more difficult for us." + +"Well, put him on one side now. Tell me your own adventures, and where +you were when my message reached Lima." + +"On the way there. When the schooner foundered, I reckoned it was all +over. I went down to a great depth, but, as luck would have it, came +up just clear of a broken mast. One of the sailors was holding to it, +and I joined him, though without any hope of being saved. You know I'm +pretty strong, but I was helpless in that wild sea. The waves just +flung me about anyhow. The other chap lasted an hour or two, when down +he went with a scream, and I heard no more of him. But I needn't dwell +on the horrors of that night; you had a strong taste of them yourself. +About daybreak I was flung like a spent ball on to a sandy beach. I +had just strength to crawl a few yards further up, and then collapsed. +It seems some Indians carried me away, and nursed me back to health, +but for weeks I was wild as a loon. They searched the coast, but found +nothing, and I concluded you were at the bottom of the sea. Then I got +a passage to Pisco in a coasting brig, and from there made my way +overland to Callao." + +"Where you heard I was alive?" + +"Yes; I hardly know whether I stood on my head or my heels when I was +told. It was old Mr. Warren who informed me. I went to him because I +dared not go to your mother. I was afraid that--" + +"All right; I understand." + +"So I went to Warren, and he began a long yarn; but as soon as he said +you were alive, I was off like a shot to Lima." + +Then he talked of my mother, repeating the messages she had given him, +and I could have listened for hours. As it was, I plied him with +questions, asking this and that--if my pony was well; had he seen Rosa +Montilla; was my mother less sad; and a hundred other things, many of +them trivial enough, yet full of interest to me. + +At the end I asked how he had found his way to the Hidden Valley. + +"Oh!" replied he with a jolly laugh, "that was simple. I hunted up +your black-browed bandit, who passed me on to one of his band. How he +found the way I can't tell you, but he brought me along all right." + +"And now what are we going to do?" + +"Well, that depends. If the Spaniards give in, we can just go quietly +back home." + +"And if they don't?" + +"Well, in that case--" + +"We must join General San Martin!" I exclaimed. + +"I suppose so," he said, half reluctantly. "You're only a boy, but +there are many youngsters of your age with the army, and you've a big +stake in the country. But we can afford to let that matter stand for a +day or two longer." + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY + +Now, before proceeding with my story, it will be well to mention here one +piece of information which Jose, not caring, perhaps, to add to my +troubles, did not give me. Indeed, very little was said about it at any +time, for reasons which will be clear to any one who makes himself +acquainted with this narrative. + +On the very morning after my flight from Lima, a servant of the +government paid my mother a visit of official importance. He brought +with him a notable document full of curious legal phrases, which, put in +simple language, meant that all my father's vast estates had been +confiscated and given over to that loyal and worthy Spaniard Don Felipe +Montilla. As an act of mercy, my mother was permitted to retain the +house and grounds at Lima during her lifetime. + +In presenting this famous letter, the messenger was, of course, only +doing his duty, but it is certain that in some way he failed in the +respect due to a noble lady. He may have been one of those mean-spirited +people who delight in trampling on the fallen. There are, strange to +say, many such in the world. + +My mother never alluded to the incident, which was related to me by Tomas +Peraza, an old and faithful servant, next in importance to Jose himself. + +"The man had been with my lady nearly an hour," said he, in describing +the event, "when her bell rang, and I went into the room. She stood in +the centre of the apartment, her cheeks very red, and her eyes flashing +like summer stars. + +"'Peraza,' she exclaimed, 'our house has fallen very low, but even so its +members brook insolence from no man. Bid my servants bring stout sticks +and chastise this rude fellow back to the place from which he came!' + +"You may be sure that I lost no time in obeying. The fellow drew his +sword even in the presence of a lady; but it was knocked from his grasp, +and we drove him from the grounds with blows and buffets. It was a +strange spectacle, and the people came flocking to us in crowds. At +first they would have interfered, but on hearing me cry, 'This for +insulting the Donna Maria Crawford!' they desisted. And in this way we +pursued him right to the Government House, where he flung himself upon +the protection of the soldiers." + +It was a harsh measure, perhaps; but then no man should be wanting in +respect to a woman, and the fellow had but himself to blame. + +Jose, as I have said, withheld the news, or I should have gone at all +risks to Lima. As it was, I stayed contentedly in the valley, waiting +until the Indians received the signal to move. + +From that time we heard rumours of hard fighting in various parts of the +country, and about the middle of March 1821 a messenger arrived from +Raymon Sorillo. He brought the order for thirty men to march to Pisco, +on the sea-coast, where a small patriot detachment had landed under the +command of Colonel Miller. + +"A countryman of ours, Jack," remarked Jose, "and, from what I hear, one +of the finest fellows in South America. The patriots think almost as +much of him as they do of the famous Lord Cochrane." + +"What is he like?" + +"I haven't seen him; but he is quite young--not twenty-four yet--though +he has been soldiering for the last eight years. He served under +Wellington in Spain, fought all through the Chilian War, was Cochrane's +right-hand man at the capture of Valdivia, and now he has come to help +us. He has been shipwrecked, taken prisoner, wounded times out of +number, blown up by a powder explosion--after which he was confined for +six weeks in a dark room and fed through a plaster mask--and nearly +killed by fever. I should say he has crowded as much excitement into his +life as any man in the world." + +"He seems to be a lively customer!" + +"He is," laughed Jose; "and nothing will ever kill him, in my opinion!" + +"Don't you think we might join him?" I asked, my blood being fired by +Jose's description. + +"Well," said my companion, after a pause, "that's what I was about to +suggest. You must throw in somewhere, and I'm not over anxious for +Sorillo to get hold of you. He's a cruel fellow, though kind enough to +us, and all the cut-throats in the country are likely to flock to him. +I'm sorry for the Spaniards who fall into his hands!" + +Quilca was rather opposed to our plans, but finding us determined, he at +last agreed that we should accompany him on the next expedition. + +Day had but just broken when we rode from the valley and I turned to take +a farewell glance at the place which had been my home so long. I had not +been altogether unhappy there, yet I was glad to go into the world again, +to take the first step on the road to Lima and my mother. + +The march to Pisco passed without incident. We suffered horribly, it is +true, from thirst, and from choking, blinding sandstorms; but there were +no Spaniards in that desolate district to bar our way. + +A few hours' march from the town we fell in with some Indian scouts, and +learned from them that the Patriots lay encamped in the Chincha Baja, a +beautiful valley. Our joy at these tidings was, however, soon dashed by +the report that they were in a deplorable condition--suffering from fever +and ague, and unable to move. + +The gloomy picture was not overdrawn. The valley was a hospital, but +almost destitute of doctors and medicine. The sentries, selected from +the strongest of the troops, could barely stand, staggering even under +the weight of their muskets. Privates and officers alike were prostrate, +and a score of strong men could have killed them all without effort. + +As it chanced, the enemy, stationed in an adjoining valley, though +suffering less severely, were in no condition to make an attack, and the +two parties could do no more than idly watch each other. + +Ordering his men to dismount, Quilca went to find an officer, and soon +returned with the startling intelligence that the colonel himself lay +dangerously ill in one of the huts. + +"Not an encouraging start!" I remarked. + +"A bad beginning often makes a good ending," answered Jose cheerfully. +"Let us go to see him." + +The doctor, a Spaniard, was attending his patient when we entered the +hut, and he beckoned us toward the bed. + +I could not repress a start at the sight which met our eyes. The colonel +was turning restlessly but feebly from side to side; his eyes were +unnaturally bright; his cheek bones stood out sharp and prominent. He +mumbled to himself in short snatches, but so faintly that only a word +here and there reached us. + +Once he smiled pleasantly, saying, "Yes, I see the steeple! Dear old +Wingham!" + +I did not at that time understand the allusion, but afterwards it became +plain that he referred to his home, the home of his childhood, a place +called Wingham, in Kent. + +"Do you know," said Jose sharply, turning to the doctor, "that your +patient is dying?" + +"Perfectly; but what can I do?" replied he. "He is suffering from the +tertian ague; the valley is permeated with it." + +"We must get him out of it," said Jose, with decision. + +"But where will you take him? the town is as bad." + +"On shipboard, and give him a sea-breeze." + +"The Chilian squadron is absent, cruising." + +"Then we must beg, borrow, or steal a trading-vessel; for go he must and +shall." + +It was wonderful how the doctor brightened up at these words, and still +more wonderful how he allowed himself to be commanded by a stranger. But +Jose was a strong man though not often exerting his strength, and there +was that in his face which made most men chary of coming to handgrips +with him. + +"Come, Jack," said he, "let us go to the bay and find a ship, if we wish +to save the colonel's life. Another week of this pestilence and he will +be dead, and Peru can't afford to lose him just yet." + +"But suppose," said I, as we rode away from the valley, "that the +authorities won't allow him to be moved?" + +"Why, we'll move him in spite of them. Quilca's men can be trusted to +help us. 'Twill be a little campaign on our own account!" said he, with +a jovial laugh. + +Even Jose, however, could not impress a vessel that had no existence, and +the bay was empty. A few boats only lay peacefully resting on the placid +waters, but of a ship there was no sign. We stood for an hour staring +seaward, as if our will could conjure up a vessel, and then returned to +the town. We paid a visit to the governor, but he could not help us. It +was unlikely there would be a vessel, he said, until Lord Cochrane +returned with the squadron from Callao. + +"When will that be?" I asked. + +The governor gave his shoulders an expressive shrug. + +"The gallant Englishman does not confide in me," he replied. "He may +come to-day; he may not come for a twelvemonth." + +It was getting late now, and nothing further could be done till the +following morning. Jose was disappointed, but in no way disheartened. + +"If we can't get what we want," said he, "we must be satisfied with what +we can get. There's a fine bit of philosophy for you!" + +"And what can we get?" + +"A house at the seaside. We'll look for a sheltered place on the beach +to-morrow, bring down some men to build a hut, and have the colonel +removed to it. With the sea air filling his lungs, he may yet have a +chance of recovery." + +Instead of returning to camp, we slept that night at Pisco, and after an +early breakfast went again to the beach. Jose had just selected an +admirable spot for the hut, when we suddenly heard a shout of "Sail ho! +sail ho! There's another--and another! Why, it must be Cochrane's +squadron!" + +In an instant we were gazing seaward, and there, sure enough, rounding +the corner of the bay, were several vessels, led by a stately ship. + +By this time a number of people had assembled, and more were coming in +hot haste from the town. They talked and gesticulated violently--the +majority, I observed being doubtful if the incoming vessels were friends +or foes. + +As they drew nearer, however, all misgiving vanished, every one agreeing +that the leading ship was the _San Martin_, so named in honour of the +great general. + +"The luck's with us!" cried Jose joyfully. "Before nightfall we'll have +the colonel on board one of those craft. How beautifully the admiral's +ship is handled! she comes sweeping in like a great sea-bird." + +"Hadn't we better get a couple of men to pull us out to her? she'll +anchor soon." + +"The very thing! we can't afford to lose time." + +Our arrangements did not take long to make, and we were soon speeding +across the bay, our crazy boat being propelled by two wiry Indians. The +whole squadron was now well within the bay, the smaller craft lying close +in, and flying the Chilian colours; but Jose directed the boatmen to pull +for the flagship. + +"_San Martin_ ahoy!" he yelled, standing up in the stern and hailing the +ship in what he believed to be sailor fashion. + +"Hullo! Who are you?" came the answer. + +"Is Admiral Cochrane on board?" + +"Well, he was a minute ago." + +"Throw a rope, will you? we're coming up." + +This conversation was carried on in English, for many officers in the +Chilian navy were Englishmen; and now the man on the _San Martin_ +exclaimed, "Well, you're a cool customer anyhow! Walt a bit while I tell +the captain." + +"Hang the captain!" roared Jose; "it's a matter of life and death." And +those on deck, seeing how terribly in earnest he was, flung over a rope, +and we scrambled up the ship's side. + +"Now, my man," exclaimed a sharp voice, "what is it you are in such a +tremendous hurry about?" + +"I want to see Lord Cochrane immediately," said Jose. + +"His lordship is engaged in his cabin. Give your message to me." + +"I prefer to manage my own business, thank you," replied Jose coolly. +"Tell the admiral I have come from Colonel Miller." + +As he finished speaking, a distinguished-looking officer, accompanied by +several others, appeared on deck, and I knew instinctively that we were +in the presence of the famous Admiral Cochrane, whose marvellous exploits +had gained for him the admiration of the world. + +Hearing the name of Miller, he stopped, and looking at us, said, "What is +that about Colonel Miller?" + +"He is dying, sir!" exclaimed Jose, as much at ease with an admiral as +with a private sailor. "His men are all down with ague, and the colonel +will be dead inside a week unless you remove him at once." + +"Mr. Welsh," remarked the admiral to a handsome young fellow standing +near, "this is your affair. Do whatever you think best; but remember, I +would rather lose a ship than Miller. He's the one man we can rely upon +ashore." Then looking at us, he added, "You are not soldiers?" + + +"This lad," replied Jose, pointing to me, "is Jack Crawford. His father +was one of the largest landowners in Peru, and a great patriot. The +Spaniards shot him some time ago, and the boy has been hiding ever since. +Yesterday we arrived at Pisco to join the detachment there, as +volunteers, and found the colonel delirious with fever. A few days +longer in camp will finish him." + +"He shall be removed at once," exclaimed the Admiral.--"Captain +Wilkinson, will you order a boat to be lowered!" and then he began to +question Jose further concerning the condition of the troops. + +Very quickly the boat was got ready, Mr. Welsh took his seat, and at his +suggestion we followed, giving instructions to our own men to return to +shore. + +"Are you a doctor?" asked Jose of our companion. + +"Yes; I am Lord Cochrane's private surgeon, though, fortunately, he gives +me but little work to do," and he laughed merrily. I have said that he +was a handsome fellow, with a boyish, fresh-coloured face, and bright, +sparkling eyes. He talked to us cheerfully about the campaign, and would +not allow that Colonel Miller was in danger of dying. + +"You don't know him as well as we do," he said, with a laugh. "Most men +who had been through what he has would be dead already; but Miller stands +alone. The last time we brought him from Pisco he had a ball in the +right arm, another had smashed his left hand, while a third had gone +through his chest, fractured a rib, and passed out at the back. Of +course we gave him up, but he pulled through comfortably." + +"Well, he is pretty bad now," said Jose significantly. + +"He'll be leading a bayonet charge in a month," laughed the young +surgeon, "if the war lasts as long. For my part, I expect it to be over +sooner." + +"I had no idea," said I, "that the Spaniards would be beaten so easily." + +"The odds are all against them, you see. Lord Cochrane has scooped up +their navy, San Martin is waiting to pounce on Lima, they have to watch +General Bolivar in the north, and most of the people are in favour of the +revolution. Hullo! here we are! I suppose you'll come with me to the +camp?" + +"Yes," said Jose, "and back to the ship if you will let us. We can do no +good here." + +"All right. I daresay we can find you a berth." + +The young surgeon came near to losing his self-possession when he saw the +actual state of things. + +"Whew!" exclaimed he, "this will have to be altered. Why, the men are +dying on their feet! And I suppose it's the same old story--not enough +doctors, no proper attendants, and musty drugs. Well, we'll clear the +colonel out of it first, and then see what can be done for the others." + +While he attended to his patient, we had a litter made ready, in which +the colonel was placed and carried to the water's edge, where the ship's +boat was in waiting. The sailors rowed steadily and well, and we soon +had the satisfaction of seeing the sick man comfortably installed in one +of the ship's cabins. + +Lord Cochrane showed the greatest concern at his old friend's shocking +condition, and did everything possible to help forward his recovery. + +As it chanced, I was much in the sick man's cabin; the doctor, to whom I +had taken a singular liking, using me as a sort of assistant. In the +early evening he went ashore with the admiral, who also took Jose with +him, and together they visited the sick camp. It was late when they +returned, but our patient had suffered no hurt during their absence. +Indeed he lay very still and quiet, while from time to time I wiped the +sweat from his brow and gave him cooling drinks. + +Jose did not come into the cabin again, but I heard from the doctor that +it had been decided to bring the soldiers on board, in the hope that a +sea voyage would set up their strength. Our own particular Indians +returned to the Hidden Valley, but in the course of a day or two the rest +of the troops were embarked on the flagship. Then we stood out to sea, +bearing southward, the other vessels of the squadron taking the opposite +direction. + +Thanks partly to the young surgeon's skill, but chiefly, perhaps, to his +own marvellous constitution, the colonel began to mend slowly. The fever +abated, he was able to take some nourishing food, and at last a day came +when we carried him on deck. + +It was extraordinary to behold the joy with which his appearance was +greeted, not only by his own troops, but by every man on board. Some of +them knew him only by report, but most of the sailors had witnessed his +daring deeds, while the marines had taken part in them. + +The officers, too, from the admiral downward, came about him, and though +too weak as yet for much talk, he acknowledged their kindness by a +charming and fascinating smile. + +At the end of an hour the doctor gave orders that he should be carried +back to his cabin, saying with a laugh, "That's enough excitement for the +first day, colonel. Mustn't overdo it, you know." + +Whether it was the bracing effect of the fresh sea air, or the sight of +his men's most obvious improvement, I know not, but from that day his +strength increased with astonishing rapidity. + +During this period of convalescence he talked with me a good deal, and in +the kindest manner, so that shortly I became as ardent a hero-worshipper +as the others. He sent for Jose, too, thanked him for his prompt action, +and declared that in a sense he was indebted to him for his life. + +"But," said he, smiling, "I don't know yet who you are, or how you came +to turn up at Pisco just at the right moment!" Whereupon Jose gave him +an outline of our story. + +He listened attentively, and at the end said, "I have heard of your +father, my boy, through General San Martin, who will be glad to make your +acquaintance. Meanwhile I shall charge myself with your welfare--that +is, if you care to share my fortunes." + +"I ask for nothing better, sir," I replied, flushing with pleasure. +"There is no leader I would rather choose to follow." + +"Then you shall have your wish," said he, "unless the general finds other +work for you." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG. + +It was, I believe, Lord Cochrane's desire to land his troops close to +the port of Arica; but two unsuccessful attempts having been made, the +plan was abandoned. + +Colonel Miller, who had by this time resumed his duties, next +transferred his men to two small schooners captured from the enemy, and +having taken on board food and water sufficient for twenty-four hours, +set sail for the Morro de Sama, a miserable port ten leagues north of +Arica. + +Jose and I accompanied him, as did also, to my great delight, the young +doctor. Our two vessels were crazy craft: they had only temporary +rudders, and it was impossible to steer with any degree of accuracy. +Owing to this the trip occupied just double the calculated time, so +that on landing we were half dead with hunger and thirst. The soldiers +still suffered somewhat from the effects of the ague: their legs +tottered under them, and at first they could not march longer than half +an hour at a time without lying down to rest. + +You must not, however, suppose that we were at all downhearted on this +account. The men had the greatest confidence in their leader, while +the gaiety and high spirits of the young doctor acted as a fine tonic. +He was full of quips and cranks, and his merry sayings brought a smile +to the faces of even the most wearied. + +A winding path three miles in length brought us to the summit of a +steep mountain, where we stopped awhile to rest, and to enjoy the +refreshing breeze. + +"Well, Crawford," exclaimed the doctor cheerfully, when we once more +resumed the march, "how do you like being on active service? A +pleasant change, isn't it, from being cooped up on board ship?" + +At the moment I hardly agreed with him, but I made an effort to reply +to his banter. + +Only to a few of us was the really desperate nature of our expedition +known. Of the Spaniards we entertained no manner of fear; the sole +terror lay in the route to be traversed. We were already parched by +thirst, and more than twenty miles of sandy desert lay between us and +water. + +Nor was this all. Only one man knew the route, and years had gone by +since he had last travelled over it. If his strength or memory failed, +it might well happen that the dreary desert would be our burial-place +and the loose sand our winding-sheet. It was not exactly a cheering +prospect, but we made the best of it. + +The colonel marched at the head of his men, the doctor at the rear, so +that he might assist any unfortunate stragglers, while Jose and I went +forward with the guide. + +With frequent halts for rest we ploughed our way through the shifting +sand, our eyes aching and our throats terribly dry. + +About midnight, as near as I could judge, the guide stopped +irresolutely. + +"What is it?" asked Jose, in an excited whisper; "what is wrong?" + +We could not see the fellow's face, but he seemed very agitated, and +there was a break in his voice as he answered,-- + +"I don't know--I am not sure--but I can't be certain that we are on the +right track." + +The words sounded like a sentence of death, and I could hardly repress +a cry of horror. + +"Be still!" whispered Jose; "the men must not know. Stay here a minute +while I ask the colonel to halt. That will give us a little +breathing-space." + +He was soon back, and taking the guide's arm, he exclaimed,-- + +"Now come, get your wits about you, and let us see what can be done. +Where do you think we ought to be?" + +"I don't know," replied the guide helplessly. "The saints preserve us, +or we are lost!" + +"Now look here," said Jose sternly: "you are giving way, and that won't +do. Pluck up your courage, man, and remember that all our lives are in +your hands." + +I think, perhaps, this awful responsibility had much to do with +breaking the guide down. He wrung his hands and groaned, saying aloud +that he had brought us to death. + +"But we aren't dead yet," I remarked, "and needn't be if only you will +collect your wits. Come, let us cast about a bit; maybe you'll find +some landmark that will help you." + +"No, no," he cried; "we may be right now, and if we stray away we shall +certainly be lost. May the saints preserve us!" + +I think the fellow would be there yet, but for the click of Jose's +pistol and the stern ring in his voice as he said sharply,-- + +"This nonsense has to stop.--Take his arm, Jack.--Now go on without a +word, until you can make up your mind one way or other about the route." + +The next quarter of an hour was one of the worst in my life. The man +stumbled this way and that, now going in a straight line, again turning +to right or left, and all the time the troops in our rear were resting +in fancied security. I shuddered to think what would happen if the +guide failed to locate the track. Suddenly he ran forward quickly, +dragging me with him, and then uttered a joyful cry. We were at the +foot of a sandy hillock of peculiar shape, much like, as far as I could +tell, a truncated cone. + +It was not high, but apparently of considerable circumference. + +The guide laughed and wept like a man bereft of his senses, and then +crying, "We are saved!" he straightway fell on his knees and offered up +a prayer of thanksgiving. The strangely-shaped hillock showed him that +thus far he had led us correctly; and although during the night he had +several further twinges of alarm, he did not lose his nerve again. + +As mile after mile was traversed our thirst became excruciatingly +painful, and there was no chance of relief. Between us and the valley +of Sama no drop of water would be found. Still we plodded on, parched +and weary, until in the eastern sky the dawn rose slowly. For just a +brief period we felt the cold, damp, but refreshing breath of morning, +and then the hot sun added to our misery. Our heads were scorched by +its burning rays, and we were almost blinded by the glare reflected +from the deep, loose sand. + +It was nearly nine o'clock when the guide, extending his arm, +exclaimed, "Sama--water!" And looking ahead, we caught a glimpse of +the cool green vegetation in the Sama valley. + +Under other circumstances it would have been laughable to watch the +effect produced by our near approach to the valley. What semblance of +order the colonel had kept on the march vanished. Breaking their +ranks, the men rushed forward eagerly in search of the welcome water. +One who for the last mile had been crawling along, supported by the +doctor, darted off like a champion runner, though he fell exhausted +before covering half the distance. On reaching the sparkling stream, +we all, without exception, flung ourselves down by the margin, and +lapped the water like thirsty dogs. + +Here we remained till the next day, being supplied with food by the +people from Sama, who also procured for us about a dozen horses, two of +which, I am thankful to say, fell to Jose and myself. + +Most of the men, after eating and drinking, stretched themselves out on +the grass, and were fast asleep in a moment; but our leader had much to +do, and the cheery young doctor spent half his time in attending on the +sick. In this Jose helped him. I wished to do so, but in truth the +long march, and the want of food and water, had worn me out. + +"Lie down and get some rest," said the doctor, "or you will be left +behind to-morrow. We have another twelve leagues or so before us yet." + +"Where are we going?" I asked. + +"To a village called Tacna." + +"We call it a town," laughed Jose. "Why, there are more than four +thousand people living in it." + +"Dear me," exclaimed the doctor good-humouredly, "what a considerable +place!" + +Attended by Jose, he passed on laughing, and I curled up in the +sheltered nook which I had selected as bed and bedchamber in one. I +know nothing of what happened after that until Jose, shaking my arm, +told me to rise. + +It was scarcely light; but the troops were already preparing their +simple breakfast, for they had another long and tedious march before +them. + +"How do you feel, Jack?" asked Jose. + +"All right, thank you," said I, giving myself a shake, "but +tremendously hungry. I could eat a horse!" + +At that he laughed, saying, "Before the campaign's over I daresay you +will be glad to eat part of one"--a prophecy that was more than +fulfilled. + +Directly after breakfast the men were assembled, the colonel addressed +them in a few stirring words, and the march began. We did not +anticipate an attack, but a few sturdy and well-mounted peasants from +Sama rode ahead to make sure that the route was clear. + +Outside Tacna we were met by the inhabitants, who escorted us, with +much noise and cheering, in triumph to the town. + +"These worthy people are good patriots, Crawford," said the doctor, who +was riding next me. "Hark how they cry 'Down with the Spaniards!' It +is lucky for them that we are not part of the Spanish army." + +"As to that," I answered, "it is as easy to shout for one side as for +the other. It is only a matter of words, after all." + +"Well," he laughed, "if cheers were bullets, we need not go short of +ammunition." + +We remained several days in Tacna, where I had the luck to be quartered +on a wealthy Spanish merchant. It was most amusing to be in his +company, as he hated us like poison, and, in spite of himself, could +hardly prevent his real sentiments from popping out at inconvenient +times. However, either from fear or from policy, he treated me well, +and during our stay in the town I lived on the best of everything. +This was an agreeable interlude in the making of war, and suited me +admirably. + +Like all good things, it came to an end much too soon, and very +suddenly. Jose, the doctor, and I had been spending an evening with +one of the principal inhabitants, and on coming away met the colonel. + +"I am pleased that you keep good hours," said he, with a smile. "We +march at dawn. The Spaniards are moving in three detachments to +intercept us; we must crush them one by one." + +"Well," exclaimed the doctor pleasantly, "we can't grumble; we have had +a pleasant breathing-space." + +During our stay at Tacna we had received reinforcements, bringing our +adventurous party up to four hundred and fifty, of which about a third +part consisted of cavalry. The few days' rest had recruited our +strength, and we set out in high spirits for Buena Vista, a tiny hamlet +at the foot of the Cordillera. + +As yet we had obtained no definite news of the enemy; but while we lay +at Buena Vista, a native scout brought word that a strong Spanish force +was stationed at Mirabe, a village some forty miles distant. The +colonel's resolution was instantly taken, and as soon as day broke we +were once more moving. + +After we had left the valley, our route lay across a region where no +blade of grass had ever grown. As far as the eye reached, the scene +was one of utter desolation. The horses picked their steps gingerly, +and the foot-soldiers stumbled along as best they could, tripping now +and then over the stones and boulders that strewed the path. All day +long, with intervals for rest, we tramped, and the coming of night +still found us pursuing the tedious journey. + +The last part was worse than the first. For six miles the road +descended amidst steep rocks and mighty precipices. The pass was so +narrow that we had to march in single file, each horseman on foot and +leading his animal. Had the Spaniards caught us there, not a man would +have escaped. + +Slowly and carefully we descended in one long line, until at midnight +we reached the rugged bank of the river which rushes through the Mirabe +valley. In a hollow on the opposite side lay the village, and behind +the mud walls surrounding the cultivated grounds were the Spaniards, +little dreaming of our proximity. + +"Now," exclaimed the colonel softly, "we have them in our power. We +have but to cross the river and fall upon their camp." + +He had already begun to give his orders, when the report of a +pistol--fired, whether by accident or design, by one of our men--rang +out, and all chance of a surprise vanished. The Spaniards, in alarm, +began firing rapidly, though they could not see us, a thick wood +stretching between them and the river. + +"I'd hang that fellow," growled Jose. "He's either a fool or a rogue, +and has completely spoiled the colonel's plans." + +"Never mind," said the colonel cheerfully; "we must make new ones," and +he immediately dispatched two rocket parties--one to the right, the +other to the left--in order to engage the enemy's attention. + +Meanwhile each mounted man, taking up a foot-soldier behind him, +crossed the river, and then returned for another, until in a short time +all had safely effected a passage. Then, unable to do more in the +darkness, we lay down to wait for the coming of dawn. + +Many of the men fell fast asleep in spite of the random firing, but my +mind was busy with thoughts of the approaching fight. + +About two o'clock, Dr. Welsh, who had been assisting the regular army +surgeons, came and lay down beside me. + +"Well, Crawford," said he, finding I was awake, "how do you like the +music? Rather alarming at first, eh? But you'll get used to it. +After hearing the bullets swish round your ears a time or two you'll +think nothing of it." + +"That may be," I replied, "but it is distinctly unpleasant just now." + +He laughed, saying the fight would be only a skirmish at the most, and +not worth considering. + +"Are you going to stay with us?" I asked. + +"Oh no," said he; "this is only a run ashore, just to stretch my legs a +bit, you know. They get cramped on board ship. By George, those +fellows intend serenading us till daybreak. Who's that on the other +side of you--Craig?" + +"Yes--sound asleep and snoring. I wish I were." + +"Ah, no doubt he has a clear conscience. Take pattern by him, my boy." + +"Thanks for the advice," said I, laughing; "it's very kind of you to +offer it." + +"It costs nothing," he answered banteringly; "which explains why so +many people are willing to give it." + +After a time I fell asleep, and did not waken till, at the first streak +of dawn, an order was quietly passed through the lines for every man to +hold himself in readiness. + +Jose sat up, rubbed his eyes lazily, and declared that he could sleep +another twenty-four hours. + +"There's too much hurry and bustle about this kind of warfare," said +he. "Why don't both sides agree to meet at a certain place, and to +fight it out?" + +"A famous plan, upon my word!" cried the doctor; "it would save no end +of trouble." + +"And get the business over quickly," said Jose, who was saddling up. +"Hullo, there goes the colonel! I wonder if he ever gets tired?" + +"No," laughed the doctor merrily; "he's made of iron." + +The dawn was broadening now; and moving from the shelter of the wood, +we saw the Spaniards on a level piece of ground about half a mile wide. + +"They're trying to gain the ridge on the left," cried Jose; "that will +give them the advantage." + +But the colonel had seen the manoeuvre also, and flung his small body +of cavalry at them with such force that they drew back, trying to +retreat by the winding track through the mountains. Again they were +intercepted, this time being forced to the edge of a precipitous cliff. + +"By George," exclaimed the doctor, "they're in it now! It's neck or +nothing with them." + +All this time I had quietly sat on my horse, watching the phases of the +fight. The scene was to me so extraordinary that I had no sense of +fear. I was not upset even by the strange, wailing sounds made by the +rushing bullets. + +Jose and I were with the reserve cavalry; Welsh was at the colonel's +side. The Spaniards fought with desperate courage, I could see that, +and they pushed our men hard. Fallen soldiers dotted the level tract +of ground. Some, raising themselves painfully, began to crawl back. + +I make no pretence of giving an accurate description of the combat. To +me it was a confused medley of men and horses inextricably mixed; of +shining swords, of blinding red flashes; and my ears were deafened with +the fierce cries and shouts of men spending their lives recklessly +under the rising sun. + +At last I saw the colonel raise his sword. Then he shouted something +in Spanish, whereat, gathering up the reins in my left hand, I spurred +my horse, to keep company with the rest. + +"A firm seat, Jack; keep a firm seat!" cried a familiar voice in my +ear; and there was Jose, riding as coolly as if taking a canter over +the grounds of our park at home! + +We were riding at no great pace, but all well together, when again the +colonel's voice rang out, and we broke instantly into a gallop. Then +in a flash I saw a body of Spanish cavalry drawn up to receive us, +while from our left came a stinging hail of bullets. + +A man close to me dropped his sword with a cry of pain, and the next +moment his horse, taking the bit between its teeth, rushed madly to the +front. I watched its progress with queer fascination. On it went, +right through the Spaniards, who edged aside to let it pass, straight +to the brink of the precipice, over which it fell, still carrying its +hapless rider. It seemed to me that I heard his shriek, though that +must have been fancy, as it could not have risen above the tumult of +the fight. + +"Forward!" roared the colonel, waving his sword, and the next instant +we were in the midst of the throng. The young doctor was just in front +of me, Jose on my right hand, and the men pressing close behind. I saw +nothing of the fight save that part only which concerned myself. Again +and again the shining steel was within a hair's-breadth of me--now at +my head, now at my heart--while I was almost suffocated in the press. + +Inch by inch, by sheer force of steel, we threaded our way through, +re-formed on the further side, and, still headed by the colonel, dashed +once more into the fray. This time the resistance was less obstinate. +The Spaniards began to weary--to fall back, as if unable to hold their +ground. + +"Hurrah!" cried the young doctor, "hurrah! they're done for!" + +I shall not easily forget the picture he made. His handsome face was +flushed with excitement, his beautiful eyes were ablaze with light; he +sat his horse erect as a young sapling. A handsomer or finer man could +not have been. + +I saw the tragedy from beginning to end, but could do nothing to +prevent it. It was over quick as a flash of summer lightning. Before +us rode a Spanish officer, calling fiercely on his men to come back. +At the sound of the doctor's triumphant note he turned, and I saw his +face black with anger. + +"Ah, Englishman!" he cried savagely; and even as he spoke his left arm +rose, there was a flash, a report, and the doctor fell forward on his +horse's neck. + +"See to him, Crawford!" cried the colonel huskily; and as I clutched +the animal's bridle, the troopers swept on in hurricane fury, while +from all parts of the battlefield there rose a cry of triumph. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +A FRIENDLY OPPONENT. + +I had known the young English doctor only a short time, but I had +learned to love him as a dear friend. In the fight he had shown +himself brave and fearless, but quite apart from this, his qualities +endeared him to every one. He was always cheery and full of hope, even +in our worst straits; he was tender-hearted as a child, and every sick +or wounded soldier worshipped him for his unvarying attention and +kindness. + +He was not dead when, slipping from my horse, I placed my arm round him +as well as I could to support him. I saw that his eyes were open, and +that a beautiful smile lit up his face. For a second or two he +recognized me and tried to speak, but this was beyond his powers. Then +a change came swiftly and suddenly; the light faded from his eyes, his +cheeks grew ashen gray, and though quite unfamiliar with death, I knew +that his spirit had fled. + +Some wounded Indians, staggering from the fight, helped me to place the +lifeless body on the ground; and these poor, simple natives filled the +air with their lamentations. The death of the brilliant young surgeon +had deprived them of a good friend, and they were quick to show their +grief. + +The fight was now over. The majority of the Spaniards were either +killed or captured; but no one took much pleasure in the well-earned +little victory. From the chief to the meanest soldier in the +detachment, every one mourned sincerely the loss of a trusty comrade. + +On active service, however, one has not much time to spend in grieving. +There were the dead to be buried, the wounded to be seen to, the +prisoners to be secured, and then, after a short space for food and +rest, we were marching in hot pursuit of the scanty remnant that had +escaped. + +"It's lucky," observed Jose, with a laugh, "that the colonel managed to +procure a few horses." + +"His command would have been one short without them," I replied. + +We were by no means a smart-looking detachment. The officers rode on +horseback, and a number of mules had been obtained for the men, who +followed the system of _ride and tie_. Our clothes began to show signs +of hard wear, we suffered much from hunger and thirst, and most of all +from loss of sleep. This last was really a terrible hardship, and I +noticed more than one poor fellow fall from his mule in a kind of +stupor as I rode along. + +However, by dint of pegging away, we arrived at the town of Moquegua +just in time to capture most of the runaways, and then, utterly worn +out and exhausted, gladly settled down for a few days' rest. + +Jose and I were billeted in a house near the colonel's quarters, and +the people gave us a warm welcome. They spread a good meal, to which +we did ample justice, and then, although barely noon, we went straight +to bed. + +"I hope," exclaimed Jose as he lay down, "that we shan't be disturbed +for a month. I can easily do with a month's sleep." + +"The chances are," said I gloomily, "that the colonel will be knocking +us up before we have fairly begun to dream." At which dismal prophecy +Jose threatened me with all sorts of pains and penalties unless I held +my peace. + +As it happened, the colonel did not need us, and we actually slept +without waking until nine o'clock the next morning, when, having made a +hearty breakfast, we went to call upon the chief. + +"Why, Crawford," exclaimed the colonel, smiling, "I thought you were +lost!" + +"Only in dreams, sir," I replied. "We've been catching up a little of +our lost sleep. We did not know how soon we might be on the march +again." + +"So you made the most of your opportunity? Well, I don't blame you; +but it is possible we shall make a long halt here." + +"Possible," remarked Jose to me afterwards, "but not probable;" and +events proved that, as far as we were concerned, he was right. + +That evening the colonel invited us to dinner; but we had scarcely sat +down when he was called away to speak to a messenger who had brought +important news. He returned looking rather thoughtful, and, catching +sight of Jose, exclaimed,-- + +"Craig, you are pretty well acquainted with the Indian dialects, I +believe?" + +"Yes, sir," answered Jose readily; "I can manage to talk with most of +the natives." + +"Then you are the very man I want. I'll tell you all about it after +dinner. Mustn't send you off without satisfying the inner man, eh?" + +Jose glanced at me with a smile, as much as to say, "I wasn't very far +out this morning;" while I was all curiosity as to what the business +might be. + +As soon as we had finished, the colonel and Jose had a very earnest and +confidential talk, after which my companion rejoined me, and together +we left the room. + +"What is it?" I asked anxiously; "anything of importance?" + +"Rather, unless the Indian has made a mistake. La Hera is hiding with +a few wounded men in the mountains, not a dozen miles away." + +This was the Spanish leader whom we had defeated at Mirabe. He was a +bold, dashing soldier, and a firm Loyalist, whose capture would deal +the enemy a heavy blow. + +"Get the horses ready," said Jose, "while I pick out a few men. We +mustn't make a mess of this affair, or the colonel won't trust us +again. And don't mention where we are going, up at the house. I +daresay the folks are all right, but what they don't know they can't +tell." + +"Where shall I meet you?" + +"Outside the colonel's quarters. Now, off with you, we've no time to +waste." + +The horses had benefited by their unusually long rest, and having +saddled them with the help of one of our host's servants, I led them +into the street. Jose soon appeared with a dozen mounted men, wild, +fierce-looking fellows, and all natives. + +Presently the guide came out, and directly afterwards the colonel, who +spoke a few words, telling us that we were bound on an important +errand, which he trusted we should accomplish successfully. Then the +guide placed himself, on foot, beside Jose's horse, and we moved off. + +He led us at first, purposely, in a wrong direction, in case of prying +eyes, turning back at the end of a mile or so, and then steering across +a wild and lonely desert track. Having covered nearly a dozen miles, +we came to a tiny hamlet at the foot of the mountains. Halting here, +we left our horses in charge of two men and pressed forward on foot. + +Fortunately, in one way though not in another, it was a moonlight +night, and we could see where to step. All around us towered huge +mountains, grim and forbidding. We marched in single file by the edge +of steep precipices, so close sometimes that we seemed to hang over the +awful abyss. Further and further we penetrated into the dreary +recesses. We seemed to be a body of ghosts traversing a dreary world. +No man spoke; we heard the cry neither of bird nor of animal. The only +sound to break the eerie silence was the occasional clatter of a stone, +which, loosened by our passage, rolled over into the unknown depths. + +I looked neither to right nor to left, but kept my gaze fixed on Jose, +who walked before me. The track narrowed down so that it hardly +afforded footing for one, and I prayed in my heart that we might soon +come to a better vantage-ground. + +I was no coward, and since leaving home had met with more than one +adventure, but this was the most perilous of all. Despite every effort +to keep firm, my limbs trembled, my head grew dizzy; I was seized by a +strong temptation to launch myself into space. The fit passed as +suddenly as it had come, but I felt the sweat trickling down my face. + +Presently we emerged on to a broad platform, and Jose, stopping, seized +my hand. He was trembling now, but it was at the thought of danger +past. One by one the men stole cautiously along while we waited, +watching with fascinated eyes, and drawing a deep breath of relief as +each stepped safely from the perilous path. Whether they had also felt +fearful I could not tell; their faces were wonderfully impassive, and, +except when roused by savage anger, quite expressionless. + +At a sign from Jose they dropped to the ground behind a group of +boulders, and he, addressing them in some Indian dialect, issued his +instructions. I gathered very little from his speech; but presently +the men disappeared, gliding like serpents along the side of the +cliffs, and leaving me with Jose and the guide. + +"I don't much like this, Jack," said Jose. "I almost wish you had +stayed behind. I hope the colonel can depend on this fellow." + +"What is it?" I asked. "I suppose we didn't come out just for the +pleasure of exercising ourselves on that goat-track?" + +"No," said he; "though, to be sure, that was an uncommon diversion. +The real thing is just about to begin, and this is the way of it. +According to the guide, La Hera is in a cave close at hand." + +"All the more chance of trapping him." + +"I'm not so sure of that. The entrance to the cave is some sixty feet +from the ground, in the side of a steep cliff." + +"Well, we've had some experience in mountain-climbing." + +"Yes, but not this sort. The face of the cliff is as perpendicular as +the side of a house." + +"The other fellows got up." + +"So they did, but it was in the daylight, and there was no one at the +top waiting to pop them off with a bullet. It seems the bandits have +been in the habit of using this cave as a depot, and one of them guided +La Hera there with the real object of betraying him." + +"Ugh!" said I; "these traitors make me sick." + +"Just so; but they are very useful. Without the help of this one, for +instance, we can't capture La Hera, unless we starve him out." + +"What does he propose to do?" + +"Well, there is a stout rope fixed in the cave which he will let down +at the right moment. Up this we shall have to climb by help of the +niches that have been cut in the cliff." + +"Suppose La Hera finds it out, and is waiting to receive us?" + +"That," replied Jose, with a shrug of the shoulders, "is just what is +bothering me. However, we shall soon discover. Our men have had time +to hide themselves, and the guide is getting fidgety. But I say, Jack, +I wish I hadn't brought you." + +"I'm rather pleased now that you have, though I wasn't half an hour +ago." + +"No; I thought you breathed too hard to be enjoying yourself." + +With that he ordered the native to proceed; and we all three crept +along, keeping well in the shadow, though the enemy, feeling secure in +possession of the rope, were hardly likely to have set a watch. + +Coming to a halt, the guide pointed to a towering cliff, which, on that +face at least, was in truth steep and smooth as the wall of a house. +Our men lay close at hand, but completely concealed, watching for the +lowering of the rope. + +Now it seemed to me that we were running great risk when our object +might have been gained with none at all. Why not, as Jose had remarked +a short time previously, starve the inmates out? + +"No good," answered he, when I asked the question. "The guide says +there are stores in the cave sufficient to last a small party for +months. The war would be over before they had finished their +provisions. No; we must get them by surprise or not at all. I should +like to see that rope dangling." + +It was weary waiting, and a great strain on our nerves too, as every +moment's delay gave us more time to appreciate the danger. The longer +I pondered the more I disliked the business, and doubted what would be +the end of it. La Hera was a bold man, and if he got an inkling of the +truth, we should meet with an unpleasant reception. He might not +approve of such an unceremonious intrusion into his dwelling-place. + +I was still thinking of these things when the Indian guide drew our +attention to the cliff. The time had come. There, distinguishable in +the pale moonlight, dangled the rope, and as we watched it descended +lower and lower, very steadily, until the end of it was not higher than +a man could grasp. + +It was the signal agreed upon to show that the enemy were asleep. + +Calling softly to one of his men, Jose said, "Stay here and watch. If +we are betrayed, take this man back to Colonel Miller. If he tries to +escape, kill him." + +The Indian moved not a muscle, while his guard took his place beside +him with drawn sword, for no muskets had been brought on the +expedition. Then word was quietly passed round to the others, and one +by one we gathered close to the hanging rope. + +We could not communicate with the man at the top, lest we should be +heard by the Spaniards, and we dared not make a sound. Holding a knife +between his teeth, Jose clutched the rope firmly, planted one foot in a +niche, and began to mount. When he had reached half-way up, I began +the ascent, bidding the men be ready to follow me. + +I did not mind this part of the enterprise, dangerous though it was. +The niches cut in the rock afforded decent foothold, while the rope was +knotted at intervals. The peril lay not so much in the climbing as in +the chance of discovery. If the Spaniards learned what was going +forward, nothing could save us from certain death. This was an +unpleasant thought, which I hastened to put as far from me as possible. + +Meanwhile Jose's head was on a level with the cave, and I felt that the +best or the worst of the business would soon be known. If the enemy +were awake, it would go hard with him. His foot left the last niche, +he swung on the rope, and as I watched breathlessly he disappeared. + +Casting a glance downward, I called softly to the troopers to hurry, +and then went up hand over hand at a breakneck pace. In a short time I +was gazing at as strange a spectacle as I have ever seen. The cavern +was an immense apartment, with steep walls and exceedingly lofty roof. +Near the centre was a fire, on which some one had hastily thrown a +fresh supply of dry fuel, and the red flames were leaping high in long, +thin tongues. + +Just inside the entrance Jose and the traitorous Indian stood over the +windlass, by means of which the rope was worked, and as I ran to their +side, one of the Spanish soldiers uttered a cry of alarm. Instantly +all was tumult and confusion. Shots were fired at random, men shouted +wildly, "We are betrayed!" while, above all, Jose's voice rang out high +and clear, "Surrender! you are my prisoners." + +With a rush the Spaniards sprang at us, fighting with the fury of wild +animals, while we had to guard not only ourselves but the rope up which +our men were swarming. If that were cut or loosened, our opponents +would hold us at their mercy. We fought against long odds, but for a +time held our own, though once I was stricken almost to my knees, and +felt the graze of a sharp blade across my cheeks. + +Fortunately help came soon, or it would have gone badly with us. With +a wild shout a burly trooper sprang into the fray, and another soon +joined him. A third and a fourth followed quickly, and the issue was +placed beyond doubt. + +Now, although our Indians made splendid soldiers, they hated the +Spaniards so much that it was difficult to restrain their passions. +Some excuse may be found for them in the long years of misery and +oppression they had endured; but, of course, Jose set his face sternly +against cruelties. + +Thus it was in our enemies' own interest that I raised my voice, +crying, "Surrender, and we will spare your lives! You cannot escape!" +And Jose echoed my appeal. He, too, dreaded the slaughter that must +ensue if our Indians got out of hand. Perhaps the Spaniards guessed +our motive; at least they must have seen the futility of continuing the +contest. One by one they flung their weapons sullenly to the ground, +and yielded themselves prisoners. + +"Torches!" cried Jose quickly, "and let us examine our capture. Where +is Colonel La Hera?" + +No one spoke, but several Indians plucked blazing brands from the fire +and brought them to us. By their light we saw one man lying dead near +the windlass, and three wounded. Six others, disarmed, stood round, +for the most part black-browed and scowling. + +Jose repeated his question. "Where is Colonel La Hera?" he asked. + +"Gone to get reinforcements to drive you into the sea," answered a calm +voice. + +"Then he is not in this cave?" asked Jose bluntly, but with a certain +ring of admiration in his tone. + +Now all this time I had been taking particular notice of this Spaniard. +His uniform showed him to be a major, though he was quite young. His +face was frank and open; he had dark, expressive eyes, and a pleasant, +musical voice, which somehow seemed familiar to me. Where had I met +this man before? In a moment or two he himself supplied the answer. + +"Who is in command here?" asked Jose. + +"I have the honour, and, as it seems, the misfortune also, of +commanding these brave fellows. I am Major Santiago Mariano, in the +service of His Spanish Majesty, whom may God preserve!" + +"I wish him no harm," replied Jose; "only for the future he must not +reckon Peru among his dominions. Now, how am I to know that La Hera is +not here?" + +"Ask the man who betrayed us," said the major scornfully; and on +questioning the Indian, it appeared he had mistaken Santiago for the +famous colonel. + +"Well," muttered Jose, "it's a disappointment; but it can't be helped. +What are we to do with the wounded? They can't go down the rope." + +"Let me stay with them," I suggested, "and you can send a doctor back." + +"Meanwhile," interrupted the major, "I have some little skill in +surgery, and, with your permission, I will remain also. You need not +fear that I shall run away. I will give my parole to come to Moquegua. +After that, matters must shape their own course." + +"Very well," exclaimed Jose; "the plan has its advantages. I'll hurry +along the first doctor I come across, Jack. But you are hurt!" + +"It's only a scratch; nothing serious at all." + +Jose sent half a dozen of his men down the rope; then the dead Spaniard +was lowered, the prisoners followed, and Jose himself descended with +the remainder of the troopers. + +"Haul up the rope, Jack," he cried in farewell, "and make sure of your +visitors before dropping it again." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +A GLEAM OF HOPE. + +As soon as the party had disappeared, I turned to the major and said +with a smile,-- + +"Now, my dear Santiago, let us attend to the needs of these poor +fellows." + +I was now standing full in the firelight, and he glanced at my face +with a puzzled expression. Then a half gleam of recognition shone in +his eyes, and he exclaimed doubtfully-- + +"Surely you can't be the boy Crawford who vanished so mysteriously from +the fort?" + +"I am, though!" said I, laughing at his amazement. "But we shall have +time for a talk presently; let us do what we can for these poor fellows +first. Is there any water in the cave?" + +"Yes; there is a spring at the far end. I will fetch some. Put some +more wood on the fire; it smokes if allowed to go down." + +Of the three wounded men only one was seriously hurt, and he, I feared, +was beyond the aid of the most skilled surgeon. However, we did our +best for all the sufferers, gave them water to drink, arranged them +comfortably on beds of straw, and bathed and bandaged their wounds. +Then I washed the cut in my cheek, and Santiago smeared it with a +native ointment, which he said possessed wonderful healing properties. + +"Now," said he, "I judge you are ready for late supper or early +breakfast, whichever you may prefer to call it. The provisions are +homely, and I am an indifferent cook, but I can at least give you +enough to eat. Those brigands of yours have stored sufficient food +here for an army." + +Carrying a torch, I accompanied him round the cavern, gazing in wonder +at the piles of Indian corn, the heaps of potatoes, and the strings of +charqui, the last suspended from the walls. + +"Come," said I, "there is no need to starve in the midst of plenty. +What shall we have? Roast potatoes and jerked beef? The potatoes will +require the least attention." + +"And they are not bad if you are downright hungry, as I was when we +crept in here after the affair at Mirabe. There's a smart soldier +leading your men, Crawford." + +"Yes; he is an Englishman named Miller, and a very fine fellow. But +how come you to be here?" + +"We'll talk over these things presently. Meanwhile, let us cook the +potatoes. Bring another handful; I daresay two of the men will be able +to eat a little breakfast." + +"If it is breakfast!" + +"It must be for us, because we had our supper before you paid us so +unceremonious a visit. Of course we were betrayed." + +"Well, as to that," I replied, "you must ask the colonel; I only acted +under orders." + +"Just so. Well, I am very pleased to see you, though I dislike the way +in which you introduced yourself. Cut this piece of beef up finely +while I fetch some salt." + +"Have you any?" I asked, in some surprise. + +"Oh yes. Your amiable brigands know how to stock a larder." + +Two of the wounded men were able to eat, and they were very grateful +for the food we took them. Then we returned to the fire, piled up some +sacks to serve as seats, and began our meal. + +It was all most strange to me and very delightful; it might have been a +chapter lifted bodily from one of my favourite story-books. There +seemed to be a piratical flavour about the whole business. + +"Perhaps it is as well that I gave my parole," exclaimed the major +thoughtfully, taking off another potato. + +"Why?" I asked. + +"I might have felt tempted to escape," he replied, looking at the coil +of rope. + +"You forget your jailer carries a pistol," I remarked, laughing. + +"An empty one," he suggested, shrugging his shoulders. "No, no, my +boy; my parole is your only safeguard." + +"It is a sufficient one, at any rate." + +"Yes," said he, rather dreamily, I thought. "The honour of a Mariano +is sacred; my father taught me that. And yet--and yet, do you know, +Crawford," he added, in a sharper tone, "I doubt if a parole given to +brigands should be held to." + +I did not at all like this turn in the conversation, the more +especially as my pistol was really empty. I had not dreamed of taking +any precautions, trusting wholly in the Spanish officer's honour. + +I looked up at him, and felt reassured; there could be no treachery +hidden behind that frank, open countenance. + +"It seems to me you are talking nonsense, Santiago," I said cheerfully. +"A man's word is his bond in any case--that is, if he be a man." + +He took no notice of my remark, but sat musing, leaving half his food +untouched. As for me, I helped myself to some more beef, though I must +confess the major's wild talk nearly destroyed my appetite. His manner +had changed so suddenly and abruptly that I knew not what to make of +it. I might perhaps have reloaded my pistol without his knowledge, but +this would be a confession that I had lost faith in him. + +"Come," said I jocularly, pointing to his food, "you pay your cooking a +poor compliment." + +To this he made no reply, but looking up after a time exclaimed,-- + +"I have news for you. I had almost forgotten, but I must tell you +before going." + +"Going?" I cried; "we cannot go before the doctor arrives." + +"You cannot, but I can, and must. My mind is made up. Do not try to +thwart me; I should be sorry if you got hurt. Sit still, my boy; don't +stir a finger, or I will kill you!" + +I looked at him in amazement. His face was flushed, his eyes shone +wildly; he spoke with a rapid and angry vehemence. + +"By St. Philip," he cried, "I should be a cur to place honour before +loyalty! My duty is to my king, do you hear? Shall I help a parcel of +bandits to set the king at naught? Shall I bring disgrace on a family +that has stood by the throne for untold centuries? My father died on +the battlefield with the king's banner above his head, as did his +father before him. And I am to stay in a cage when the door is open! +I am to let these upstarts trample on the king's rights!" + +The words swept from his lips in a sweeping, tempestuous torrent, and +when they were done he leaped to his feet with an angry cry. I sat in +my place looking at him steadily, but making no movement. + +"I tell you it is monstrous!" he continued. "I care nothing for +myself, but I cannot desert the king!" + +"His Majesty must be greatly in need of friends," I remarked dryly, "to +accept the aid of a perjured soldier." + +It was strong language. I knew it would hurt him cruelly; but a +desperate disease requires a desperate remedy. I thought at first he +would kill me. His eyes blazed fiercely, and he sprang forward with +uplifted hands. Suddenly he paused, and returned abruptly to his seat. + +Thinking it best not to disturb him, I rose and made the round of the +wounded men. I felt awfully sorry for the young major, and almost +wished he had not passed his word to Jose. Having done so, he must, of +course, abide by it, unless he cared to live with tarnished honour. + +Presently, returning to the fire, I threw some more fuel on, and sat +down again on my heap of sacks. Santiago had covered his face with his +hands, and was rocking himself gently to and fro, like a child in pain. +Evidently the wild fit had passed, and he had overcome the temptation +which had tried him so sorely. + +For nearly an hour we sat there, speaking no word, then looking me +straight in the face, he said suddenly,-- + +"Crawford, I have acted like a madman, but there is nothing to be +feared now." + +"Nor before," I answered cheerfully. "You would not have gone a +hundred yards. Come, let us now dismiss the subject. After all, it +was no more than a bad dream." + +"By St. Philip," he exclaimed, "it was a very ugly one. However, I am +in my right mind now, and as soon as we arrive at Moquegua I will +withdraw my parole. Then if a chance to escape comes, I can avail +myself of it with an easy conscience. You have not reloaded your +pistol?" + +"No. Why should I? there is no need of it." + +"Not now," he said. "I am master of myself now," and he actually +smiled. + +"You were going to tell me some news," I observed, after a pause. "Now +that you have roused my curiosity, I hope you will satisfy it." + +I spoke half jestingly, and more for the sake of keeping up the +conversation than in the expectation of hearing any particular +information. It was unlikely, I considered, that Santiago could tell +me anything of real interest. In this I was much mistaken, as you will +find. + +"I don't know," said he thoughtfully, "that it will be doing you any +real kindness, yet it is only right that you should know. Of course, +you will understand that your escape occasioned some little stir among +the garrison of the fort." + +"I am quite ready to believe it," I replied, chuckling at the +remembrance. "I have often laughed to think of your astonishment in +the morning." + +"It was no laughing matter to us, I can assure you. The commandant was +furious, and went about vowing vengeance against everybody. +Search-parties scoured the neighbourhood in all directions, but with no +result, and we at last concluded that by some means you had been taken +off by ship." + +"Quite a wrong conclusion," I interposed. + +"We could think of no other. However, to get on with the story. In +the midst of the confusion Barejo turned up on his way back to Lima. +He was simply furious, and threatened to put us all in irons, the +commandant included; which, by the way, was absurd." + +"It was paying me a very high compliment." + +"Don't be puffed up, or imagine the general was afraid of you," laughed +Santiago. + +"Oh!" I exclaimed, affecting to feel disappointed, "that alters the +case. But why should he be angry at my escape?" + +"Because he really wished to keep you out of mischief." + +"Then I have sadly misjudged him." + +"I think you have. Of course, I don't profess to understand the +matter, but it seems to be something in this way. When we have crushed +this rebellion, the estates of those who have borne arms against the +king will be confiscated." + +"Spoils to the victors!" I laughed; "an old-fashioned principle." + +"And, of course," continued Santiago, not heeding the interruption, +"your father's estates will be among them. Now, as far as I can +gather, Barejo thought that by preventing you from joining the rebels +something might be saved from the wreck." + +"That was very kind of the general," I remarked. "I had no idea that +he took any interest in my affairs. But isn't it possible, major, that +you are going a trifle too fast? Suppose, for instance, that the +rebels, as you call us, should win?" + +The major tossed his head scornfully. + +"That is utterly impossible!" he answered, with a short, quick snap. + +"But let us suppose it, just for argument," I urged. + +"Well in that case," said he, "of which there is no possible +likelihood, your father will keep his property." + +At first I thought he had forgotten, but something in his face held my +attention, and brought the blood to my head with a rush. + +"Do you mean-- What is it? Tell me quickly! Is my father--" + +"Alive! That is my news; but you must not build on it too greatly. I +can only tell you he was not slain that day in the mountains. He was +dangerously wounded, but was still living when the soldiers carried him +away." + +"Where did they take him?" + +"That I do not know; neither, I think, does Barejo. Perhaps, and in my +opinion most likely, to the forts at Callao." + +The major's news, as you may imagine, filled me with the liveliest +astonishment and excitement. My father alive! I could hardly credit +the statement. What would my mother say? How would she receive the +startling information? I rose from my seat and walked about the +cavern, trying to think it over coolly. + +Then it dawned upon me why Santiago had said he would not be doing me +any real kindness in talking of the discovery. After all, his +information only reopened the old wounds. More than two years had +passed since my father's disappearance, and many things had happened in +that time. Not every one who entered the casemates of Callao came out +alive. + +"But," said I aloud, "some one must know the truth. A man can't be +shut up without authority, even in Peru." + +"I wish I could help you," replied the major. "As soon as I escape +from Moquegua I will make inquiries." + +"Thank you; but I fear it will be a long time to wait," I answered +gloomily. + +"Not at all! La Hera will return in a week or two, and your Miller +will be too busy running away to look after prisoners. Imitate me, my +boy, and make Hope your best friend." + +In trying to cheer me he forgot his own distress. The light returned +to his eyes, the smile to his face, and he seemed to have banished all +memory of his recent despair. + +"Come," said he cheerfully, "put your doubts and fears aside for the +present. Our wounded want attention; we must not neglect them." + +I tried hard to act upon his advice, but all the time continued to +wonder whether my father was alive or dead. That was the one question +that racked my brain, and to it I could give no answer. + +We had just made our patients comfortable, with the exception of one +who was dying fast, when a shrill whistle sounded outside. + +"The surgeon!" I exclaimed, running to the entrance. "Yes, there he is +with the guide and two soldiers." + +"Two bandits!" said Santiago banteringly. "Give the men their proper +name." + +"Soldiers or bandits, they know how to fight. Help me to uncoil the +rope, will you?" + +"That's almost as bad as asking a man to make the noose he is to hang +in. You forget that on leaving here I shall go straight to prison." + +"I had forgotten, major, and sorry enough I am to remember it. Still, +as La Hera returns so soon, it will be only a temporary inconvenience, +and I'm sure Colonel Miller will treat you well." + +Santiago laughed. + +"You will make me fancy soon that imprisonment is a privilege worth +paying for," he exclaimed. + +"Hardly that," I replied; "but, as Barejo said, it keeps one out of +mischief." + +We lowered the rope, the guide attached the surgeon's instruments, and +at a signal we hauled up. Then the rope went down again, the two +soldiers climbed to the cave, and the doctor followed unsteadily. It +was evident that this novel method of visiting patients found no favour +in his eyes; he was obviously nervous, and twice during the ascent I +quite expected to see him go headlong. + +He was a citizen of Moquegua, very young, and utterly unsuited for his +present errand. So great was his agitation that when he had planted +his feet firmly on the floor of the cave his hands still clung like +grim death to the rope. + +"You're all right now," I said, leading him away from the mouth of the +cave. "Rather a queer way of getting into a house, isn't it?" + +"The saints preserve me!" he exclaimed, while his teeth chattered like +castanets, "this is horrible. A dozen times, coming up that rope, I +wished I'd never been born. But it's the last time I'll practise +doctoring outside Moquegua." + +"You did very creditably, I assure you, doctor," observed Santiago, +whose eyes gleamed with fun; "such grace, such agility, is given to +few. I should have thought your life had been spent in scaling +mountains." + +The doctor looked from Santiago to me, hardly knowing what to make of +such flattery. + +"Faith," exclaimed he at last, "I hope there is an easier way of +getting down than of coming up." + +"There is," said the major, "and much more expeditious. You have but +to step outside the cave, and there you are. Most people, however, +prefer to go down by the rope." + +The doctor groaned. + +"I shall never do it," said he, "never! I shall be shut up in this +place for the rest of my life." + +"There will be one advantage in that," remarked Santiago pleasantly: +"your patients will always be able to find you. Now I fear we must +tear ourselves from your side." + +"Do your best with these poor fellows," I said. "The one in the corner +yonder will not trouble you long; the others are getting on nicely. +You will find this cavern quite a comfortable dwelling-place. There is +plenty of food, a spring of clear water, and enough fuel to keep a fire +going for weeks." + +"Meanwhile," observed Santiago, "we will ask the good folks of Moquegua +to make a nice long ladder, so that you can get down without trouble." + +It was really very laughable to watch the doctor's face as the major +prepared to descend. + +"He will be killed," said he dolefully. "It is a clear case of +suicide. Look, he has missed his foothold, and will be dashed to +pieces!" + +"Nonsense," I said, with a laugh; "there is no danger if you don't +think about it. See, it is nothing but going down a flight of steps +backwards." But he covered his face with his hands and shuddered. + +When the major had reached the ground, I grasped the rope, saying,-- + +"Farewell, doctor; I hope you will have a comfortable time. And don't +worry about coming down; you'll find it an easy matter enough." + +"Good-bye," answered he gloomily; "I shall never see you or any one +else again. I shall die up here for certain." + +The fellow was so genuinely frightened that I assured him we would +devise some plan to rescue him; on which he brightened up considerably, +and I began the descent. I asked the guide where he had left the +horses. + +"At the village, senor," he replied, "on the other side of the +mountain." + +In answer to a further question, he told us that the doctor would not +cross the narrow track, and that they had, in consequence, been +compelled to travel many miles out of their way. + +"I think he was right," exclaimed Santiago, when we reached the spot. +"This is a far worse venture than climbing to the cavern by the rope." + +And indeed, seen in broad daylight, with every rock standing out +pitilessly clear, and every chasm yawning wide, the place was enough to +daunt the spirit of the bravest. + +Familiarity had rendered the guide indifferent to the danger, but I +felt as nervous as when crossing the previous evening. However, I +could not make a parade of my anxiety, so I set foot on the narrow path +with a jaunty air but quaking heart. Santiago smiled too, but I fancy +he was by no means sorry when we gained the farther side without +accident. Then we jested about the past danger, talking lightly and as +if it were an affair of no moment. Nevertheless, I was thankful the +heat of the sun provided an excuse for the perspiration that streamed +down my face. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A STORMY INTERVIEW. + +On our march to the town, Santiago assumed a light-hearted carelessness +that was far from his real feelings. He laughed merrily, made joking +remarks, and behaved generally as if the prospect of a spell of prison +life was most agreeable. This was, of course, mere outside show. He +was too proud to let his captors see his real distress; but his acting +did not deceive me. + +We had reached the market-place, and I was wondering at the absence of +the soldiers, when Jose suddenly appeared, coming from the governor's +house. On seeing us, he approached, saying, "You have been a long +time. I began to think you had missed your way." + +"The guide was late in the first place, as the doctor would not take +the nearest way, and we did not hurry. But where are the troops?" + +"Off again!" said he, his eyes twinkling: "the colonel has gone for a +little jaunt of ninety miles or so to intercept a Spanish column. +Thank goodness, we have missed that!--How did you leave your men, +major?" + +"One is dying, I fear," replied Santiago; "but the others will soon be +all right, unless your doctor kills them!" + +"I was sorry to send him," said Jose, "but I had no choice. He was the +only one in the place available. He didn't offer his services, I can +assure you." + +"I can well believe it," laughed the major. "The poor fellow was half +dead with fright when he reached us, and vows he will never risk the +danger of getting down again." + +"We must have him tied to the rope, and lowered like a sack of +potatoes. Meanwhile, what is to be done with you?" + +"The only suggestion I can make is that you set me free!" + +"Perhaps I had better report to the governor," observed Jose +thoughtfully. "He is Colonel Miller's representative. I daresay he +will parole you till the chief comes." + +"No, no!" cried the major hastily; "I've done with paroles! From this +moment I consider myself free to escape." + +"To _try_," corrected Jose. "Well, the effort will fill up your time, +and keep you from being idle. Of course," he added, "it will change +the position a little. We can still remain on friendly terms, only I +must not forget to load my pistol. And now let us interview the +governor." + +A sentry stood at the outside gate, and several soldiers were in the +courtyard; but passing through, we entered the house, and found +ourselves in the governor's presence. He was a military-looking man, +though holding no rank in the army--a Spaniard who had recently come +over from the enemy. Two or three officers were in the room, and a +young man sat at a table, writing. + +Jose told his story briefly, concluding with a proposal that the +prisoner should be left in his charge until Colonel Miller's return. + +"There is a more agreeable way still," observed the governor, with a +bland smile.--"Major Mariano, I am not unaware either of your name or +your services. I know you for a dashing and brilliant officer, far and +away superior to those nominally above you. I am not without the power +to make you an offer. The Spanish cause is lost; in a few months your +armies will be crushed; Peru will be independent. Until that time you +will languish miserably in prison. Afterwards I cannot pretend to +prophesy your fate; but I offer you an opportunity to escape from the +wreck. Join the Patriot army, and I pledge my word that San Martin +shall give you the rank of colonel at once. In a year it will be your +own fault if you are not a general. Come, what do you say?" + +Only a few hours previously I had seen an outburst of temper on +Santiago's part; now I beheld another, which by comparison made the +first appear mild. His eyes literally blazed with anger; his face was +red; he actually quivered with passion. Twice he endeavoured to speak, +and the words choked in his throat. Jose laid a hand restrainingly on +his shoulder; he flung it off passionately. + +"Dog of a traitor!" cried he at last, "do you think the blood of +Santiago Mariano is as base as yours? Do you imagine I am a rat like +you to leave a sinking ship? What! lend my sword to a parcel of +beggarly cutthroats and vagabonds? I would rather eat out my heart in +the blackest dungeon of Peru!" + +Once a flush of shame overspread the governor's face, but he recovered +himself promptly, and listened with a bitter smile till the end. + +"You shall eat your words if not your heart," he exclaimed brutally; +and turning to an officer, he added, "Rincona, bring in your men and +the heaviest irons that can be found in the prison." + +Santiago smiled scornfully; but Jose, pushing forward, said quietly, +"You cannot do that, senor. This man is my prisoner, for whom I am +responsible to Colonel Miller alone. Until the return of the colonel, +therefore, I cannot let him go from my keeping." + +For a moment Rincona hesitated, but at the governor's second command he +left the room, while the other officers clustered round their chief. + +Jose produced a pistol and cocked it, saying coolly, "The man who lays +hands on my prisoner dies." + +Santiago turned to him with a pleasant smile. "Thanks, my friend," he +said, "but I cannot let you suffer on my behalf. Besides, there is +Crawford to be considered. The consequences may be fatal to him, as he +is sure to stand by you." + +"Don't hesitate on my account, Jose," said I. But the major's words +had made an impression, and a shadow of annoyance flitted across my +companion's brow. + +However, there was little time for thinking. We heard the tramp, tramp +of marching feet, and presently Rincona entered, followed by about a +dozen soldiers. + +"The irons!" roared the governor, beside himself with passion; "where +are the irons?" + +"I have sent for them, sir," replied Rincona. + +"You might have spared yourself the trouble," remarked Jose; "they +shall not be put on." + +"Yes, yes!" exclaimed Santiago; "what does it matter? Better so than +that you two should lose your lives." + +I looked at Jose. His lips were set like a vice, and I knew that no +power on earth could move him now. The situation was decidedly +unpleasant, and unfortunately there seemed to be no way out. True, he +might kill the governor, but that would only still further complicate +matters. + +The soldiers, as usual, stood with impassive faces; the affair was none +of theirs, save so far as obeying orders went. The officers were +restless and uneasy, and one of them kept up a whispered conversation +with the governor, who listened impatiently, and from time to time +shook his head. + +At last two other men arrived, bearing a set of heavy irons, and once +again Santiago turned appealingly, but without effect, to Jose. + +One might have heard a pin drop when the governor, sheltering behind +his officers, cried in a loud voice, "Put that man in irons!" + +"Stand still!" said Jose, raising his pistol, and speaking in the +Indian dialect. + +How the dispute would have ended I cannot tell, but at that moment a +happy inspiration flashed into my mind. The soldiers were all Indians, +and judging by their appearance, Indians of the mountains. Was it +possible that any of them acknowledged the authority of the Silver Key? +If so, we were safe. It was a poor chance, but there seemed to be no +other. + +Trembling with impatience, I opened my shirt at the neck, and drew +forth the brigand chief's gift. At first no one took any notice; but +when I held the key to view, the Indians raised a shout of mingled joy +and surprise. Then I looked at Santiago and laughed, saying, "We are +safe!" + +The Indians jabbered away in their own language, talking with one +another, and pointing to the emblem of authority which hung from my +neck. The governor stood like a man in a dream; the officers gazed +alternately at me and the native soldiers, as if doubting the evidence +of their senses. + +"How many of you are followers of the Silver Key, and of Raymon +Sorillo?" I asked. + +"All, all, master!" they cried. + +"And those outside?" + +"All, all!" they again shouted. + +"I can trust you to help me?" + +"To the death, master!" they cried with one voice. + +At that I turned to the governor, saying with a smile, "The position is +changed, senor. I have but to raise my hand, and you will feel the +weight of your own irons. But there is no need to quarrel. Colonel +Miller will be here in a few days, and he shall decide between us. +Meanwhile we will guard the prisoner." + +The governor nearly choked with anger, and threatened violently that as +soon as the colonel returned he would have us all shot. However, as it +was evident that the soldiers would obey my orders, he raised no +further objection to our taking Santiago away. + +"By St. Philip," exclaimed the major, "the room was hot! Are you a +magician, Crawford?" + +"Upon my word I begin to think so. At any rate, I possess a magical +key." + +"Which has saved our lives," observed Jose grimly. + +"And I suspect," laughed Santiago, "that once upon a time it unlocked +the door of a prison cell! But won't those natives suffer for this?" + +"I don't think so. They are too strong, and their chief has more power +in Peru than the viceroy and San Martin combined." + +"You know him, then?" + +"Yes, and so does Jose. He has done me good service, for which I am +grateful, though I could never like the man. But here we are at the +house. The good folk will wonder at our bringing an uninvited guest." + +Fortunately a room had been set apart for us, so we could talk at our +ease. I was burning to tell Jose about my father, but first of all we +had to come to an understanding with Santiago. This time he made no +demur at giving his parole. "In fact," said he gaily, "you have forced +my hand, and I have no choice." + +"So much the better," remarked Jose; "we may as well be comfortable +together till the colonel arrives." + +"And after that we may be hanged comfortably together!" laughed the +major. "How do you like the prospect?" + +"I can trust Miller. He is an honourable man, and will do what is +right. It is Crawford who will suffer for inciting the troops to +mutiny." + +"Jose," said I presently, "I haven't told you that Major Mariano is an +old friend of mine." + +"And at one time his jailer," interrupted Santiago. "That ought to +make him feel grateful." + +"Oh," exclaimed Jose, "you are the captain Jack has often talked about! +Well, I'm glad we have been able to do a little for you." + +"This morning while we were waiting for your precious doctor," I +continued, "he told me a very startling piece of news." + +"Yes?" said Jose. + +"About my father." + +Jose sprang to his feet, demanding fiercely, "What do you know of Senor +Crawford, major? Don Eduardo came to his end by foul means: he was not +slain by the government, but by some one who hoped to profit by his +death." + +"According to the major's information, he was not slain at all," I +said, and proceeded to relate the story. + +Jose listened attentively to every word, and then asked Santiago +innumerable questions. Like myself, he displayed great excitement, but +I judged from his expression that he entertained little hope of my +father being still alive. + +"The truth is," said he, "Don Eduardo had made numerous powerful +enemies both in public and private life; and as we all know, any stick +is good enough to beat a dog with. Besides, he owned vast estates, +and--" + +"Go on!" laughed Santiago as Jose hesitated; "the king's party put him +to death in order to seize them!" + +"No, no," said Jose hotly; "I don't tar all Spaniards with the same +brush. Still, they aren't all saints either, and I say some of them +killed him under cloak of the government. And some day," he added, "I +will prove it. As to his being alive, I think there is small chance of +it.--And Jack, my boy, I would not mention the matter to your mother." + +"But," said I, clinging to my shred of hope, "he was not killed in the +mountains, and we have heard nothing since." + +Jose let me talk, and listened kindly to my arguments, but I noticed +that none of them made any impression. At the best, he said, my father +had been thrown into prison seriously hurt, and it was not likely that +he had survived the confinement. + +"Have you ever seen the casemates at Callao, major?" he asked. + +"Yes," said Santiago, "and very unhealthy places they are. But there +are more prisons than those in Peru." + +It would be wearisome to repeat our conversation, for, after all, we +were arguing in the dark, having only the major's imperfect story to go +by. Besides, as Jose said, many events had happened during the last +two years, and my father was by no means the only noted man in Peru to +disappear. So our talk travelled in a circle, leaving off at the +starting-point, and for sole effect it extinguished the gleam of hope +which the major's story had kindled. + +In the evening, at Jose's suggestion, I went into the streets to pick +up any information concerning the governor's doings. Everything seemed +quiet; the sentries were at their posts as usual, while the soldiers +off duty wandered about the town. + +They greeted me respectfully, raising their hands in salute and +standing at attention, as if I had been an officer of high degree. +Recognizing a sergeant who had been in the governor's room, I stopped +to ask a few questions. Greatly to my relief, I learned that, with the +exception of a few Spanish officers, the troops in the town were all +Indians from the mountains. + +As the man seemed smart and intelligent, I told him how matters stood, +and that we depended entirely upon him and his comrades until the +coming of the English colonel. + +"You can trust us, master," he replied, and indeed his talk made it +quite clear that the friend of Raymon Sorillo and the holder of the +Silver Key might rely on the Indians in Moquegua even against Miller +himself. + +Jose, I think, felt rather relieved on hearing my news; while Santiago +laughed heartily, prophesying that, if the Spaniards were defeated, I +should in a few years be king, or at least president, of Peru. + +"I had no idea," said he, "that you were so important a person. No +wonder Barejo wished to keep you shut up!" + +That night we took it in turns to watch; but the governor attempted +nothing against us, and the next day we walked openly in the street +without molestation. + +Colonel Miller had vanished into space, and for nearly a week we heard +nothing of him; then one morning an Indian scout rode wearily into the +town with the news that the Englishman was close at hand. Immediately +the people rushed out in hundreds to line the street, and to cheer the +returning warriors. + +Jose stayed indoors with the major, but sent me out to get an early +word with our leader. Bright, alert, and cheery as ever, he rode at +the head of his troops, smiling and bowing to the inhabitants as they +greeted him with rousing cheers. Then came the soldiers--the cavalry +on dead-tired horses, the infantry on jaded mules--with a number of +prisoners in the midst. + +The animals were tired enough; but the men! I can hardly describe +their condition. Their faces were haggard, their eyes heavy and +bloodshot; some were nearly asleep, others had scarcely strength to sit +upright. Very little grass had grown under their feet. As soon as +they were dismissed, the citizens pounced on them, taking them into the +houses, where food and drink were provided in abundance. + +The governor had come out to meet the colonel, whom I expected to see +return with him; but at the last moment he turned aside, and with a +laughing exclamation went straight to his own quarters, whither I +followed him. + +"Hullo, Crawford!" cried he. "So you didn't get La Hera?" + +"No, sir; but we captured a major, and I wish to speak to you about +him." + +"Won't it wait?" he asked, with a comical expression. + +"I am afraid not, sir. The truth is, we've had a quarrel with the +governor, and--" + +"You want to get in your version first! A very good plan. Well, fire +away, but don't make it long; I've a lot of things on hand." + +By this time we had entered his room, and going straight to the heart +of the affair, I told my story in the fewest possible words. The +colonel listened with rather a grave face, and when I had finished he +said, "It's an awkward mess, especially just now. It's absolutely +necessary to keep friends with the governor, and I don't like this +tampering with the troops. But, of course, I won't have the prisoner +put in irons or treated differently from the rest. Bring him here now, +and I'll settle the matter at once." + +"Yes, sir," said I, thankful to get off so lightly. + +The colonel had already begun some fresh work when I returned with Jose +and the major, but he rose from his seat and saluted the Spaniard +courteously. + +"I understand it is useless to ask for your parole, major," he said. +"Your mind is quite made up on the point?" + +"Yes, sir," answered Santiago, smiling in his easy, graceful way. "An +opportunity to escape may not arise but if it does, I shall certainly +seize it." + +"Quite right!" exclaimed the colonel; "but I fear you will be +disappointed. However, though guarding you rigidly, we shall put you +to as little inconvenience as possible. You will find half a dozen +companions in misfortune in the prison. Most of the captured rank and +file have joined the Patriots." + +The major's lip curled scornfully, but he only said, "I am obliged to +you, colonel, for your kindness. Some day perhaps I may be able to +return it." + +"Not in the same way, I hope," laughed Colonel Miller. "I have had a +taste of Spanish prison life already, major. But when the war is over +I trust we may meet again." + +Then he sent for an officer and a file of soldiers, and Santiago turned +to bid us a cheery farewell. + +"Good-bye," said he brightly; "I have had a pleasant time with you.--If +I do succeed in escaping, Crawford, I will inquire further into your +father's story.--Ah, here is my escort!" and with a salute to the +colonel and a nod to us, he took his place in front of the men, while +the officer received his chief's instructions. + +"He's a plucky fellow. I should have liked to set him free," I said, +as we strolled back to our quarters. + +"To do more mischief!" growled Jose. "I'm sorry for him, in a way, but +it's better for us that he should be under lock and key. And that +reminds me! How did Colonel Miller take the Silver Key business?" + +"Very badly; called it tampering with the troops." + +"So it was, but it saved our lives, all the same. I shall be rather +pleased when we leave this district; the governor won't regard either +of us too favourably." + +"He can't hurt us now the colonel is here." + +"No," replied Jose, with a curious smile "but we might meet with a +nasty accident. Perhaps you remember my remark, made two years ago, +that accidents are common in Peru. It's as true now as then." + +As it chanced, Jose was shortly to have his wish; for although we did +not know it then, the colonel had decided to abandon Moquegua. Many of +the troops were down with the ague, the place was a difficult one to +defend, unless against a weak attack, and La Hera was already on the +march with a force far superior to ours. This, however, we did not +learn till two days later. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A NARROW ESCAPE. + +"It is a great honour," exclaimed Jose, "and you should feel proud." + +I had just returned from an interview with the colonel, who had asked +me to undertake for a short time the duties of his private secretary. +It seemed a simple task then, but afterwards I regarded it differently. +For the next three weeks I was attached to the colonel, who took me +with him everywhere. A secretary is generally supposed to write, but +my work consisted in riding. Day after day, from morning till night, +we were on horseback, now travelling over sandy deserts to the +seashore, again penetrating into the heart of the mountains--hungry, +thirsty, and tired, and always in danger of falling into the hands of +the enemy. + +As a measure of precaution our little force retired to Tacna, where, +much to my satisfaction, the colonel received from Lima news of an +armistice. This, of course, extended to all parts of the country; but +I was mistaken in thinking it would increase my leisure, as my time was +still kept fully occupied. + +In one way this was a good thing, as it kept me from brooding over +Santiago's story, though even at the busiest times the thought of my +father's fate would creep into my mind. I saw nothing of Jose, who had +been left behind with some Indians to hold a mountain pass, but +occasionally I paid a brief visit to the Spanish prisoners for a chat +with the friendly major. + +We had been at Tacna a month, when one evening Colonel Miller said +abruptly: "Crawford, the armistice is at an end, and we must retreat. +Tell Videla to send the stores and the sick to Arica the first thing in +the morning; then carry this order to Ilo. You will find three small +brigs there; they are to sail at once for Arica. Take Castro the guide +with you, and rejoin me on the march to Arica." + +"Very good, sir," I replied, though my words belied my feelings. +However, I went out, gave Videla the colonel's message, and hunted up +the guide. + +Castro was an educated Indian, trained by one of the missionaries, and +a very decent fellow. I found him sound asleep; but he rose at once, +looked to see if his bag of coca was full, loaded his pistols, and +saddled his horse. + +"A pleasant night for a ride, lieutenant,"--the colonel had given me +that rank,--"and every yard will take us further from the Spaniards. I +hear that La Hera is getting ready to swoop." + +"He will find his pigeon a hawk if he comes too close," I answered, +laughing. "Bring your horse, and wait for me at the hospital." + +The night was still young, and many people, civilians and military, +were in the street, talking in excited whispers. It was plain that +they had heard of La Hera's approach, and were discussing what they +knew of the colonel's plans. + +Soon, however, the town was left behind, and we had fairly started on +our journey. There was no danger in it, except that of getting lost, +which, with Castro for a guide, was not likely to happen. He knew the +district as well as, perhaps better than, I knew the streets of Lima. + +We jogged along quietly till midnight, not wishing to tire the animals, +and then stopped near the edge of a sandy desert for an hour's rest. +By this time I had begun to hate the very sight of sand; it seemed to +me more dreary and pitiless than the stoniest of barren ground. Castro +did not mind in the least, but lay on his back looking at the starry +sky and placidly chewing his coca. + +"Come, lieutenant," said he briskly at the end of an hour, "it is time +to mount;" and we were soon plodding on as patiently as before. + +It was nine o'clock when we finally arrived at Ilo. It may have been +owing to my own tired state, but I thought I had never seen such a +miserable and desolate spot in all my life. The houses were wretched +mud-built hovels, and the few people in the place looked woebegone +beyond belief. + +The three brigs were in keeping with the village, being old and +worm-eaten, and the craziest craft imaginable. I would not have sailed +one across a pond. However, I sought out the commander of this ragged +squadron, and gave him the colonel's order. + +On reading it his face brightened, and he declared his intention of +running out to sea that very afternoon. + +"He doesn't look much of a hero," observed Castro; "but," with an +expressive glance at the three floating coffins, "I imagine there are +few braver men in Peru." + +"One need not be brave to seize any chance of getting away from this +depressing place," said I. "I believe I could easily take the risk of +being drowned if there were no other way of escape." + +"You will have the risk, lieutenant, if we are to go afloat in these +brigs; but my opinion is that the bottoms will drop out of them before +they reach Arica." + +"In that case we must either beat La Hera or be annihilated." + +"That's what it looks like," replied Castro coolly. + +We stabled our horses in a tumble-down shed, fed and watered them, and, +as it was impossible to leave till they were rested, lay down to snatch +a brief sleep on the ground. We were invited to use the floor of a +hovel for a couch, but after glancing at it, declined with great +politeness and many sonorous words of thanks. + +When we awoke the brigs had disappeared, and a roaring wind was +sweeping down from the north. + +"They'll never make headway against that," remarked Castro. "We can +return to the colonel and tell him his brigs are at the bottom of the +sea. There will be a pretty tune played presently, and La Hera will +provide the music." + +To a sailor, perhaps, the danger would not have seemed formidable; but +standing on that desolate beach, listening to the hurricane rush of the +wind, I could not but think Castro was right. And if indeed he had +prophesied truly, then was our little force in sad straits. Burdened +with sick, hampered by fleeing patriots, encumbered by prisoners, with +half his troops weakened as usual by ague, the English colonel could +neither fight nor flee. What, then, could he do? By this time every +one knew him too well to dream he would surrender. + +"Castro," said I, "we carry bad news, and bad news flies apace. Let us +keep up the reputation of the old proverb. Half an hour or so may make +all the difference in the world." + +He made a grimace as if to say that a few minutes more or less would +matter little; but he saddled his horse promptly, nevertheless, and was +ready to start as soon as I. + +"I reckon," he said, "that we may strike the road from Tacna to Arica +by midnight to-morrow, unless our animals founder by the way. Can you +trust your horse?" + +"The colonel selected him." + +"That ought to be sufficient warrant. The chief knows a horse, though +he will ride in the absurd English style." + +There were few men in the country who would have cared to cut +themselves adrift as Castro did on this ride of ours to intercept the +marching Patriots. His only guides were those he could interpret from +nature. While daylight lasted, he steered by the sun; at night, by the +stars and the faint wind that fanned our faces. + +For twenty-four hours, during which time we rested, of course, both for +our own sakes and for the sakes of our animals, not one human being +crossed our path, or even came within sight of us. And during that +time, also, we saw neither bird nor beast, nor any manner of living +thing, save only ourselves and our animals. + +And then, quite unexpectedly to me, we came upon an oasis in the dreary +desert--a little hamlet with mud-walled hovels, but better than those +at Ilo, and having patches of cultivated ground enclosed. The natives +had reclaimed this piece of land by means of the waters of a +moderate-sized stream, and lived in almost as great isolation as if +they had been on Robinson Crusoe's island. + +They were neither Patriots nor Royalists, and I doubt much whether they +knew of the struggle going forward; but they had kind hearts, and gave +us a warm welcome, pressing upon us gifts of fruits and vegetables to +the limits of their scanty stock. They found ample forage, too, for +the weary animals, and we stayed there a matter of three hours to rest +Castro's horse, which had shown symptoms of breaking down. + +I seized this opportunity to snatch an hour's sleep; but my guide was +kept chattering by the natives, who listened with amazement to his +news. They knew no Spanish, and could not understand the native patois +I spoke; neither could I understand a word of what they said. As for +Castro, I suppose no man in South America had the gift of so many +Indian dialects. + +"After all, lieutenant," exclaimed he, as we took leave of this simple +community, "I doubt if these people have not the best of life. They +eat, drink, and are at peace, caring no more for a president than for a +king." + +"And doing nothing for either," I replied, laughing. "How does the +horse seem now?" + +"I think he will do this journey. But if I'm to ride with the colonel, +he will have to provide me with another." + +Throughout the evening we rode silently side by side, while all around +us was the awful stillness of a dead world. The sun went down, and +presently the stars gleamed above us, throwing a ghostly light over the +sea of sand. + +Midnight found us still riding, and another hour passed before Castro +drew rein at the broken track leading from Tacna to Arica. Throwing +the reins over his horse's neck, and jumping down, he examined the +ground carefully, reading it as skilfully as the student reads a +printed book. + +To and fro he went, casting off here and there like a hunting-dog, till +he was satisfied. Then he returned to me, saying, "Carts have gone by +hours since, and the infantry quite recently, but I see no signs of +cavalry." + +"They would remain till the last minute, so as to deceive La Hera." + +"That is so; but the question is, has the colonel stayed with them? It +is to him we want to give our information." + +"The infantry can tell us." + +"We shall waste time if he is in the rear, and time is precious." + +"Let us separate. You go forward; I will ride toward Tacna." + +"It is dangerous, senor." + +"You forget that I have been over this route." + +"Well, as you will. If the colonel has not passed, I shall return. +Keep to the track; do not wander from it either to right or to left." + +"All right, Castro; I will take care." + +He vaulted to the saddle, wished me a safe journey, and rode off, while +I turned my horse's head in the opposite direction. Fortunately the +night was clear, while the dawn was not far off, so that I had a great +advantage in steering my way. True, I rode at no great pace, being +both afraid and unwilling to spur my jaded beast. Now and again I even +dismounted and walked at his head to give him some relief. + +It was perhaps about three o'clock in the morning. A heavy fog had +arisen, and I was riding with the greatest care, when suddenly I found +a musket pointed straight at me, and heard the demand, "Halt, or I +fire!" + +The man spoke in Spanish, but his accent showed him to be an Indian, +and I hoped he was one of Miller's cavalry detachment. Whistling +softly, he was at once joined by a second and a third man, the last of +whom sharply ordered me to dismount. + +At the sound of his voice I laughed aloud, saying, "You post your men +well, Jose, but they have not made a great capture this time. Is the +colonel here?" + +"We are all here," said Jose, giving my hand a grip; "but I thought you +had gone to Arica. Is anything wrong?" + +"A good deal," I answered, speaking in English, so that the Indians +might not understand. "I must see Colonel Miller at once." + +"Jump down, then. Leave your horse here, and I will take you to him. +Mind where you step; the men are all tucked in and sound asleep." + +But for the fog, I could by this time have seen my way clearly; as it +was, I could only just distinguish the ponchos enveloping the men's +heads. When the fog lifted, the light showed a more curious spectacle +than most of you have perhaps ever seen. It was the custom, whenever +we halted in a sandy desert, for each man to scoop out for himself a +shallow grave. In this he lay, scraping the loose sand over his body +for bed-clothes, and leaving his head, wrapped in his poncho, above +ground. It was, indeed, a most comfortable and delicious bed, as in +those days, or rather nights, I often proved. + +The colonel lay buried alive, as it were, like his men; but he slept +lightly, and pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he +struggled to his feet. + +[Illustration: Pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he +struggled to his feet.] + +"Who is it?" he asked. "Crawford, where is your guide?" + +"Gone another way to look for you, colonel." + +"Have the brigs left Ilo?" + +"Yes; but both Castro and I doubt if they will reach Arica. They are +altogether crazy, and as soon as they left the harbour a strong gale +from the north, which will drive them out of their course, sprang up." + +"You are rather a Job's comforter," laughed the colonel. "I daresay +they will arrive all right. Still," he continued, speaking more to +himself, "everything depends upon their safe arrival--everything! Jump +in, Crawford, and have a nap; I may want you presently." + +He went away with Jose, while I got into his bed, pulled the sand over +me, and was fast asleep before the two men had gone a dozen yards. + +For two whole hours I lay like a log; then a soldier pulled the poncho +from my head, saying that the colonel waited for me at breakfast. I +rose quickly, made my toilet--not an elaborate proceeding, you may be +sure--and waited on the colonel. + +"Sit down," said he, laughing; "it's early in the day for banqueting, +but we must feast when we can. I hope you are not blessed with too +good an appetite?" + +"I don't think I should feel greatly tempted to indulge much at +present," I replied, with a grimace at the dried meat I was cutting. +"Indigestion would only too surely follow." + +"Then," said he, and his eyes twinkled with merriment, "we will eat +sparingly. I am going straight to Arica, and you will ride with me." + +"I am afraid I shall have to get you to find me a fresh horse, as my +own has broken down, colonel." + +Turning to one of the soldiers near, he said, "Ask Major Videla to send +me a good horse at once.--Take your time, Crawford; I am awaiting a +messenger from Tacna." + +Nearly an hour passed before he was ready, during which time I saddled +my fresh mount, transferred my holsters, and had a chat with Jose. He +told me they had been compelled to release their prisoners, Santiago +among them. + +"I had no idea you were so hard pressed," I said. + +"If La Hera doesn't blunder," answered Jose, "he can sweep us all into +his net. The only thing that saves us now is Miller's skill and +reputation. Every one believes he is going to show fight somewhere +between this and the coast." + +Presently the colonel came along, accompanied by Major Videla, to whom +he gave final directions; and then, bidding me follow, rode from the +camp. Four miles out we came upon Castro, walking, and leading his +horse, which had fallen dead lame. + +"Have you been into Arica?" asked Miller. + +"No, colonel; but I have learned some news. There are four fine +vessels in the roadstead; if you could get them, the troops would be +safe." + +"Ah!" cried the colonel sharply; and telling Castro to wait for the +cavalry, he rode off at a great pace towards Arica. At four o'clock we +staggered into the town, and were instantly met by the governor with a +sorrowful tale. He had secured the use of three vessels, but the +commander of the fourth absolutely refused to be either coaxed or +threatened into lending his assistance. + +There was not a moment to be lost, and Colonel Miller, with no other +attendant than myself, ran down to the beach. There we got on a balsa, +or raft, which carried us to a launch, whose crew at once took us +alongside a fine North American schooner. + +Clambering on deck, we found the master, to whom the colonel applied +for the loan of his vessel. The sour old sea-dog turned a deaf ear. +The colonel offered a sum of money that would have bought the schooner +outright at market value; he would have none of it. + +Now, it chanced that some of the crew were Englishmen who had served +under Miller in the Chilian War; and though I did not know that, I +could plainly see how interested they were in the discussion. The +colonel saw it too, and in a few simple but terse and vigorous words he +laid the case before them. + +This produced a marked effect. The men growled their approbation, and +one sturdy fellow exclaimed stoutly, "I'm not going to see a countryman +of mine hard pushed without helping him. What's your sentiments, +mates?" + +"The same!" cried they.--"We'll stand by you, colonel. The Spaniards +shan't cut you off if we can help it." + +"Thanks, men," replied Colonel Miller, "and I'll treat you fairly. +Neither your master nor you shall have cause to complain." + +The skipper, however, was not to be appeased. He threw up his command +and went ashore with us, leaving the mate to navigate the vessel. It +was rather a high-handed proceeding, perhaps, on the colonel's part, +but he was saving his troops from an unavailing fight against +overwhelming odds. + +All that night we worked like slaves. The launches could not come +close inshore, so that every one and everything had to be transported +to them on balsas. The colonel did not spare himself, and my position +procured me the honour of standing beside him knee-deep in surf while +he superintended the embarkation. + +Most of the sick were got on board one or other of the four vessels, +but the worst cases had to remain in hospital. Then nearly a hundred +people of the town, who had recently joined the Patriot cause, +clamoured for protection, which was, of course, afforded. + +In the morning the colonel insisted I should take a rest, but the work +continued all day, while from time to time scouts came in with the news +that La Hera was advancing at full speed. At length it was all done; +only the colonel and I remained to go on board, and we had just reached +the launch, when, with a yell and thunder of hoofs, the Royalist +cavalry galloped down to the beach. + +"Just too late to take their passage," laughed Miller. "What a pity!" + +"There's our late prisoner," I cried, standing up in the launch. "Look +at the rascal; he is shaking his sword at us, and laughing." + +"He's a fine fellow," remarked the colonel. "I don't grudge him his +liberty." + +Taking off my cap, I waved it vigorously; to which Santiago replied +with a salute; and then, as pursuit was impossible, he led his men back +into the town. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +A STERN PURSUIT. + +As soon as our vessels left the shelter of the bay, they felt the full +force of the gale; and but for skilful handling on the part of their +crews, would most likely have come to grief. Even as it was, the more +timid of the passengers began to think they would have done better in +trusting to the mercy of the victorious Spaniards. + +"It is lucky for us, lieutenant," exclaimed Castro, "that the brigs did +not reach Arica." + +"I hope they are safe," I said doubtfully. + +"Safe enough by this time," he replied--"at the bottom of the ocean!" + +Whether or not he was right in his surmise I cannot say, but from that +day to this I never again heard mention of the unfortunate vessels. + +After being at sea about a week, on reduced rations both of food and of +water, we ran one night into the roadstead of Pisco, landed, and before +daylight had made ourselves masters of the town, the Royalists +hurriedly retreating. + +On board the schooner I had obtained a much-needed rest, but directly +my feet touched the shore I was set to work again. + +There never was such a man for prompt and instant action as Colonel +Miller. As Jose said more than once, he was always packing twenty-four +hours' work into twelve, and no one within had ever had a chance to +shirk his share. + +"We must follow up the enemy--follow them up, and not give them a +moment's rest!" said he, almost before the nose of our boat had touched +the shore. + +First, however, it was necessary to obtain animals, and almost before +day broke a dozen parties were dispatched to scour the surrounding +district for horses. The Royalists, however, had been beforehand, and +it took three days to procure the needful supplies. + +Fortunately a woman arrived from Lima with a drove of fifty mules, +which our leader instantly pressed into the service, in spite of their +lawful owner's protestations. She was a fine, handsome, and remarkable +woman, who traded on her own account like a man, and she made a sturdy +fight for her property. Directly the mules were seized she bounced +into the colonel's room, her eyes ablaze. + +"Good-morning, madam," said he courteously. + +"It's a bad morning for me," she replied. "Do you know that your men +have stolen my mules?" + +"Not stolen, madam; only borrowed, by my orders, for the good of the +Patriot cause." + +"I defy you to keep them!" she cried. "See," and waving & paper, added +triumphantly, "that will make you less high and mighty, Senor +Englishman!" + +The paper was a passport and protection signed by San Martin himself; +but it produced no effect on the stubborn colonel. + +"I am sorry, madam," he exclaimed, still courteously, "but my men need +the mules. They shall be paid for, handsomely, but I must have them." + +The woman gasped with astonishment, and pushing the paper close to the +colonel's face, cried, "Are you blind? Can't you see General San +Martin's name? Don't you know that he can have you shot to-day if he +pleases?" + +"Not _to-day_, madam. The swiftest messenger could not get here from +Lima to-day; and thanks to your mules, which are really very fine +animals, we shall begin to chase the Royalists at dawn." + +Luckily she could not see my face as she broke into a torrent of abuse. +She had a fine command of the Spanish language, which she used for his +benefit, besides throwing in a number of odd phrases picked up from +English sailors. And all the while the colonel beamed upon her +genially, as if she were paying him the highest compliments. At length +she announced, in high-pitched tones, that where her mules went there +would she go also; she would not trust them to such a band of thieving +scoundrels. + +"I am delighted, madam," said the colonel, bowing low; "your society +will in some degree atone for the hardships of our journey." + +Neither of us thought she would really carry out her threat; but early +next morning she appeared mounted on one of her own mules, and attached +herself to me. + +"Madam," said I gravely, trying to imitate the colonel, "this is a +great pleasure for us; but even at the risk of losing your valued +company, I must once more point out to you the real nature of this +journey. We shall be half starved, besides suffering torments from +thirst; we shall be worn out by forced marches, and some of us, no +doubt, will fall victims to the Spanish bullets." + +"I won't leave my mules," was her only reply. + +"But why not sell them to the colonel? he will give you a fair price." + +"And what about my profit?" she cried. "Do you know why I came to +Pisco?--to buy brandy at eight dollars a jar, which just now I could +sell in Lima at eighty! What do you think of that, young man? Why, I +should have cleared a handsome fortune by this trip!" + +"It is very sad, madam; but soldiers, you know--" + +"Soldiers? Bah! Look at them riding on my mules! _My_ mules, mark +you! And to think that each of the honest beasts might be carrying +four jars of brandy at eight dollars a jar! It's a wicked waste of +mule-flesh! Eight from eighty leaves seventy-two; take twelve for +expenses, there's still sixty, and four sixties are two hundred and +forty--all clear profit from! A dozen of your vagabonds would be dear +at the price! Look at that rascally fellow cutting my mule with a +whip! I will most certainly have your colonel shot!" + +"I think not, madam; you have too tender a heart." + +"Yes," said she complacently, "that is the truth. I am not stern +enough. But fancy"--and here she went all over her calculations again, +winding up with the assertion that we were a set of common thieves and +rogues. + +By degrees, however, her manner changed: the ill-humour wore off, and +she became quite a Patriot, saying she would willingly lose her mules +if the Royalists were hunted down. + +However, about nine o'clock in the morning I left the good lady to pour +her grievances into more sympathetic ears, being ordered to push on +with a small detachment of cavalry, guided by Castro. Jose was lucky +enough to stay with the main body. Captain Plaza was in command of our +party, and he rode with the guide and me. Our course to Ica, the first +village on our route, lay over a burning desert of very loose sand, +dotted at great intervals by clumps of stunted palms. It was a +horrible ride, and when we reached Ica, about four in the afternoon, +neither men nor animals could go a step further. + +The people received us kindly, provided food and drink, and fresh +horses in place of our wearied animals. Then we slept for an hour, +and, thus refreshed, resumed the pursuit. I have often wondered since +how any of us survived the hardships of the next few days. + +Now and again we obtained an hour's rest, but our leader halted only +when our animals showed signs of exhaustion. The Spaniards must have +suffered as much as, if not more than, ourselves, as occasionally we +came upon a dead horse or a dead man, killed by sheer fatigue. + +On the third night after leaving lea we had ample proof of their +desperate straits. We had left the sandy deserts behind, and were +toiling along painfully, sustained only by Castro's assurance that he +knew of a capital camping-ground. + +"A fine wooded place," said he, "with grass for the horses, and a clear +stream of water. You will be tempted to stay there all night, captain." + +"Three hours," replied Plaza, "not a moment more. We must be close on +their heels now, and I don't mean Santalla to escape if I can help it." + +Santalla was a Royalist colonel of whose cruelty I had heard many +times. He was a gigantic fellow, of enormous strength; but, according +to all accounts, a pitiful coward in spite of his boasting. Indeed, +any leader of average bravery would have turned and struck a blow at +the handful of tired riders which now pursued him. + +"Here we are!" exclaimed Castro presently, and I saw with satisfaction +the trees on our left hand to which he pointed. Every bone in my body +was racked with pain, my lips were parched, my eyes ached, and for the +last hour I had scarcely been able to keep my seat. + +Halting his men, Plaza sent me on with the guide to investigate. +Leaving our horses, we moved forward swiftly but quietly; there was +just the possibility of a trap. The place was almost like an enclosure +on a large hacienda, but the fence was composed of trees, and we could +hear the plashing waters of a stream. + +Inside the ring was an open space, and there, to our astonishment, we +beheld some twenty men lying on the grass in all manner of attitudes. +Not one made the slightest movement, and at first I thought they must +be dead. + +"Don't be too sure," whispered Castro, and stooping down he glided +noiselessly to the nearest man, while I waited with breathless +eagerness. + +"Poor beggars!" said he pityingly; "we must have pushed them hard. I +don't believe they would waken if a cannon were fired at them!" + +This was an exaggeration, but indeed they slept so soundly that our +men, surrounding them, took away most of their weapons before they +understood what was going on. Binding their arms, we pushed and +dragged them close together, and then the captain placed his men round +them in a circle. Sentries were stationed at various places on the +outer ring, and, much to my disgust, I was told off to visit them +during the first hour. + +"Keep a sharp lookout," said the captain, "and go round regularly. +They are likely to fall asleep if you don't,"--which I did not think at +all surprising. However, I had a good drink of water, and dipped my +head in the stream, which freshened me somewhat. Then I began what +has, perhaps, been the very longest hour in my life. Fortunately I had +to walk, and I tried hard to keep my eyes open all the time. As to the +captain's "sharp look-out," I concluded he must have been joking. + +The hour came to an end at last, and I was free to sleep. I just lay +down on the ground, drew my poncho over me, and was sound asleep. I +would not have undertaken another hour's duty just then for all the +gold ever mined. + +The capture of the small Spanish detachment was a benefit to us in one +way: it prevented Plaza from moving so early, and gave us all an extra +hour's sleep. However, as soon as day broke, he told off half a dozen +men to guard the prisoners until the colonel's arrival, and ordered the +rest to be ready for starting in ten minutes. + +"It's nothing to do with me," remarked Castro, as he and I rode out at +the head of the men; "but the captain's overdoing it. He's taking the +heart out of his fellows, and just at the last pinch they'll fall to +pieces. There's nothing left in them for a dash at the end." + +"We shouldn't shine in a cavalry charge," I admitted, laughing and +looking at my horse, "unless, indeed, it were under Don Quixote's +banner!" + +"Well, Crawford," cried the captain, riding up, "something ought to +happen soon now. It's a pity we wasted that last hour this morning, +though. We must make up for it during the day. One of the prisoners +informed me that Santalla cannot be far ahead. I have a good mind to +push on with the men on the strongest horses, leaving you to follow. +What do you think?" + +"I think that you are going fast enough, captain. Both men and horses +are fagged now, and it's useless to catch up with Santalla just as we +are all dead beat." + +"But if we don't go ahead we shan't catch him at all. The colonel did +not send us on in front to sit down by the wayside." + +"No, captain; but that's just what we shall be doing soon, whether we +want to or not. Most of the horses are nearly done for now." + +"Then we'll get fresh ones," cried he (which, by the way, there was no +possible means of doing), "or continue the pursuit on foot. Do you +think if the colonel were in my place he would lag behind?" + +Of course I knew he would not, but then Miller was Miller, who had not, +to my thinking, his equal in South America. And Plaza wished to +imitate his chief, forgetting he did not possess that marvellous +personal influence over men which accounted so much for the English +colonel's success. + +So we pushed on, till, at the end of the third mile or thereabout, a +horse sank through sheer weariness to the ground, and had not +sufficient strength to rise again. + +"Run on with the rest," said the captain to the rider; "we will ride +and tie by turns." + +The man saluted and came on, but the last I saw of him he was +staggering from side to side of the track, as if he had completely lost +control of his limbs. After a time another horse fell, giving us +another infantry-man, who in a short time was, I daresay, also left +behind on the road. + +"'Twill be a plain trail for the main body," remarked the guide; for we +ourselves were continually passing broken weapons, mules that could not +drag their limbs a step further, dead horses, and now and then a +Royalist soldier curled up on the track fast asleep. + +"Where will Santalla make for?" I asked. + +"Arequipa. But I don't think he can reach it. The Indians bar the +direct route, and his only way out, as far as I can see, is by taking +to the mountains at Copari." + +"My horse won't face a hill just now." + +Castro smiled, saying, "The pass near Copari is too rugged for horses +at any time; the climbing must all be done on foot," and he smiled +again at my gesture of despair. + +At ten o'clock Plaza was compelled to halt, three-fourths of the men +being tired as dogs, while several horses had foundered on the road. +He was very excited, having heard from the last Spaniard picked up that +Santalla, thoroughly worn out, was barely two hours' march in front. + +He glanced wrathfully at his tired troopers. There they lay, five +minutes after the order to halt, sleeping like dead men, and for the +time being certainly of no greater use. + +"Caramba!" cried he, "it makes me wild! Two hours, Crawford! Do you +hear? And look at them! The prize will slip through our fingers after +all!" + +"Hardly that, captain," I murmured sleepily, "as it has never been in +our hands." + +"Santalla will have to rest as well," remarked the guide, "so the +scales will balance." + +"But I don't want them to balance!" cried Plaza testily. + +To give the captain his due, he was greatly in earnest, and willing to +do himself all that he required of his men. He showed this plainly two +hours after we had resumed the pursuit, when his horse suddenly dropped +from exhaustion. A dozen troopers at once made as if to dismount, but +he ordered them to keep their seats. + +"No, no," he roared; "I take no advantage!" and he ran on, holding by +the stirrup to the nearest horseman. + +The fellows cheered him, and I think we got on better for the incident, +though the halts became more frequent now, and our numbers lessened, as +one man after another dropped exhausted to the ground. Still we were +gaining on the runaways, as a disagreeable episode presently made clear. + +It was about four o'clock in the afternoon, and we were straggling at +no great speed through a narrow valley, when half a dozen bullets from +the rocky sides dropped into our midst. + +"Ah!" exclaimed Castro, "now the Spaniards are playing the proper game. +These fellows have been left to hold us in check while the main body +escapes through the Copari Pass." + +"Push on there!" roared the captain, who after a spell of riding had +just dismounted. There was, indeed, nothing else to be done. We must +run the gauntlet, and trust to luck for some of us getting through. +The Spaniards were well hidden, and could not be dislodged, unless, +which was out of the question, we came to hand-grasps with them. So +urging our jaded beasts to a spurt, we quickened the pace, while now +and again a groan and a thud told that a bullet had found its mark. + +Those who were hit lay where they fell; the most of us reached the open +country just in time to see a dozen or fifteen horsemen mount and ride +off. Evidently they had the pick of Santalla's animals, as they easily +kept their distance, though allowing us to advance within range, when, +discharging their muskets, they recommenced the retreat. + +Plaza fumed like one distracted at the galling fire, which considerably +delayed our advance, though we suffered in the loss of horses rather +than of men. He was riding again now, and well in front, with Castro +and myself behind him. Suddenly, after a scattering volley, I felt my +horse slip, and the next instant the poor beast was sprawling on the +ground with a bullet-hole in its chest. + +Staggering to my feet, I ran on, but unsteadily, for in truth I was +getting very near the end of my strength. However, a husky shout from +those in front encouraged me, and I saw that at last we had come fairly +upon the runaways. + +Just as Castro had foretold, they were taking to a mountain pass, +eastward of Copari, and the main body was already toiling up the +ascent. Their stores lay about everywhere; horses and mules were +abandoned; only a handful of horsemen, constituting the rearguard, +preserved any appearance of order. For a time they stoutly held the +mouth of the pass, but at length, leaving their animals, they too +disappeared. + +Plaza went at the entrance like a bull at a gate, Castro followed, and +I toiled after them with the men. Up we went, some cheering, but the +majority with closed lips, saving their breath. In our fatigued state +the climb was fearfully distressing: men sank to the ground gasping, or +fell while trying to grasp the overhanging rocks with nerveless fingers. + +As for me, though straining every nerve, I could not keep pace with the +leaders. My eyes smarted and ached; my head seemed to spin round; more +than once I should have fallen but for a friendly hand. Presently I +heard Plaza cheer; but he was out of sight, and the sound seemed to +come from a long distance. Then I was placed gently against a rock by +a soldier, who pushed on after the rest. + +Had I been hit? I really did not know. There was blood on my hands, +but they had been gashed by the jagged rocks. But hit or not, I must +do my best to keep up; so trying to steady myself, I took another step +forward. The pass was filled with strange sounds and with strange +shapes too. Large birds hovered over my head, men and animals stood in +my path; I had to dodge here and there in order to find a way through. + +Suddenly a man placed his arm round my waist, and saying, "You must lie +down, lieutenant," carried me a little distance, and then placed me on +the ground. + +"No, no," I murmured drowsily; "the captain is calling! Don't you hear +the captain calling?" + +"Yes," said he: "the Spaniards have escaped, and the captain has +sounded a halt." + +I did not know then that the man was tricking me for my own good, so I +answered innocently, "Thank goodness! Now we shall have a little rest. +Waken me when they return." + +"Never fear, sir," said he; "I will waken you," and even before he +turned away I had lost all knowledge of the situation. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +HOME AGAIN. + +Several days passed before I could recognize any one or anything, and +then I found myself lying in bed in a strange room, but with Jose +sitting near me. He rubbed his hands together and smiled when my eyes +opened, but he would not talk beyond saying that we were back in Ica. + +I felt weak, but in no pain; and in a day or two was able to dress, and +with Jose's help to go for a stroll in the town. Several acquaintances +congratulated me on my recovery; but not seeing Captain Plaza, I asked +Jose if he had been hurt. + +"Oh no," he answered, with a smile; "the captain is sound in everything +but temper. Santalla spoiled that by getting clear off. You won't +forget that charming little trip in a hurry, Jack!" + +"Oh, it was simply awful! I wouldn't go through it again to be made +commander-in-chief. I wonder it didn't kill me." + +"It did kill some, and knocked you all out except Plaza and the guide. +There was precious little difficulty in finding the route you had +taken. One of the troopers showed me where you were. 'The lieutenant +is a bit light-headed; said he; 'so I put him in a corner out of harm's +way. I told him the captain had stopped the pursuit.'" + +"I remember something about it. I was tired out before my horse got +hit, and the climb up the pass finished me." + +"You weren't the only one to get knocked up. However, the colonel +obtained a light cart, and we brought you all back to Ica." + +"So we had our trouble for nothing?" + +"Not exactly. Santalla escaped, but he left all his stores behind, and +nearly a hundred of his men were captured. Most of them, I think, were +very glad of it. We couldn't get them to keep their eyes open, they +were so sleepy." + +"What did the colonel say?" + +"Oh, he laughed, and chaffed Plaza a bit, but I think he was very well +satisfied. Now we had better turn back." + +I offered no objection, as even the short distance we had walked had +fatigued me wonderfully. By degrees, however, my strength returned, +and at the end of another week I was able to resume my duties. + +The colonel, as usual, was extremely busy, having to keep in order all +the affairs of a huge district. Though my services were very welcome, +he would not let me do too much, saying kindly, "Take it easy, my lad. +One mustn't spur the willing horse. We are not chasing Santalla just +at present." + +"Thank goodness!" I exclaimed. "One can have too much of that sport." +And the colonel indulged in one of his merry laughs. + +The town at this time was very quiet. There were no Spanish troops +within many miles; our own men, through decent food and careful +nursing, were rapidly recovering from the effects of their long forced +marches; and fierce bands of our guerillas guarded the mountain passes. +As far as our particular district was concerned, the war seemed to be +over. + +One night as I sat making a fair copy of a proclamation, the colonel, +looking up suddenly, exclaimed, "Crawford, would you like to go to +Lima?" + +"To Lima, sir?" and I let the pen fall in my eagerness; "why, I'd give +anything to go there!" + +"Well, you can go for nothing, my boy, in a day or two. Of course you +know our friends have been for some time now in possession of the +capital, and that San Martin is Protector of Peru?" + +"Yes, sir, though I think 'tis but an empty title until the Royalists +are thoroughly beaten." + +"All in good time," said he pleasantly. "That will come some day. We +shall be masters of Callao shortly; which will be a great step forward. +I have received news this afternoon which impels me to make the journey +to Lima; so if you think you're strong enough--" + +"I'm sure I am," I cried eagerly. "I haven't an ache or pain in my +whole body now, and--" + +"All right!" interrupted the colonel; "I'll take you. Now finish your +copying, and don't fling the ink all over the place; it's wasteful." + +It was not only wasteful, but it gave me extra work, the copy being so +smeared and blotted that I had to write it again on a fresh sheet. + +"Lima in a day or two!" I said softly to myself as my pen drove along +the paper. The words sounded like sweetest music to me, and I hummed +them to myself over and over again. I pictured the dear old home, the +park, the pony I had ridden so often, the silvery pond, and the boats I +had fashioned to sail on its waters. + +But above and beyond all I saw my mother, with eyes aglint and face +suffused with joy. The vision was so real that I stopped in my writing +to view it more closely. And when the colonel presently gave me leave +for the remainder of the day, I rushed off to find Jose, hardly knowing +whether I ran or flew. + +"What is it, Jack?" he exclaimed. "Has Captain Plaza promised to take +you on another trip?" + +He laughed at his own joke, and I laughed too, being in the humour to +see fun in anything. + +"You aren't far out, Jose," I replied, slapping him on the shoulder out +of pure good humour. "I am going on a trip, but not with Plaza!" + +"Then it must be with the colonel." + +"Right this time. But where are we going, Jose? can you tell me that, +eh? No, you'll never guess, so I will tell you. To _Lima_, my boy! +what do you think of that?" + +"I think that your mother will be very pleased to see you." + +"Fancy seeing her again, Jose, after all these weary months!" + +"She will hardly know you," said he. "You have grown so tall and +strong and manly. You are the image of what your father was at your +age, Jack. Are all the troops to be moved up?" + +"I think not. As far as I know, the colonel's only paying a flying +visit to the capital. Why are you laughing?" + +"Because I'm rather doubtful of that. If Miller goes to Lima, it's a +proof there are hard knocks about. And high time too! According to +the talk, the war should have been done with long ago." + +Next day the colonel made his arrangements, and on the following +morning he set out, leaving Major Videla in charge of the district. +Rather to my surprise, Jose formed one of the party, which consisted +only of us three. + +Under some circumstances the journey would have been tedious; but +Colonel Miller was very agreeable, and told us many interesting stories +of his adventurous career. Thus the time passed pleasantly enough, and +on the evening of September 11, 1821, we arrived in the neighbourhood +of Lima. + +The capital, as I have said, was in possession of the Patriots; but a +Royalist garrison still held Callao, and the Royalist general, +Canterac, with a small army, had just swooped down from the mountains +to help his friends. Our soldiers were chiefly stationed between the +two towns; but the citizens of Lima had armed themselves, and swaggered +about talking of the great deeds they were about to perform. + +The colonel, aware of my anxiety, agreed that I should pay a visit to +my mother at once. + +"I must see General San Martin," said he. "He may give me a post here, +and if so, I will send for you. But you have earned a few days' rest, +and I shall not omit to mention you favourably to the protector." + +As soon as he had gone, Jose and I rode on quickly. My heart beat +fast, and my hands trembled so that I had to use both in holding the +reins. + +"I suppose it is all right, Jose," I remarked as we drew near the +house. "I suppose there is nothing wrong?" + +"No, no," replied he; "why should there be? You are nervous, my boy, +that's all. Cheer up; in a short time you will be in your mother's +arms." + +At the outer gate I drew back, leaving Jose to accost the janitor, who +greeted him heartily. Then in silence we rode through the park to the +courtyard, and in response to our knocking Antonio appeared. + +On seeing me the old man would have screamed with delight, but I +checked him, saying softly, "Hush, Antonio; tell me quickly of your +mistress, my mother. Is she well?" + +"In health, senor, but sad. Ah, the house has been very lonely for +many a long day!" + +"Go you, Jose," said I, "and prepare her." + +"Joy never kills," answered he, laughing; "but perhaps it will be as +well for me to go in first." + +I waited a few moments, and then dismounting, walked softly towards the +entrance. What would she say? what would she do? My heart almost +ceased beating as I stood in the shadow listening. The door was wide +open, and a stream of light came from the spacious hall. + +Suddenly I heard a quick step, and then my mother's voice crying, +"Juan! my Juan! where are you?" And running forward, I threw myself +joyfully into her arms. She kissed me repeatedly, and then hand in +hand we went inside. + +"Mother!" I cried, "mother!" and for a long time that was the only word +spoken. We sat down side by side, and her beautiful eyes, dimmed by +very joy, looked into mine. She pressed my hand, smoothed my cheeks, +and brushed back the hair from my forehead, murmuring softly, "Juan, my +Juan!" + +I think, perhaps, that great happiness, like great grief, kills speech. +At least it was so with us, and we were content to sit there silently +gazing into each loved face. + +At length the good old major-domo, knocking timidly at the door, +announced that supper was served, when my mother with a sigh suffered +me to leave her for a few minutes, in order to make myself more +presentable for the table. + +I would have had Jose sit down with us, but he disappeared, and perhaps +after all it was as well. My mother made only a pretence at eating, +and sat with her eyes fixed on me, as though fearful I should in some +mysterious way suddenly disappear. + +After supper we returned to the drawing-room, where I related my +adventures, telling her the story of the shipwreck, of my rescue and +imprisonment in the fort, of my marvellous escape, and all the various +incidents which had happened since I left home. Of Santiago's +information concerning my father I said nothing, though I longed +greatly to do so. + +"I think General Barejo wished you well," she exclaimed after a pause. +"He is not of our way of thinking, but he has a kind heart, and he was +a true friend to me before these troubles came upon us." + +"Was he ever friendly with father?" I asked. + +"He respected him much, though he thought him greatly mistaken. You +see, their ideas were altogether opposed, but in private life each +esteemed the other." + +Presently, remembering that the Royalists no longer held Lima, I said, +"What has become of little Rosa? I hope our people have not disturbed +her, though it must be lonely for her living in that great house alone. +Could she not have come to you?" + +"There was no need," and my mother's lips curled scornfully; "she is +safe enough with her father." + +"With her father?" I echoed, in astonishment. "How can he take a +delicate child like that into a rough camp?" + +"His house is not a rough camp, Juan!" + +The truth did not strike me at first, so I said innocently, "Oh, has he +been wounded and obtained permission to be nursed at home? Is he +seriously hurt?" + +"He is quite well, I believe, and is one of us." + +"Felipe Montilla turned _Patriot_?" I cried in amazement. + +Now let me not be misunderstood. I honestly believed our cause just. +In my small way I had ventured my life for the independence of Peru, +and was quite ready to venture it again. But this man had boasted his +loyalty to the Spanish king, had fought under his flag, had taken high +rank in his army! He had accepted from him both honours and broad +lands, and then at the first reverse in his fortunes had slunk away +like a whipped cur. + +"A fig for such Patriots!" cried I hotly. "Were I San Martin, he +should be whipped back to the men he has deserted. Give me a loyal +friend or a stout enemy, I care not which; but these _jellyfish_--bah! +they are an abomination." + +"You are young, my boy, and not quite wise enough to understand these +things. Is it not to Don Felipe's credit that he should openly confess +his mistake?" + +"And save his estates into the bargain," said I wrathfully. "Let the +Spaniards get the upper hand, and you will find him back in their ranks +quickly enough." + +"A man must follow the guiding of his conscience, even if it lead to +his advantage," remarked my mother quietly. "But if you are indignant +with Don Felipe, you will be equally delighted with Rosa. She is still +Loyalist to the core, and makes no secret of it. She told San Martin +the other day that he was a busybody, meddling in affairs that did not +concern him, and that the people of Peru could settle their disputes +without his interference." + +"Bravo, Rosa!" I cried, with a laugh; "there is nothing like speaking +one's mind. I'll wager San Martin prefers the girl to her father. +Have you seen the general?" + +"Yes; he paid me a friendly visit on purpose to show his admiration for +your dear father. He is a most remarkable man." + +It was not until the evening drew to a close that my mother spoke of +what lay nearest her heart--our plans for the future. She admitted +with a sigh that I must in honour offer my services to San Martin. I +was still young, but there were many boys fighting in the ranks, and +some had already sacrificed their lives for the cause. + +"It is hard to let you go again," said she, pressing me fondly to her, +"and yet I must. God grant that the war may soon be brought to an end!" + +"Amen to that!" I exclaimed fervently. "Fighting is not to my liking, +but I cannot stand idly by while others risk their lives for my +benefit." + +"No," said my mother, kissing me good-night; "you must do your duty, my +boy. Your father would have wished it." + +A few minutes later I went to my room, and was just closing the door +when Jose appeared. He looked hot and flushed, and I asked where he +had been. + +"To the camp," said he, with a laugh, "to see what's going on. I +thought the colonel must have had some special news. Unless San Martin +holds his hand, the Spaniards are lost. They can't stay at Callao, as +there isn't food even for the garrison; they aren't strong enough to +take Lima: they must retreat or starve." + +"Well?" I exclaimed questioningly. + +"Why, don't you see, directly they begin to retreat we shall crush +them. Already nearly two hundred of their men have deserted." + +"More deserters? Why, we shall soon be able to form a battalion of +turncoats for Don Felipe to lead!" + +It was now Jose's turn to look astonished, and his expression of +amazement was so ludicrous that I laughed outright. + +"What a poltroon!" he cried contemptuously. "But I'll see you get no +harm by this right-about face. He is mistaken if he thinks his +treachery will give him a hold on your estates." + +"A hold on my estates, Jose? What do you mean?" + +"Oh," said he, "I have not cared to speak of it, but I must now." And +he proceeded to inform me that all my father's property had passed into +the possession of Don Felipe Montilla. + +"But," I exclaimed, striving to appear calm, "that will be set aside +now. San Martin will never allow our property to be confiscated +because my father died for the Patriot cause." + +"Montilla is a fox, Jack, and has made a good bargain for himself, no +doubt. I expect he obtained the general's written promise to confirm +him in all his estates. And if so," he concluded gloomily, "yours form +part of them." + +"He shall not keep them," I cried angrily, "whatever San Martin has +promised!" + +"No; but we must not quarrel openly until the Spaniards are done with. +Montilla has influence, and no doubt San Martin finds him useful. But +don't take it to heart, Jack; we will defeat him in the end." + +"If we don't," said I grimly, "it will be because the son has followed +the father. And that reminds me, do you think Montilla knows what +actually happened to my father? It always seemed strange to me that +Rosa should learn of that affair so quickly." + +"You don't suspect--" + +"That he had a hand in his death? No, hardly that, though he is +mean-spirited enough for it. But it struck me that, being high in the +viceroy's favour, he probably knew what was going on." + +"That is possible at least." + +"Probable, I should say. However, to-morrow I intend putting the +question to him." + +"Do you mean that you are going to interview him on the subject?" + +"Why not? There can be no harm in asking a straightforward question." + +"Mind you don't lose your temper, my boy. It's dangerous work rousing +a venomous snake until its poison bag is extracted." + +"Never fear, Jose. I have learned how to take care of myself during +the last few months. Thanks to you and the colonel, I have done some +hard practising. And now turn in. It will seem strange to sleep in +one's own bed again, won't it?" + +"Make the most of it," advised he laughingly. "It may be a long time +before you have another chance." + +I felt very tired, and yet it was long before I fell asleep. I was +angry at Montilla's double-dealing, sorry for Rosa, my old playmate, +and agitated by a thousand vague doubts and suspicions. + +In the morning I rose very little refreshed, had a simple breakfast in +my room, and went to find Jose. He had already returned from an early +visit to the camp, and brought word that matters were still in the same +state. The Spaniards remained sheltered under the guns of the +fortress, and San Martin, knowing their provisions were almost +exhausted, would not attack. + +Presently we were joined by my mother, who made Jose happy by praising +him for his care of me. Then we took a stroll round the grounds, +looked in at my workshop, where my half-painted boat still lay, and +paid a visit to the lake. + +After a while I asked Jose to have my horse saddled, saying, "Excuse +me, mother, for a short time, please. You know the colonel may send +for me at any moment, and I should like to see Rosa once more." + +This was only partly the truth, but I could not speak of my principal +motive, for as yet, acting under Jose's advice, I had made no mention +of Santiago's queer story. It would have been cruel to raise hopes +that might have no actual foundation. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +FRIEND OR FOE! + +I have before said that Don Felipe was our nearest neighbour; the +grounds of his house, indeed, joined our own, and I might easily have +gone there on foot. Perhaps it was a touch of pride which induced me +to go on horseback, as I was a good rider, and young enough to feel a +certain satisfaction in my appearance. + +I had grown beyond the recollection of the gatekeeper, who admitted me +to the courtyard with a show of deference, saying that both his master +and young mistress were at home. Rosa's mother had been dead for some +years. + +Don Felipe had numerous servants, and to one of them I threw the reins, +telling him to mind my horse. Then going to the door, I inquired for +Don Felipe. + +The major-domo was showing me to a small room, when a girl, merrily +humming a popular Royalist song, came tripping along the corridor. +Suddenly she stopped, looked hard at me, and then came forward again, +saying, "Juan! Surely you are Juan Crawford?" + +I have sometimes laughed since at my stupidity, yet there might be +found some excuse for it. During my absence from Lima I had often +thought of my little playmate, but it had never occurred to me that +time would change her as well as myself. And now, instead of the merry +child with whom I had romped and played, there appeared a beautiful +girl at whom I gazed in wonder. + +"Are you not Juan Crawford?" she asked again, speaking softly. + +"Yes," said I, "I am Juan; but you, senorita?" + +Her face rippled with merry laughter; but pouting her lips, she said,-- + +"What a poor compliment to your old friend, Juan! Surely you have not +forgotten Rosa!" + +"Nay, that have I not; I have forgotten nothing. But you are so +changed, Rosa--so different!" + +"So are you; but I knew you at once. When did you come home? Have you +come to see me?" + +"Yes, and your father as well. I have some business with him." + +"Oh!" cried she, tossing her head and frowning, "of course you and he +are on the same side. My father is a Patriot now, and cries, 'Down +with the king!' I suppose your meddlesome general has sent you with a +message." + +I did not undeceive her; and while the servant carried my name to his +master, we entered one of the rooms and continued our conversation. I +saw she was troubled; yet with great skill and grace she put me at +ease, and led me to talk of what had happened during the last two years. + +"What a fire-eater you are, Juan!" she cried banteringly. "I am quite +afraid of you. But what a fine sword you have! Ah, if I were only a +boy! Can you guess what I would do?" + +"No," I replied, with a shake of the head. "No one can guess what a +girl will do." + +"But I said a boy." + +"Ah! that would be altogether different." + +"I will tell you then," she said, standing up and speaking very +earnestly. "I would get a sword and pistols and join the king's +friends. I would be a loyal Spanish cavalier, Juan, if I were the only +one in Peru!" + +"Then it is lucky you are a girl, Rosa, or you would soon be killed. I +would not harm the king, even if he were here instead of being in +Spain, thousands of miles away; but I have no love for those who rule +in his name." + +"No," said she, casting down her eyes, and I thought her voice sounded +sad; "you have suffered at their hands. But it is not the king's +fault, Juan; he would have seen you righted." + +"It is a long way from Peru to Spain," said I, trying to speak +carelessly, "and it seems as if in these days one must right one's own +wrongs." + +After that we sat speaking very little, each afraid lest the talk +should drift into an awkward channel, for I felt sure that she knew how +her father had robbed us of our estates. + +On the return of the servant she whispered earnestly, "My father has +changed greatly. I am sure he is unhappy. If he should appear cross +and irritable, you will bear with him, won't you, Juan?" + +"I will do my best, Rosa. But why should he be angry with me? I am +only going to ask him a question." + +Don Felipe was truly much altered. His dark hair was plentifully +sprinkled with silver; there were deep lines in his forehead and around +his lips; his eyes had become shifty, and there was a look of cunning +in them. He gave me just one swift, searching glance, and then looked +away. It was an awkward meeting, and I hardly knew what to say. +Fortunately Don Felipe took the lead. + +"You have grown almost out of knowledge, my young friend; and I notice +you have obtained military rank," said he, with a covert sneer. + +"I have the honour to be a lieutenant in the army to which we both +belong, senor," I replied. + +He winced at that, and his eyes glowed angrily. + +"If you have brought me a message from your general," said he, "will +you at once deliver it? I am very busy just now." + +"I will not take up more than five minutes of your valuable time, +senor. My errand is an important one, though _at present_ it has +nothing to do with General San Martin." + +Again he glanced at me sharply, and I thought he seemed slightly +nervous. + +"I must ask you to be quick with it," he said coldly. + +"I only desire to ask you about the death of my father. I am sure you +will give me all the information in your power, as he died for the +independence of Peru, which to-day both you and I are trying to secure." + +At that he started up, his eyes blazing, his hand on his sword. + +"Do you think I killed your father?" he roared furiously. "He died +through his own fault. I warned him again and again that the time was +not ripe, but he paid no heed to me." + +"Are you not mistaken?" I asked. "According to the Indians' account, +he was slain while trying to prevent them from rising." + +"Then the government was deceived. No good can be done by digging up +the dead past, but you shall hear all that I know of the story. At +that time there were three parties in the country. One section, led by +your father, resolved upon armed insurrection; another, composed of +Royalists, determined that nothing should be changed; the third, to +which I belonged, endeavoured to obtain reform by moderate means. I +need not say that your father was a marked man. One day the viceroy +received word that he had started for the mountains in order to rouse +the Indians to revolt, and, to prevent mischief, it was arranged that +he should be placed in prison. As you may know, he refused to submit +quietly, and, unfortunately, was shot in the fight which ensued." + +"Was his body brought back to Lima?" + +"I never heard so. Most probably it was left on the mountains. I was +sorry for him; but he was a headstrong man, and would not listen to +reason." + +"That was foolish of him," I remarked quietly. "Had he waited till the +proper time to declare his real opinions, he would not have lost his +life, nor my mother her property. It is possible, indeed, that our +estates would have been largely added to." + +"The estates were confiscated, it is true," said Don Felipe slowly, +"but they fell into friendly hands." Then, in quite a kindly tone, he +added, "You feel bitter against me, Juan--I see it in your face. +Perhaps it is natural; yet you really have no reason to do so. I must +not say more now, but all will come right in the end." + +"So I intend," said I stoutly, yet feeling rather mystified. + +The man's sudden change of manner puzzled me. After all, I was only a +boy, with little ability and no training to seek for things lying +beneath the surface. And Montilla seeing the state of my mind, played +upon it with consummate skill. + +I cannot truthfully say that he made any definite promise, but this was +the impression I received:--Knowing that all my father's property was +forfeit to the law, he had exerted his influence to secure it. At that +time he thought the trouble would be settled without fighting, and +intended in a year or two to restore the estates. When the war broke +out, he endeavoured to bring the viceroy over to the cause of reform, +but finding that impossible, was compelled reluctantly to join the +Patriots. Of course, in the matter of the estates, nothing could be +done now till the war was over. + +"Thus," said he cheerfully, "the future is safe. If the Patriots win, +we can have the confiscation revoked; while, on the other hand, I count +so many friends among the moderate Royalists that the viceroy would +hardly care to thwart me." + +"In any case," said I bluntly, though with no wish to vex him, "the +Indians will see that I am not wronged!" + +"Trust me," he answered, his voice sounding now like the purring of a +cat; "Felipe Montilla never makes mistakes." + +I had a stinging reply on my lips, but refraining from giving it +utterance, I bade him farewell. + +"Come again, Juan," said he, "if the general can spare you!" And +though not overburdened with wits, I had a sense of being laughed at. + +I was joined in the corridor by Rosa, who wanted to know why I was +going so soon. + +"I really must," I answered, smiling. "I have spent no time with my +mother yet, and I may be sent for at any moment." + +"But this will not be _good-bye_?" + +"On the contrary, I hope to see you often. Your father has given me +the kindest of invitations." + +At this she opened her eyes wide; but quickly recovering herself, she +smiled pleasantly, and accompanied me to the hall. As I rode by, she +was standing at a window waving her hand. + +I had much to think of during the short ride home, but I got little +satisfaction from my thoughts. Nothing had been gained by my visit to +Montilla, and his story only went to confirm the truth of the reports +of my father's death. As to my faith in his startling promises, it +grew weaker with every step my horse took. + +I said nothing to my mother; but Jose, to whom I related all that had +passed, laughed loudly. + +"The cunning old fox!" cried he; "he hasn't his equal for craft in +Peru! You will see that, whoever sinks, Don Felipe Montilla will swim." + +"Not at my expense," I exclaimed, "while I have strength to raise an +arm." + +The rest of that day I spent with my mother, forcing myself to forget +that any trouble existed in the world. It was only a brief spell of +happiness, but we enjoyed every second of it, and by nightfall my +mother's face had lost some of its sadness, and her eyes shone brightly +as in the olden days. + +Early next morning an order was brought to me to rejoin Colonel Miller, +as it was arranged that, for a time at least, Jose should remain behind +to look after the affairs of the hacienda. The servants assembled in +the courtyard to see me off, and my mother came to the hall door. +There she embraced me, and stood smiling bravely as I mounted. +Whatever sorrow she felt was locked up tightly in her own breast. + +Accompanied by the man who had brought the order, I rode briskly to +Mirones, the headquarters of the Patriot army, and about a mile from +Callao. + +The colonel was with San Martin and a group of officers, watching the +enemy's movements; but he turned to me at once, saying, "General, this +is Lieutenant Crawford, of whom I spoke." + +San Martin, the Protector of Peru, was a tall man with black hair, +bushy whiskers, and a deep olive complexion. He had black, piercing +eyes, fringed by long lashes and overhung by heavy brows and a high, +straight forehead. He was strong and muscular, with an erect, military +carriage. He looked every inch a soldier, and one, moreover, with an +iron will that nothing could bend. His voice was harsh and unmusical, +but he spoke in a kindly, simple, and unaffected manner. + +"Colonel Miller has told me many things of you, lieutenant," said he, +"and all to your credit. I am glad to know that the son of Don Eduardo +Crawford is following so well in his father's steps." + +"Thank you, general," I replied, bowing low. + +"I understand," he continued, "that Colonel Miller wishes to keep you +with him. It is certainly an honourable post; but I fancy you are +likely to get many hard knocks," he concluded, with a laugh. + +"He has had a strong taste of the service, general," observed Miller, +with a merry smile.--"Are you willing to stay with me, Crawford?" + +"Yes, certainly, sir, with the general's permission." + +"Very well," said San Martin. "And, by the way, colonel, let him have +on hour's sleep now and again,"--a little joke at which the group of +officers, knowing the Englishman's habits, laughed heartily. + +The general presently rode off to his quarters, the officers went to +their several duties, and I accompanied Colonel Miller to that part of +the field in which his men were stationed. He had been appointed to +the command of a column seven hundred strong, which was held in +readiness to move at any moment. The officers were unknown to me, but +they seemed pleasant, genial fellows, and in a short time I felt quite +at home with them. The younger ones were grumbling because San Martin +did not at once attack the enemy, saying that Canterac would slip away +to the mountains in the night. + +"Then his army will break up of its own accord," remarked a grizzled +major. "He can't take his guns, and his troops are starving. Hundreds +will throw down their weapons on finding us close at their heels." + +"Better have a straight fight and have done with it," grumbled a +youngster. "There's no fun playing at hide-and-seek in the hills." + +"Should you live to be a man," said the major reprovingly, "you won't +talk in such a light-hearted way of a battle." And the boy's face +flushed at the laugh which greeted the remark. + +"Don't be too sarcastic, Gamarra," cried another. "The youngster's +right in the main. If Canterac escapes, the war may drag on for +months, and will cost thousands of lives. The mountains will kill more +than a pitched battle would." + +"Canterac can't escape if we follow him up properly," said the major, +"and Colonel Miller seems the man to do that." + +"That is so; but he can't move without orders; and there's more than +one man in high places who will prefer Lima to a pursuit." + +Thus they talked during the afternoon, and early in the evening Colonel +Miller ordered that every one not on duty should turn in at once; which +we took to be a sign that something was going to happen shortly. + +At ten o'clock the column was roused. The men assembled silently, and +a whisper went round that Canterac had begun his retreat. For more +than an hour we awaited fresh orders, the colonel on horseback fuming +impatiently, until at last the word came to march. + +"An hour thrown away," muttered the colonel angrily. "Canterac will +laugh in our faces." + +To our disgust, we found that the column was attached to the main army, +and that we had to move step by step to the will of the chief. I knew +very little about military tactics, but it was a strange kind of +pursuit, and made me think of a tortoise chasing a hare. + +"I wonder what Captain Plaza would think of this performance?" said the +colonel, rather bitterly, as we jogged along. "This isn't the way he +took you after Santalla, eh?" + +"Indeed no, colonel!" I replied, laughing. "The captain would have had +us on the other side of Lima by now." + +"It's like a funeral procession," he muttered impatiently; "and if they +don't mind, 'twill be a funeral procession in reality. We shall be +burying the independence of Peru." + +The ridiculous part of it was that our column had been formed of all +the light companies on purpose to swoop down on the foe. As far as I +could judge, the swoop was much like that of a hawk whose wings had +been carefully tied to its body. + +However, we tramped along throughout the night, halting at daybreak +without getting a glimpse of the exulting Canterac. + +"Never mind," exclaimed the colonel, who hated to look on the dark side +of things; "we may catch them during the day." + +In this he was disappointed, as we proceeded in the same leisurely +manner, just as if we were out for a quiet stroll on a summer's day. +Several times Miller rode off to the staff, but on each occasion he +returned looking more dissatisfied than before. + +The men wondered, and at each halt the officers talked pretty freely +among themselves, giving their opinions with refreshing vigour. + +"Canterac has the start of us now," said one, "and we shall never +overtake him. We had the game in our hands, and have simply thrown it +away." + +The grizzled major remained optimistic, saying, "You may depend that +San Martin has some scheme in his head." But the rest of us were +doubtful. + +"If I had an enemy in a trap, my scheme would be to keep him there and +not to let him walk out through an open door," laughed a young captain. +"The war might have been finished to-day; now it's likely to go on for +another twelvemonth." + +"Well," remarked one of his comrades, "it's a comfort to think we +shan't kill ourselves through over-exertion." + +By degrees we pushed on to a place about nine leagues east of Lima, +where it seemed as if the lumbering machine had broken down altogether. +It was evening when we arrived and halted; the men ate the last morsel +of their scanty rations; the chief officers, though no one could +imagine what they found to discuss, held a conference, and presently it +leaked out that the pursuit had been abandoned. + +"I don't profess to understand it," exclaimed Major Gamarra, "but you +will find that there's some grand scheme in the air." + +"Ah!" interrupted another officer, in a sarcastic tone, "and no doubt +it will stay there; most of these precious schemes do. What I should +like to see would be a little common sense." + +"Would you recognize it if you saw it?" put in the major quick as +lightning; and all the others laughed. + +"Perhaps not. I've had little opportunity of renewing my acquaintance +with it since San Martin came to Peru." + +This was a dangerous remark, as we were a very mixed crowd. Some had +come from Buenos Ayres with San Martin; others were Chilians who had +fought with him throughout the Chilian War; several, like myself, were +natives of Peru; while two or three were Englishmen. + +Fortunately, before the dispute had had time to become hot, the colonel +returned from the conference, and joined us at the fire. + +"I don't know, gentlemen, that anything is likely to happen," said he; +"but we may as well enjoy a night's rest while we can," and wrapping +his cloak around him, he lay down, setting an example which most of us +followed. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +WE CATCH A TARTAR. + +When I awoke at six o'clock in the morning, most of the officers and +men were still sleeping, but the colonel had disappeared. There was +nothing to be done beyond feeding and grooming my horse, which I always +made a point of doing myself. As to my own breakfast, my haversack was +empty, and I think there was hardly a pound of meat to be found among +the whole column. + +After a short time the men were roused, and just after seven o'clock we +saw the colonel come tearing along on horseback, as if pursued by a +cavalry division. Evidently he was in a great hurry, and his face was +wreathed in smiles. + +"Good-morning, gentlemen," he cried. "You will be glad to hear my +news: we move in an hour's time. The general has only a scanty stock +of provisions, but there is sufficient to provide your men with +breakfast.--Crawford, hunt up Lieutenant-Colonel O'Brien, and ask him +to come to me at once." + +O'Brien was a famous Irishman who had served with San Martin all +through the Chilian War. He was a fine fellow, standing six feet six +inches high, and well proportioned. Every one loved him for his +winning ways, his ready smile, his perfect honesty, and his absolute +fearlessness. + +"Colonel Miller?" said he, on hearing my message. "Faith, I'll come +instantly." And we rode back together. + +"You're prompt, O'Brien," exclaimed the colonel, laughing; "Have you +had enough of this slow-time business?" + +"More than enough, colonel. What are your fellows looking so pleased +about?" + +"First, the prospect of a breakfast; and then--" + +"You've badgered the general into giving you a free hand!" + +"Not quite that; but I have permission to push on. I fear it's too +late. Canterac is a fine soldier, and will be ready for us now; but I +am going to see if he has left any weak places. Would you care to come +with me?" + +"You're just a jewel, colonel," exclaimed the big Irishman +enthusiastically, "and I'm eternally devoted to you. When do we start?" + +"Directly after breakfast. Will you take some with me?" + +"That will I, colonel, and I'm as charmed with the second invitation as +the first. I dined with the general the day we left Mirones, and +haven't had a decent meal since." + +The colonel laughed, saying, "I'm afraid I can't say much for the +quality of our food." + +"Never mind the quality, colonel; I think more of quantity just at +present." + +"Well, that's on a par with the quality." + +This did not sound very promising; but we managed to satisfy our +hunger, and the men, having eaten their scanty rations, were drawn up +ready for the start. At nine o'clock we left the camp, and a rapid +march brought us to the village of Macas, which the enemy had just +abandoned. Here, to our great delight, we discovered a number of sheep +dressed and ready for cooking; so, for once in a way, we enjoyed a +really good meal, while cracking many jokes at the Spaniards' expense. +Then having rested, we pushed on to the foot of the mountains, where +the men bivouacked, being too tired to drag themselves any further. + +I was just preparing to off-saddle when the colonel said, "Crawford, if +you aren't too tired, you can come with me. I am going just a little +way up the mountain." + +"Very good, sir," I answered, climbing into the saddle again, but +wishing that he had taken it into his head to sleep instead. + +"I should like to find out where Canterac is. He is quite clever +enough to set a very ugly trap for us." + +It was dark now, and the road was difficult; but we rode cautiously, +listening for sounds, and keeping our eyes well open. At the end of +perhaps half a mile the colonel suddenly stopped, and said in a +whisper, "Some one is coming towards us." + +The position was very awkward. We were on a narrow road with no +hiding-place at hand, and must either retreat rapidly or plump +ourselves right into the arms of the strangers. In another minute we +had no choice at all, as several dusky figures loomed up before us. +Fortunately Colonel Miller favoured the practice of taking the bull by +the horns, and levelling his pistol, he cried in a stern voice, "Halt! +Who are you?" + +Taken by surprise, the men stopped, and we heard one of them say, "No, +no; he's no Spaniard. I can tell by his speech." + +"Quite right," cried the colonel. "I'm an English officer in the +Patriot army. Who are you? Make haste; we don't want to stay here all +night." + +"We're deserters from General Canterac's army," replied one boldly, +"and want to give ourselves up." + +"Then you're just right. We will return with you to the camp, or the +sentries might shoot you.--Crawford, turn your horse round so that they +can pass between us.--Now, my good fellows, march, and I hope for your +own sakes that you've given a true account of yourselves." + +Thus we journeyed back to the camp, where, beside a good fire, Colonel +Miller examined the prisoners. From them we learned that General +Canterac had halted in a strong position halfway up the mountain; upon +which I could see, by his restlessness, that the colonel was eager to +resume the pursuit at once. A glance at his wearied men, however, +showed him the folly of such an enterprise. + +"No," said he at last; "they couldn't stand it." Which was quite true. + +Having given the strangers into the charge of the guard, we unsaddled +our horses, wrapped ourselves up, and lay down near the fire. Two +seconds later we were fast asleep. At daybreak we were moving again, +and I fancy the colonel felt glad he had not attempted to lead his men +up the mountains in the darkness of night. The road was simply +horrible, and the pass might have been defended by a score of resolute +men against an army. Halfway up we received a check. O'Brien, going +forward with a handful of men, got in touch with the enemy, who +immediately turned about and threatened to overwhelm us by a sudden +attack. + +Under some leaders we should most certainly have come to grief; but the +colonel's cheery, smiling face kept the men at their posts. Drawing +them up in a strong position, he awaited the attack calmly. + +"If you try to run away, my lads," he said pleasantly, "the Spaniards +will make mincemeat of you; so it is wisest to stand firm." + +We watched three battalions come down from the height and halt just +beyond musket-range. + +"I don't believe they're going to attack, after all!" exclaimed O'Brien +excitedly. + +"Not until we move," answered the colonel, "and then they'll fall on us +tooth and nail. I expect they are just gaining time while the main +body gets away. It's aggravating, too, because they have the whip hand +of us. We aren't strong enough to turn them out." + +O'Brien shook his head, saying, "If the provisions would last, we might +stand here staring at each other till doomsday." + +Darkness found the position unchanged, while numerous watch-fires +gleamed fitfully through the gloom. + +"I wonder," said the colonel thoughtfully, "if Canterac intends keeping +his men there all night? Those fires may be just a blind; he's quite +equal to a dodge of that sort." + +"Let me find out," said O'Brien.--"Crawford, do you feel in trim for a +stroll?" + +"Oh, thanks! it's very kind of you to think of me." + +"Don't mention it, my dear fellow! It's a weakness of mine to remember +my friends.--We'll be back in an hour, colonel.--Take off your sword, +Crawford; we must trust to our pistols. Are you ready? Come along, +then." + +Passing our outposts, we began to climb warily, keeping a keen lookout, +and taking care to make no unnecessary noise. It was possible--indeed +I thought probable--that we should meet the enemy stealing down to +surprise our camp by a night attack. However, we kept steadily on our +way, and had nearly reached the outer ring of fires, when, clutching +O'Brien by the arm, I dragged him bodily to the ground. + +"What's the matter?" he asked quietly. + +"A sentry! Listen! He's talking to some one." + +We lay quite still, trying to hear what was said; but in this we were +disappointed, and presently the two men separated, each walking slowly +in opposite directions. + +"Now's our chance!" whispered O'Brien; and crawling on hands and knees, +we passed quietly between the two. Several yards away was a big fire, +and a number of men had gathered round it, where they could easily be +seen. + +"Then they haven't bolted, after all!" said O'Brien, in surprise. + +"It doesn't look like it; but don't let us be too sure. You stay in +this hollow while I investigate. You are not a good performer on +all-fours." + +"No," said he, chuckling, and I was afraid that, in spite of our +danger, he would laugh aloud; "this is a sort of circus trick not +taught at our school. Can you judge where to find me again?" + +"Easily, if they don't let the fires out;" and I crawled further into +the camp, and in the direction of a second fire. It looked very +comfortable, but no one was there to take advantage of it, and the +third and fourth I visited were equally deserted. + +The trick was plain enough now. After lighting the fires, the three +battalions had marched off, leaving just sufficient men to tend them, +and to act as sentries. The sight of a soldier crossing the camp to +throw fresh fuel on one of the fires changed suspicion into certainty, +and I hastened back to O'Brien with my information. + +"That's an old dodge," said he, "but a good one. It almost always pays +in this part of the world. Now let us get back and tell the colonel." + +Cautiously we crawled back, waited nearly an hour for a favourable +chance to dodge the sentries, and then hurried down the pass. + +"Thanks," exclaimed the colonel, on hearing our report. "We can afford +now to let the men have a couple of hours' sleep; they need it." + +"And I daresay some of the officers will lie down, if you press them," +laughed O'Brien.--"What do you say, Crawford?" + +"Well, the colonel need not press me much," I replied. + +"Good boy! I'm pleased you're so willing to do as you're told." + +"Well, he has certainly earned a rest," observed Miller. "But we are +moving sharp at daybreak, remember." + +"There's nothing strange in that," said I sleepily; "the wonder would +be if we didn't." At which the colonel and O'Brien laughed heartily. + +Next day we marched into the village of Puruchuco, on the eastern side +of the mountain, and about six miles distant from the small town of +Huamantanga, where the Royalists had halted. Owing to the difficulty +of obtaining food, Colonel Miller now sent most of our infantry back to +Macas; the Indians were thrown forward to act as a screen in front; +while the rest of us bivouacked in some meadows near the village. The +next day the colonel and I rode to within five hundred yards of +Huamantanga, where we saw the enemy formed up in marching order. + +"What restless fellows they are!" I exclaimed laughingly; "they're on +the move again!" + +"Yes; but this time, unless I'm much mistaken, they are moving +backwards. Ride round to the right, warn the Indians to be ready for +an attack, and rejoin me at Puruchuco." + +I had barely reached the village when the colonel's suspicions were +verified. Two thousand of the enemy, all picked men, as we afterwards +discovered, rapidly descended the heights, drove the Indians back by +sheer strength of numbers, and at last sent them flying pell-mell to +seek safety in some of the numerous ravines. We had barely three +hundred regular soldiers, many of whom were young boys, and scarcely +one had ever smelt powder in a real fight. But Miller was a host in +himself, and though the odds were so desperate, I did not despair of +victory. + +O'Brien, with a picked detachment of infantry, occupied a strong +position, and began firing as soon as the assailants came within range. +The cavalry and the remainder of the infantry were posted lower down +the mountain side. + +"Aim low, lads," said the colonel, "and don't waste your ammunition. +If they reach you, give them a taste of the steel." + +The flight of the Indians left us a great deal exposed, and in danger +of being surrounded; but O'Brien had placed his men on a rocky +platform, from which they kept one detachment in check. Meanwhile, in +our own quarter the fight raged furiously. A large body of Spaniards, +slipping past O'Brien, came on again and again. We beat them back, but +they gave us no rest. Our men began to fall, and once I saw a shade of +anxiety flit across the colonel's face. It was gone in less than a +second, but it confirmed my opinion that we could not hold our ground. + +For the most part, we contented ourselves with repelling the enemy's +attacks; but twice our leader flung himself against their dragoons at +the head of his cavalry. We broke them easily, but could not pursue, +and the experiment cost us a dozen in killed and wounded. + +"This won't do," said he. "They will eat us up.--Crawford, tell +O'Brien to retire on us slowly. I intend to retreat.--Captain Prieto, +get your men posted in that ravine to the left, and hold it until you +are told to withdraw." + +I did not hear the captain's reply, being on my way to deliver the +colonel's order. I had left my horse behind, but even so, the journey +was distinctly unpleasant, as my body was a prominent target for dozens +of muskets. + +"Warm work, Crawford!" exclaimed O'Brien. "I think the colonel is +right. We've caught a tartar this time, and no mistake.--Steady, my +lads! we'll make them fight for every yard." + +I stayed with the detachment, helping to carry a wounded man. The +cheering Spaniards pressed us closely; if they could break through our +cordon, Miller's men were doomed. But we returned shot for shot, and +stopped their occasional rushes by steel. Every moment of delay gave +our brave fellows further down the pass a better chance of escape. + +"Well done, O'Brien!" cried the colonel, as we joined him where he +stood with a few horsemen.--"Steady, my lads! Captain Prieto holds the +pass. Don't lose your heads, and we shall come out all right." + +At the ravine the horsemen halted, while the infantry continued the +retreat; first O'Brien's men, and afterwards those who had held the +pass under Captain Prieto. This was the fiercest part of the struggle. +The fighting was at hand-grips now, and I wondered we were not swept +away headlong. + +"Stand firm, my lads, stand firm; it's your only chance!" sang out +Miller cheerfully, and his eyes brightened with the passing minutes, as +he knew that the bulk of his command was rapidly getting out of danger. + +For half an hour we held the narrow way with sword and pistol, and then +a body of Spaniards, who unseen by us had worked round to the right, +appeared lower down the pass. + +"We must cut our way through, and at once!" cried our leader. "About +face, lads, and into them. Ride hard, and strike hard." + +We were in a trap now, and the only way to get out was by smashing the +door. The colonel led, the troopers followed as best they could, while +O'Brien and I remained in the rear to help to check the rush of the +enemy's main body. There was a flash of swords, the sound of +pistol-shots, an outburst of mocking laughter from the enemy, a "Viva!" +from our own men, a vigorous "Hurrah!" from the colonel, and then we +were through! + +"Go on, my lads!" cried the colonel, dropping to the rear. "Your +comrades are at the foot of the mountain.--A narrow shave, O'Brien!" + +"Yes! and we aren't clear yet," replied the Irishman, turning in his +saddle to glance behind. "There would be more chance for us if we +could bring down that tall fellow who is leading." + +Whiz! whiz! The bullets were buzzing about our ears now, too close to +be comfortable, and but for our horses, we must soon have been killed +or captured. At any other time I would not have ridden down that +mountain side at a foot pace. It was a succession of steep descents, +which made one dizzy to look at; and how my animal managed to keep its +feet I could not understand. + +"Push on!" cried the colonel suddenly, "and tell Prieto to line the +mouth of the pass, in case these fellows chase us all the way." + +He and O'Brien had stopped, intending to try the effect of a shot or +two, and in another minute I was out of sight. Fifty yards further +down the road forked, and fancying the branch to the right looked the +easier, I turned into it. + +"It may take a little longer to reach the bottom," I thought, "but it's +a far less dangerous way. I wonder if the others will think to turn +down here." + +It often happens that we come to grief when feeling most secure, and it +was so with me now. I was riding at a swift gallop, and perhaps with +less care than was necessary, when all at once my horse stumbled, +failed to recover itself, and fell heavily. Fortunately it lay still, +and I was able to drag myself free, feeling dazed and bewildered. Here +was a pretty pickle! What could I do? In any case the colonel would +reach the bottom first, and the retreat would be continued without me. + +Getting up, I tried to help the animal to its feet; but the poor thing +either could not or would not move. It was clear that I must leave it, +and though hating to do so, I walked a few paces down the narrow path. +The fall had shaken me considerably. My head ached, and I had much ado +to grope my way along. Three several times in the course of a short +distance I stumbled, and the third time fell heavily to the ground, +twisting my left foot underneath me. I tried to rise, but could not. +Now, what should I do? I dared not call for help, lest the Spaniards +should hear me. For two hours I lay thus, wondering what would become +of me. The noise of the shouting and firing had now died away; the +enemy had probably returned to their stronghold. Not a sound broke the +stillness, and the gloom of evening began to envelop the path. + +It was now only that I realized fully my frightful danger. Unless some +one passed that way by accident, I should die of hunger and exposure! +The idea nerved me to a fresh effort. Rising painfully, and steadying +myself here and there by the rocks, I limped a short distance, though +every step wrung from me a cry of agony. Several times I stopped to +rest, and to wipe the sweat from my brow; twice in less than five +minutes I was obliged to sit down, and at last the pain in my foot +became so excruciating that I could struggle no further. + +"It's no good!" I exclaimed; "I must stay here till the morning, at +least." And finding a kind of recess in the rocks, I crept in. Then +it occurred to me to take off my boot; so opening my knife, I hacked at +the leather till I succeeded in getting my foot free. + +This, after the first sudden rush of pain, was a great comfort. I felt +easier and brighter, and lay down to sleep in a happier frame of mind, +intending to make a fresh start as soon as daylight appeared. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +GLORIOUS NEWS. + +Many times during the night the pain and the cold wakened me; but I +contrived to get some sleep, for which I fell much better in the +morning. To my dismay, however, I found it impossible to walk; my +ankle had swollen considerably, and the pain of putting my foot to the +ground made me cry out in anguish. + +Yet, unless I wished to starve, something I must do. Unbuckling my +sword, and hiding it in the recess, I began to crawl along, trailing my +injured foot carefully. It was slow work, and I felt faint and dizzy, +not only from my hurts, but also from want of food. + +Feeling sure that the Spaniards had by this time retired, I ventured to +call for help, though little expecting to obtain it. I cried aloud, +both in Spanish and in the native patois, but received no answer. +Again I crawled on, but now even move slowly than at first; and when I +again tried to shout, my voice seemed weak and quavering. My strength +was nearly exhausted, when suddenly, and rather to my astonishment, I +caught sight of a man peering at me curiously from behind a rock. He +was evidently a Spaniard, and an ugly customer. He wore a long beard, +a half-healed scar disfigured one side of his face, and on his head was +jauntily set a small cap decked with gay-coloured ribbons. On his +coming forward I saw that he was dressed in the most grotesque manner, +and heavily armed. + +"By St. Philip," I muttered softly, "I should have done better to give +myself up to the soldiers! Surely this fellow is the prince of +ruffians." + +He stood a moment, leaning on his gun and regarding me with curiosity. + +"I don't know who you are," said I irritably, "but if you have a spark +of human sympathy, you will give me what help you can." + +"Are you hurt?" he asked; and the cool tone in which he spoke made me +angry beyond measure. + +Then he drew a step nearer, saying, "Perhaps the senor will give me his +pistols; the mountain air makes one suspicious." + +"Take them," I cried, "and anything else you desire; but get me some +food and drink, and I will pay you well." + +"Ah," exclaimed the fellow, with renewed interest, "the senor has money +on him! I had better mind that also. There are lawless people in the +mountains," and he grinned knowingly at me. + +"I have no money here," I answered, "but I will pay you well to get me +carried to Lima." + +"That is a long way," he observed cautiously. "No doubt the senor has +rings or some articles of jewellery?" + +"I don't possess a single valuable except this," said I, producing the +silver key, "and that I must not part with." + +On seeing the key the fellow's manner changed instantly. + +"How did you get that?" he asked. "Are you one of us?" + +The question could hardly be considered a compliment, but it assured me +both of safety and of good treatment. + +"If you belong to the Order of the Silver Key," I remarked, "and +recognize the authority of Raymon Sorillo, all is well. He is my +friend, and will give me shelter." + +"The chief is in the mountains, senor, and not far off. I will get +help, and take you to him. Meanwhile, eat a little coca; it will keep +up your strength. I shall not be long gone." + +"Thanks," said I, taking some of the coca, and chuckling to myself at +this unexpected stroke of good fortune. + +The fellow was as good as his word. He returned shortly with three +Indians, armed like himself, and dressed in the same grotesque way. +They were all sturdy fellows, and two of them, raising me gently from +the ground, carried me in their arms with the greatest ease. + +Every step took me farther from the main track, and into a wilder part +of the mountains, till at last my bearers stopped in a romantic ravine. +There were several huts dotted about in an irregular ring, but most of +the men were in the open, seated round a blazing fire. + +Three-fourths of the band were pure Indians, some were mulattoes, while +a few were Spaniards of the lowest type. They looked what they were, +bandits and outlaws, and I must say that my acquaintance of the morning +was not the most villainous of them. They formed a striking company, +quite in keeping with the gloomy grandeur of their home, shut in on +every side by overhanging rocks and towering mountains. + +"Who is that?" suddenly roared a deep voice, and I saw the gigantic +leader stride from the ring of men. Approaching us, he looked me full +in the face. + +"A stranger?" cried he. "Why have you brought him here?" + +"I must have changed much since we last met," I interposed. "But if +you don't remember me, you will doubtless remember the present you gave +me," and I showed him the silver key. + +He looked at me again, and this time with a gleam of recognition. + +"I know you now!" he cried.--"Make way there. Room for an honoured +guest--room for the son of Don Eduardo!" + +The name carried no meaning to the Spanish brigands; but the Indians +received it with a great shout, for they knew how greatly my father had +suffered in his efforts to make their lives easier. They would have +pressed round me to touch my hand, but the chief waved them back, +saying I wanted food and rest. They made a space beside the fire, and +Sorillo himself attended to my injuries. + +"No bones broken," said he, after making an examination with as much +skill as a surgeon. "We have only to reduce this swelling of the +ankle. You can make yourself comfortable for a fortnight, at least. +Now you must have some food, and then we'll talk." + +Now, I have no wish to give you a false impression of Raymon Sorillo. +He was a wild, lawless man, who had passed his life in fighting against +the Spanish government. He had extraordinary courage and ability, and +no man of his band was ever known to question an order issued by him. +He had himself founded the Order of the Silver Key, and it was always +my father's opinion that, but for the coming of San Martin, he would in +time have transformed Peru into an Indian kingdom. I am at least +certain that his ambition tended in that direction. + +When the war broke out, numerous desperadoes flocked to him, and he was +held responsible for many acts of cruelty. Whether he was deserving of +blame I cannot say. Jose held him to be cruel, and he generally had +that reputation. Perhaps it was only a case of giving a dog a bad +name. However that may be, it is certain he had a high opinion of my +father, and for his sake was exceedingly kind to me. But for him I +might have lain long enough in the Spanish fortress, or perished in the +sandy coast deserts. Another service he did, which we only heard of +afterwards, and then by accident, was the guarding of my mother. From +the time of my escape till the withdrawal of the Royalists from Lima, +several of his men, unknown to her, kept ward over the hacienda. They +had received strict orders to protect its mistress against every +danger, even at the risk of their lives. In case of anything +occurring, one was to rouse the natives belonging to the order in Lima, +while another rode post-haste to the chief. + +Remembering these things, and others not here set down, I can hardly +judge this remarkable man without bias; but even his most bitter +enemies could not truly say he was wholly bad. And it may be stated +here that during my stay in the ravine I was treated like a prince. +The best of everything was set before me, my slightest wish was law, +and even the fiercest of the white men, forming a small minority of the +band, were compelled to behave peaceably in my presence. + +After I had eaten and slept for a time, I told the chief the story I +had heard from the young Spanish officer, Santiago Mariano, concerning +my father, and asked his opinion. + +"I would build no hopes on that," said he, shaking his head +thoughtfully. "If your father is alive, we shall find him at Callao; +but I doubt it." + +"The governor was expected to capitulate when I left Lima last," I +remarked. + +"Yes; his provisions must be gone by now. Your San Martin is an old +woman. Why did he allow Canterac to escape? My men and I have been +marched about from place to place just where we could do no good. I +shall not trouble to obey orders any more. We are not children to be +treated thus." + +Sorillo was very sore on the subject, and returned to it over and over +again. In the evening one of the band arrived with the information +that Colonel Miller had sent out search-parties to look for me, and +that three men were waiting at the entrance to the ravine. + +"Tell them," said the chief, "that Don Juan Crawford is with me. He +has sprained his ankle very badly, and cannot move for several days; +otherwise he is unhurt. As soon as he is well enough we will take him +home." + +"I wish the colonel would let my mother know," said I; "she would be +less anxious." + +"That is a poor compliment to me," observed Sorillo, smiling. "My +messenger is already on his way to the hacienda with the news. I have +told him to say you are in absolutely no danger, so that your mother +will not be alarmed." + +"Then I am more than ever in your debt," said I gratefully, for the +chief's action showed a thoughtful consideration quite unexpected. + +"We shall never pay all that is owing to the son of Don Eduardo +Crawford," he answered gravely. "And now let me carry you to my hut. +A bed has been prepared there for you; it is a simple affair, but you +will be comfortable." + +I slept well that night. The pain had considerably decreased, and I +had no cause for fear or anxiety. Sorillo slept in another corner of +the hut, going out so quietly in the morning that he did not disturb +me. Indeed the sun was high in the heavens when I wakened. + +The chief's messenger had not returned, and another day passed before +he appeared; then, to my delight, he brought Jose with him. + +"Well, Jack," exclaimed my old friend, on finding that I was really not +much hurt, "you gave Miller a fine fright. He thought you were either +dead or carried off. His troops are back in Lima. It seems Canterac +was too good for you." + +"He flung half his army at us," I responded rather sulkily, for one +does not like being reminded of a beating. "It must have been a matter +of ten to one. But never mind that. What news do you bring from Lima? +How is my mother? and how are events moving there?" + +"Your mother is well, and sends her love to you, and events are shaping +just as we could wish them to. We are masters of Callao." + +"Then the forts have fallen? O Jose, tell me quickly--I am burning +with excitement--was my father there?" + +"Keep cool!" said he, smiling; "I don't want you to throw yourself into +a fever. Yes, we found your father there." + +"Thank God for that!" I murmured reverently. "You can tell me the rest +at your leisure." + +"There isn't much to tell," he replied. "It seems that your father was +suddenly surrounded in the mountains by a body of regulars, and ordered +to submit. Taken by surprise, there was nothing else to do; but while +he stood hesitating, some one--not the captain in charge--shot him +down, and he remembers nothing more till he found himself in Callao. +The governor, La Mar, happens to be a kind-hearted fellow; so he had +your father's wound dressed, gave him the most comfortable cell, and +altogether treated him so well that, in spite of a long illness, he is +entirely recovered." + +"This is better and better, Jose! I hope we shall have a chance of +doing La Mar a good turn." + +"Your father will be in a position to see to that, as San Martin has +already made him a member of the government." + +"That's all right then.--By-the-bye, have you seen Montilla?" + +"Yes. The old fox plays the game well. He is delighted--so he +says--to be able to hand over the estates, which he was keeping in +trust for you, to the rightful owner." + +"Do you think my father believes him?" + +"I can't say. Your mother doesn't; neither do I." + +"Nor I." + +We remained silent for some minutes, when, Sorillo joining us, I told +him the good news. At first he did not seem to comprehend. When he +did, I thought he would take leave of his senses. Even Jose, who was +not given to judging by outward show, was impressed by the man's +genuine pleasure. + +But the grand event took place some days later, when my father himself +came to remove me to Lima. Sorillo marshalled his Indians at the mouth +of the pass, and they escorted him up the ravine in a triumphal +procession, amidst enthusiastic cries of "Long live Don Eduardo +Crawford! long live the Indians' friend!" + +There is not much to tell about our meeting. It was all very simple, +though I suppose there were not at that moment two happier people in +Peru. My father was exceptionally loving and kind-hearted, but he +never made a fuss, while my English blood kept me from being too +demonstrative. + +"Well, Jack, my boy," he exclaimed, giving me a warm grip of the hand, +"I reckon you never expected to see me again?" + +"Well, father, I had heard it was possible you were alive, but I hardly +dared hope so." + +As Jose said, he was looking very well, considering the circumstances. +His cheeks were thinner, and had lost their colour; his hair had turned +gray; he seemed less robust than formerly; but his mind was brisk and +alert, and his eyes retained their old fire. + +Sorillo would have kept him awhile as an honoured guest; but he was +anxious to return, and the carriage waited at the foot of the +mountains. On one point, however, the guerilla chief would not be +denied. Leaving the Spaniards and mulattoes in the ravine, he insisted +on accompanying us, with his Indians, to Lima, and my father did not +like to refuse him. From the ravine they carried me on a comfortable +litter to the foot of the mountains, where Jose had stayed with the +carriage. Then forming up in front, they marched along singing and +cheering for Don Eduardo Crawford. + +We slept that night in a deserted hacienda, and arrived at our home +next day. Jose had ridden forward to inform my mother of her coming +visitors, so that she might be able to provide them with food and drink. + +It was a grand home-coming for me, and a great triumph for my father. +Though not a vain man, the incident pleased him, because it showed that +the people for whom he had suffered so much were grateful for his +efforts to do them good. + +As the journey had made me rather excited, I took no part in the +rejoicings which were kept up through the night; but after breakfast +the Indians took their departure, and the noise of their cheering might +have been heard at the other end of the town. + +"It's rather rough on you, Jack," laughed my father, coming into my +room; "but now you will have a chance of a little quiet." + +"I am not sure of that," observed my mother, who was looking from a +window: "here are two cavaliers crossing the park. By the way they +ride, I should say they are Englishmen." + +"Is one a big, handsome man?" I asked. + +"Well, yes, he is certainly big!" + +"That is O'Brien, then; and the other most probably is the colonel." + +I was not mistaken. In a short time Colonel Miller and his friend were +in the room, and each in turn shook me heartily by the hand. + +"We hardly expected to see you again so soon," said the colonel, +laughing. "We thought Canterac had taken a fancy to your company. I +hope there is no permanent injury to the foot?" + +"Oh no, colonel; only I shan't be able to do any more mountain climbing +yet awhile." + +"There's none to do," broke in O'Brien; "we've taken to dancing +instead." + +"I shall not be able even to join in that for some time." + +"No? What a pity! We are enjoying ourselves immensely, though it +seems rather an odd way of carrying on a war." + +"The general perhaps considers that his troops require rest," suggested +my mother. + +"Even so, staying here is a great mistake," said the colonel. "We are +giving the Royalists time to recover their strength, and we shall +suffer for it later on. Unfortunately the general appears to think +that Lima is Peru." + +"Not the general only," remarked my father; "many of his officers would +be sorry to exchange Lima for the mountains." + +"That is so," admitted O'Brien frankly. "The truth of the matter is, +the citizens have treated us too well. They have made us so +comfortable that we wish to stay here as long as possible." + +"In that case," said my mother, smiling, "we must steel our hearts +against you." + +"And drive us into the wilderness again!" laughed O'Brien gaily. +"Senora, you will not be so cruel?" + +"I will not begin to-day," she replied merrily, "because I hope you +will stay and dine with us. To-morrow--" + +"Ah! let us think of to-morrow when it comes; to-day we will enjoy +ourselves." + +"A pleasant creed," remarked my father, "though more often than not it +leads to ruin. I shall begin to think you are falling a victim to our +South American vice." + +"What is that?" + +"Never to do to-day what can be put off till to-morrow." + +"That is exactly what we are doing," remarked the colonel, "and I quite +agree with you that it is not a paying game, especially in time of war. +A chance once missed never presents itself again." + +"An excellent reason for accepting Donna Maria's gracious invitation," +laughed O'Brien. "Colonel, I congratulate you on your powers of +argument." + +Although talking in this bantering way, it must not be thought that he +was really in favour of remaining idle; but he was a soldier, and had +to obey orders, however much he disliked them. + +My father, being a member of the government, was in a much worse +position, as many held him responsible in a measure for the lazy way in +which the war was being conducted. Really he had no power over the +army at all, and could not on his own authority have moved a section of +recruits. + +O'Brien had spoken truly in saying that the officers had taken to +dancing instead of climbing. All the chief families opened their doors +to them, and our neighbour, Montilla, who had so suddenly been +converted to our side, gave a ball more brilliant than even the oldest +inhabitant could remember. + +Thus the days passed into weeks; my ankle grew strong and well, I was +able to resume my duties, and still there was no sign of moving. We +held possession of Lima and Callao, but on the other side of the +mountains the Royalists did as they pleased. + +"I hope," remarked my father more than once, "that when we wish to move +we shall be able to do so." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +DUTY FIRST. + +As far as we in Peru were concerned, the winter of 1821-22 passed +without disturbance; but Colonel Miller busied himself in drilling the +new regiment of Peruvians which had been placed under his command. As +he had made me his aid-de-camp, we were much together, and he paid +frequent visits to our house, where he was always gladly welcomed. + +Owing to my father's office, I saw a great deal at this time of the +protector, who treated me with extreme kindness. Although such a great +soldier, he had no love for war, and planned to bring about the real +independence of the country without fighting. + +"I do not wish the Peruvians to kill each other," he repeatedly +declared. "I wish them to live at peace with each other; and whenever +they are ready to do that I will step aside, so that they may choose +whatever kind of government they please." + +My father, who admired him greatly, several times pointed out the +dangers that loomed ahead. + +"You are reckoning without Bolivar," said he. "He has already driven +the Spaniards from Venezuela and Colombia, and is steadily pushing them +into Peru. He will follow them and mix himself up with our affairs. +He is mad with ambition, and you will find there is not room enough for +both of you in one country." + +"In that case I will go away," answered San Martin, with a sad smile. +"I am here, not for my own good, but for that of Peru." + +"After bearing the heat and burden of the day, you will give up your +just reward? It is monstrous!" + +"I seek no reward, Crawford; I seek only the happiness of Peru. In +order to gain that I shall willingly sacrifice myself." + +"We will not permit it, general!" + +"You must, because it is your duty. Having made South America +independent of Spain, it would be sheer wickedness to turn and rend +each other. Let Bolivar have the glory. I shall have a quiet +conscience. But it seems to me that we are giving substance to +shadows. Bolivar will join hands with me. We shall establish a strong +government in Peru; then having done our duty, each will retire." + +My father shook his head, saying, "You are mistaken; General Bolivar's +ambition is to make all South America into one country, with himself at +the head. Nothing less than that will content him." + +"Then he will fail," answered San Martin. "Let us hope he will not +drag the country to ruin with him." + +About this time, March 1822, news reached us that our forces at Ica had +met with a terrible defeat. By a swift and daring march, the Spanish +general, Canterac, had thrown his army against them with startling +suddenness. They tried to retreat, but, being attacked in the night, +were cut to pieces, and an enormous quantity of stores passed into the +hands of the Royalists. The news cast a gloom over the city, and many +weak-kneed Patriots lost their heads entirely. Unless we could obtain +help from General Bolivar, they cried, our cause was undone. My father +did not believe this; he distrusted Bolivar, and made no scruple of +saying so. + +"Still we must find out just what he means to do," remarked San Martin +one evening. + +"His intentions are evident," replied my father, rather bitterly. "He +means to make himself master of the country, and to push you aside." + +"I think you misjudge him; but in any case I place the happiness of +Peru before personal ambition.--By the way," he added, turning to me, +"have you ever seen this remarkable man?" + +"No, general." + +"Would you like to do so? Ah, I see you would. Well, you shall. I am +going to meet him at Guayaquil; you shall go with me, unless your +father objects." + +"I have no objection, general. It will do him good, by opening his +eyes!" + +"Very well; let him be ready to-morrow morning. I will let Colonel +Miller know of the arrangement." + +"Jack," exclaimed my father when San Martin had gone, "this is a great +honour for you. I don't expect the protector will take any one else, +except Guido, who goes with him everywhere. I almost envy you, my boy, +for San Martin and Bolivar are certainly the two most wonderful men in +South America." + +"Will there be any danger?" asked my mother. + +"I think not; the visit is a friendly one." + +The next day, having put on my gaudiest uniform, blue with red facings, +white edging, and abundance of gold lace, I went over to Callao, +meeting the general and his "aid" just as they were embarking on the +schooner _Macedonia_. As usual, the general looked grave and rather +stern. He was very silent too, and as the schooner slipped from her +moorings he disappeared within his cabin. Guido, who shared a cabin +with me, was far less reserved than his chief. + +"This is a fool's errand," said he brusquely. "The protector is just +playing into Bolivar's hands." + +"He knows what he is doing, I think." + +"That makes me the more angry. But for him the Spaniards would still +be in possession of Peru; and now, rather than make a bother, he'll let +the other fellow take the prize." + +"What would you have him do?" + +"Do?" cried he excitedly; "why, stand his ground. I would say, 'I have +done all the hard work, I have made Peru free, and I am going to be +master of the country. Let Bolivar or any one else come here at his +peril!'" + +"Then there would be a three-cornered fight, and the Spaniards would +have the best of it!" + +"That wouldn't be San Martin's fault. Do you think Bolivar cares how +the country suffers as long as he comes out on top? Not he!" + +"If that is so, San Martin is certainly playing the better part." + +"The better part? a fig for the better part! He can beat Bolivar and +the Spanish put together if he chooses. He is far and away the finest +general in South America." + +"And one of the best men, if he acts as you say he will." + +But Guido was much too angry to take that view. When I added that +without Bolivar's help we could hardly reduce the Spaniards to +submission, he laughed scornfully and turned away. + +On the evening of July 25, 1822, the _Macedonia_ dropped anchor in the +harbour of Guayaquil, and immediately afterwards two of Bolivar's +officers came on board with a friendly greeting from their chief. + +"Caramba!" muttered Guido beneath his breath, "it makes me mad! It's +like the old custom of garlanding a victim before offering him up as a +sacrifice!" + +That night we slept on the schooner, disembarking the next day. The +route was lined by Bolivar's soldiers, who saluted stiffly, and by +thousands of people cheering wildly for their renowned visitor. + +"There it is, you see," whispered Guido; "the people want San Martin. +If they had their way, Guayaquil would be a part of Peru, with him as +president." + +"But they haven't," said I, "and Bolivar has; which makes all the +difference." + +"Look!" exclaimed he contemptuously, as the carriage stopped; "isn't it +like a circus show?" + +In front of a house stood a group of officers dressed in the most +magnificent and gorgeous uniforms. As San Martin stepped from the +carriage, one of them, moving a pace forward, embraced him. + +"That's Bolivar!" whispered Guido, and I gazed at the great captain +with intense interest. + +Perhaps I was prejudiced against him, but he did not come up to my +expectations. He was short, thin, and narrow-chested, his skin was +sallow, his high but narrow forehead was deeply lined. His hair was +black and curly; he had thick lips and beautiful white teeth, which he +was fond of showing. His eyes were large and black but deeply sunken; +now bright and sparkling, again dull and glassy. His features, to me +at least, were harsh and unpleasing; but he was evidently a man of +great energy, to whom action was as the breath of life. + +Arm in arm the two leaders entered the house, Guido and I following +with Bolivar's staff. The saloon presented a striking scene, being +filled with officers in brilliant uniforms and by beautifully-dressed +ladies. A young girl, stepping forward, greeted San Martin, and placed +a laurel wreath of gold upon his head. + +"What rubbish!" muttered Guido testily. "Does she think he is as great +a mummer as Bolivar?" + +"Hush!" I whispered, not wishing his outspoken comments to be heard. +"See, he is taking it off." + +We could not hear what he said, but he spoke pleasantly, and beckoning +to Guido, placed the wreath in his hand. + +"Take great care of this," said he; "I value it highly for the sake of +the giver." + +"Bolivar would have worn a dozen, one on top of the other," growled +Guido. + +Presently the two chiefs proceeded to an inner room, where they +remained alone for nearly two hours, while we chatted with the Bolivian +officers, several of whom were Englishmen. + +At length the door opened, the leaders came out, and San Martin +accompanied Bolivar to the street, where they parted with a show of +cordial friendship. Directly afterwards the assembly dispersed, and we +were left in peace. The next day they had a much longer interview, and +at its close I read in San Martin's face that he had resolved to +sacrifice himself for the good of Peru. + +"Guido," said he quietly, "let the baggage be taken aboard. They are +giving a grand dinner in my honour this evening; as soon as I can get +away, we sail for Callao." + +The banquet, which was held in the house set apart for Bolivar, was on +the most magnificent scale. The room was bright with showy uniforms; +every one appeared to be covered with stars and crosses and +decorations. I almost regretted that my silver key was not dangling +outside my tunic. + +San Martin sat in the chair of honour at the right of our host. Of all +the good things set before him he ate and drank little, his thoughts +being evidently far removed from the banqueting-room. + +This was the first time I had been at a public dinner, and but for +anxiety on our leader's account, I should have enjoyed it immensely. +Presently, when the servants had removed the dishes, Bolivar filled his +glass with wine, and stood up. Instantly the buzz of conversation +ceased; the officers gazed intently at their chief, who was about to +propose a toast. I listened too, wondering if my ears were playing me +false. As to Guido, I thought that, in his scornful contempt, he would +have kicked the table over. + +"Gentlemen," said our host, "to the two greatest men of South +America--General San Martin and myself!" + +There was a round of cheering, while Guido and I hardly dared look at +each other, and not at all at our chief. + +Soon afterward we adjourned to the ballroom, but did not stay long, San +Martin saying, "Let us go; I cannot stand this riot!" + +Quietly bidding Bolivar farewell, we followed one of the high +officials, who let us out through a private door, and escorted us to +the quay. There we boarded the schooner, which in less than an hour +was under way. The protector went straight to his cabin without +speaking. He was bitterly disappointed at the result of the interview, +but all that passed his lips on the subject was, "Bolivar is not the +man we took him to be." These words were said as we paced the deck +together next morning, and they were spoken more to himself than to us. + +"It has happened as I predicted," remarked Guido that afternoon, "and +the rest will follow. As soon as he has put things in order, he will +leave Peru to make room for Bolivar. And he will not let people know +the reason; he will even make Bolivar's path smoother." + +"You would plant it thick with thorns, I suppose?" + +"I would plant it with naked swords!" + +"Ah, Guido," I cried, "that is not San Martin's teaching!" + +"No," said he surlily; "it's a lesson of my own composing." + +The voyage passed uneventfully, and on the twentieth of August the +_Macedonia_ once more sailed into the Bay of Callao. + +During our absence a riot had taken place in Lima; but the people +received San Martin enthusiastically, coming down in thousands to the +port, and escorting him to his country house in triumph. + +I said little of what had taken place to any one except my father, and +he was able to judge of things by other signs. The protector, who told +him Bolivar had agreed to help Peru with troops, worked feverishly day +and night, until the opening of the first Peruvian Congress. Then +removing his sash of authority, he resigned his office, and formally +handed over the care of the country to the new Parliament. That same +evening my father and I called at his house, where we found Guido, ever +faithful, waiting in the anteroom. + +"Where is the general?" asked my father. + +"Here, Crawford!" answered San Martin, opening the door of an inner +room. "Is anything wrong?" + +"No, general, but I fear there soon will be. Do you know it is +whispered in the town that you are about to leave Peru?" + +"The rumour is correct, my friend, as I have just been telling Guido. +No, it is useless to talk; my mind is made up. I can do the country no +more good." + +For a long time both Guido and my father tried to prevail upon him to +stay, but in vain. + +"The world will regard you as a deserter!" urged Guido. + +"What matters it as long as I know the truth? I care not for the +applause of the world, my friends, nor fear its frowns. I leave my +work unfinished, it is true, but others will finish it and reap the +glory. Besides, Peru will be the better for my absence." + +"No, no!" exclaimed my father earnestly. "The people love you and +trust you. They will uphold your authority." + +San Martin held out his hand, saying,-- + +"You are a true friend, Crawford, but you are a true patriot and a +shrewd man as well. Now listen to me. Without help it will take two +years at least to subdue the Spaniards. That will mean two years of +misery. Do you follow me?" + +"Perfectly." + +"With help the war can be brought to an end in six months. The +Chilians can do no more, and we can look only to Bolivar. Now, do you +imagine that he and I can run in double harness?" + +My father shook his head sorrowfully. + +"Of course not. Bolivar is a great man, a remarkable man; but he is +ambitious, and will brook no rival. Now, suppose I remain. It will be +difficult to avoid strife, and the country will be plunged back into +its old condition of slavery. Do you think that San Martin will give a +day of delight to the common enemy? No, my friend; if only Peru +retains its independence, I care nothing for self. Let men call me +what they please. The path of duty lies plain before me; I am going to +walk in it. Let Bolivar have the glory; it is but a breath. I shall +not say this publicly; neither will you. I am broken in health; let +that do for the present. In years to come, perhaps, the world will +recognize my good faith; if not, never mind!" + +Even after that my father endeavoured to dissuade him from going, but +his efforts were useless. + +"Let me wish you good-bye, Crawford," said he. "I need hardly counsel +you to accept the help which Bolivar offers. The man may not please +you, but--country first!--Good-bye, my boy; if you make half as good a +man as your father, you will not do amiss." + +We grasped his hand for the last time, and leaving Guido with him, went +into the road, mounted our horses, and rode slowly homeward. + +Next day it became known that San Martin had left Peru for ever, and +instantly men's tongues were loosed in a babel of talk. Some few +judged him rightly; but for the most part his splendid services were +forgotten, and with sickening haste people turned their gaze toward +Bolivar, the new sun. + +"There is a lesson for you, Jack, worth heeding," remarked my father. +"If only these people knew the truth!" + +"They wouldn't understand it!" said I hotly. "The idea of a man making +such a sacrifice is beyond them. You know I have sometimes thought the +general made a big mistake in the conduct of the war, but he atoned for +everything last night. He looked simply splendid when he talked about +giving up everything for duty." + +"Ah!" exclaimed my father thoughtfully, "with all his battles to look +back upon, he never won a greater victory than he did last evening. It +must almost have broken his heart, Jack, but he did not whimper." + +Few spoke in this strain, and I was disappointed that even Jose took +sides with the majority. Sentiment, beyond his love for us, did not +appeal to him; he looked only on the practical side of things. + +"I shouldn't have thought San Martin would have thrown up the sponge," +said he. "I gave him credit for more pluck than that. They do say in +the town that he was keen on making himself king or emperor." + +"A pack of rubbish!" I cried. + +"Well," said Jose, "I would have seen the thing through, anyhow. It +won't be pleasant for your father, either, when Bolivar gets the +whip-hand. San Martin's friends will be in Bolivar's black books. +I'll guarantee Montilla has written to him already." + +"You aren't in a very good temper this morning, Jose," said I, with a +laugh. + +"No; because I am looking a long way ahead, and see things. Is your +father going to keep in office?" + +"I expect so. He may be able to do the country a little good." + +"And himself a lot of harm! Shall you resign your commission?" + +"How can I? the Spaniards are still in the field." + +"And will take a lot of beating yet! 'Twould have answered better if +the Peruvians had done the job by themselves." + +I might have mentioned that if they found it so difficult with the aid +of others, they could hardly have done it alone; but dear old Jose was +too angry for argument, so I let the subject drop. + +Among the officers opinion was divided, but no one had much to say on +the matter. It almost seemed as if they feared to express their real +opinion in case of future trouble. Colonel Miller, however, spoke his +mind freely, and so did the other Englishmen with him. + +"I am sorry San Martin has gone," said he; "but my duty is plain. I am +an officer in the army of Peru, and must obey orders from the +government. If they give the chief command to Bolivar, why, I shall +fight under him, just as I have done under San Martin. That's one good +thing about soldiering--you always know where you are." + +"Humph!" said Jose, on hearing the remark, "I'm not so sure that the +colonel's right. In my opinion there's more than one soldier just at +present wondering if he hadn't better join the other party again. +Another affair like the one at Ica would send them flying to Canterac +in scores. The great thing with some of them is to be on the winning +side." + +As soon as San Martin had left Peru, Bolivar sent a message, offering +the aid of his troops; but the government declined all assistance. A +new spirit seemed to enter into the nation: the people declared the +country would fight its own battles, and preparations to meet the +Spaniards were eagerly pushed on. + +What came of them we shall shortly see. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +DARK DAYS. + +"I have decided to leave you in Lima, Crawford, to help Videla with the +second battalion. I have good reasons for doing so," continued the +colonel, observing my disappointed look; "and, anyhow, you are well out +of this expedition. I don't expect much from it." + +The expedition of which Colonel Miller spoke had been planned on a +large scale for the purpose of crushing the enemy in the south, and the +first battalion of the Peruvian Legion formed part of it. Naturally I +had quite looked forward to sailing with it, and was not at all +pleased, therefore, to be left behind. I had many friends, some of +them not much older than myself, among the officers of the first +battalion, and on the morning of the embarkation I went over to Callao +to see them off. They were delighted at the thought of active service, +and of course chaffed me unmercifully. + +"Take care of the town, Juan," said one; "we shall want it when we come +back." + +"Some day, when you are a man, we will take you with us," laughed +Ensign Alzura, a merry, round-faced youngster of sixteen; "but we must +have seasoned men for this trip, dear boy." + +"Should the Spaniards arrive while we're away, ask them to wait till +our return," remarked another. + +"I don't wonder you are so excited," said I coolly; "I felt the same +before I knew what a battle is really like." + +"Bravo, Crawford!" cried the colonel, who had joined us unperceived; +"that's a round shot for them. They haven't heard the whistle of the +bullets yet, eh? Well, good-bye; it's time you were getting ashore. +You'll hear news of us from time to time." + +"Good news too, I hope, colonel.--Good-bye, Zuviria, Alzura, and all of +you. I hope you've shipped a schoolmaster," and with that parting shot +I ran down to the quay. + +The Peruvians were on board the _O'Higgins_; but there were several +other vessels, and presently they all stood out of the bay amidst a +regular salvo of cheering from the spectators. + +I returned to Lima feeling rather gloomy, but Lieutenant-Colonel +Videla, who commanded our second battalion, gave me little time for +brooding. Fresh recruits were coming in every day, and the work of +attending to them kept me employed for weeks. There was still a +Patriot army encamped outside Lima, but it did nothing, though who was +to blame I could not say. + +About the end of the year, vague yet disquieting rumours began to +circulate in the city. It was said that our troops in the south had +met with defeat, had been cut to pieces and practically swept out of +existence. The victorious Spaniards, uniting all their forces, were +making ready for a swoop on Lima. Everything was lost! + +Don Felipe brought us the news, and it was easy to see, in spite of his +talk, that it did not displease him. + +"We shall have to call in Bolivar now," said he, "or make peace with +the viceroy. Of course you and I will suffer. Our estates will be +confiscated; we shall probably be thrown into prison; but we are good +patriots, and will not shrink from our duty." + +"If the others agree with me," replied my father, "we shall neither +call in Bolivar nor make peace. There is still an army left!" + +"Just so, but we cannot trust it. The troops are almost in open +rebellion, and this news will not quiet them." + +"We do not yet know that it is true." + +"I am sure of it," said our neighbour hastily. "I have--that is to +say, there can be no doubt of it." + +A week or two later--January 20, 1823, to be precise--there walked into +the quarters of the second battalion a young officer. His face was +white and drawn, his eyes were sunken; he looked so pitifully weak and +ill that at first I failed to recognize him. + +"Well, Crawford," he exclaimed, "am I as changed as all that? Don't +you know your old chum Alzura when you see him?" + +"Alzura?" I echoed, aghast. + +"All that is left of him." + +"Where is the first battalion?" + +Spreading his hands out dramatically, he said, "Haven't you heard? +Don't you know what has happened at Torata and Moquegua?" + +"I have heard nothing but some very dark rumours," I replied uneasily. + +"They cannot be darker than the truth. The army has been destroyed, +and the battalion with it." + +"And the colonel?" + +"Oh, he was in another district with the light company. But I'll tell +you all about it. We had a wretched voyage, and arrived at Arica half +dead. After that we sat down for three weeks doing nothing, when +Alvarado, who was in chief command, sent the colonel north with the +light company. A lucky thing for them, too!" + +"Go on!" said I impatiently. + +"Well, at last we moved, and marched as far as Torata. Do you know the +place at all?" + +"Oh yes; it's a few miles from Moquegua, isn't it?" + +"That's it. Well, the Spaniards were at Torata, and we tried to turn +them out, but failed. Then they attacked, and we were beaten. It was +simply awful. The legion fought like a battalion of heroes. Every one +praised us; but praise won't bring the dead to life. We broke two +cavalry charges, and stood our ground till there wasn't a cartridge +left." + +"Then you retreated?" + +"Some of us did, not many! We left fifteen of our officers there and +three-fourths of the battalion, all dead or dangerously wounded. +Alvarado took us back to Moquegua; but the Spaniards caught us again. +The second defeat was worse than the first, and when the battle was +over there was no army left. As to the battalion--! O Juan, isn't it +awful? La Rosa, Tarramona, Escobar, Rivero--all gone! I should +think," he added, with a bitter laugh, "I must have been senior +officer." + +It was, indeed, a terrible story. I could hardly realize that of all +my high-spirited young friends who had sailed from Callao this was the +only one to return. + +"How did you get back?" I asked, after a time. + +"With General Martinez. We embarked at Ilo, while General Alvarado +went on to Iquiqui. The game's up in that part of the country, Juan!" + +"Oh, nonsense!" I replied brusquely. "We aren't going to lose heart +over a couple of defeats." + +Of course the news soon spread, and the people, especially the +soldiers, were wild with anger. They said it was the fault of the +government, and called for fresh rulers. Some advised sending for +Bolivar, while a few prominent citizens even talked of coming to terms +with the enemy. + +One morning, toward the end of February, Videla called a council of the +officers belonging to his battalion. He looked pale, but firm and +determined, as if he had resolved on some particular course. + +When we had taken our seats, he rose and said, "Senors, I have called +you together to discuss an important proposal. Affairs, as you know, +are in a bad state; the country is in disorder, and the enemy are +triumphing everywhere. Under these circumstances, the chiefs of the +army have decided to force the hands of the government. To-morrow the +troops will march to Lima and demand that a president shall be +appointed with full powers. Now, I will have no part or lot in this +matter. I call it treason. If the government choose to resign, well +and good; if they resist, my sword, at least, is at their service." + +A round of cheering greeted his remarks, and one after another the +officers sprang up, pledging themselves to support him. + +"Thank you," said he quietly; "I knew you would not fail me. Nothing +will be done until the morning. Then, when the order to march is +issued, I shall command you to stand still." + +"Suppose they use force, colonel?" I suggested. + +His face grew paler, but he answered steadily, "I trust they will not +be so foolish. Should they be, the battalion, will know how to defend +itself." + +"Caramba!" exclaimed Alzura, when the meeting broke up, "it seems to me +that the second battalion is likely to follow the first. What can we +do against an army?" + +"There will be no fighting," I answered cheerfully. "They will simply +march without us, and the government will agree to their demands." + +I spoke as if my opinion were conclusive, but nevertheless I did not +sleep comfortably that night. The troops were wakened early, breakfast +was hurried over, and then, to the sound of bugles, the various +regiments paraded. Presently they began to move, and a mounted officer +dashed over to know why our battalion remained still. + +"By my orders they remain. I refuse to join in what my officers and I +regard as an act of treason," calmly replied Videla. "We will +willingly march against the enemy, but not against our own government." + +Bending over, the officer whispered something in his ear. + +"We have counted the cost," replied our chief, "and are not to be +frightened. Let the men who are unwilling to obey me fall out; no harm +will happen to them," said he, turning to the troop. + +Not a man moved, the brave fellows stood in their ranks, firm as rocks. +Again the officer whispered to Videla, and then dashed off at full +speed. It was, as Alzura afterwards remarked, a bad quarter of an hour +for us. If the chiefs endeavoured to force us into submission, there +could be but one result. Videla would not yield, and we could not +desert him. Perhaps the firmness of our bearing saved us; perhaps the +chiefs feared the people, for the battalion was composed entirely of +Peruvians; but whatever the reason, we remained unmolested, and the +army marched off without us. Then the men were dismissed, and we +gathered in groups to chat over the incident. + +"What will happen now?" asked one fellow. + +"It is all decided," replied Videla. "I heard last night that the +government will yield. Riva-Aguero is to be made president, and Santa +Cruz commander-in-chief." + +"And what shall we do, colonel?" + +"Obey orders," he answered, smiling. "We cannot fight for a government +that has resigned its powers." + +The evening proved Videla's words true. The troops, having +accomplished their object, returned to camp, rejoicing that the country +had a new ruler. + +"Now," exclaimed Alzura, as we turned in for the night, "I suppose we +shall see great things done!" + +"New brooms sweep clean," said I, laughing, "but unfortunately they +soon become old ones." + +However, it really did seem as if the new general intended to push on +the war in vigorous style. Preparations were made for another +expedition to the south; Bolivar was invited to Peru; and Sucre, his +most brilliant general, had already come. + +At this time we knew nothing of Colonel Miller; but about the end of +March he returned to Lima, having done more with his handful of men +than all the southern army. The stories told by officers who served +with him filled us with envy. + +"Did you hear how we cleared the Royalists out of Arequipa?" asked +Captain Plaza. "That was a rich joke," and he laughed even at the +recollection of it. + +"Let us hear it," said I. + +"Well, of course, it loses in the telling, but I'll do my best. First +of all, we caught a peasant and shut him up where he could hear all and +see nothing. The poor fellow imagined we were going to shoot him as a +spy. About every half-hour or so one of us would go to the colonel to +report the arrival of fresh troops, and ask where they were to camp. +Then we spread our few men about the valley and kindled dozens of +blazing fires. As soon as it was dark enough, the colonel ordered the +man to be brought out." + +"His face was a study," interrupted Cordova. "He certainly expected to +be shot." + +"The colonel read him a lecture," continued Plaza, "and wound up by +offering to spare his life on his promising to take a letter to the +governor of Arequipa. 'But,' said the colonel sternly, 'you are not to +tell what you have seen here. I want him to think we are very few in +number. Do you understand?' The fellow promised readily enough, +placed the letter in his hat, mounted his horse, and rode down the +valley, counting the fires as he went. Of course he told every +Royalist officer the truth as he believed it, and they cleared out of +the district in double-quick time. Then we forced the governor to +supply us with forage for five hundred horses." + +"But you didn't have five hundred!" + +"That was the joke. We carted the stuff to some sandhills, where a +part of the force was supposed to lie in ambush. When the Royalists +returned with large reinforcements, they wasted days, being afraid of +falling into a trap. It was very funny watching their manoeuvres." + +"Then there was the officer with the flag of truce near Chala," said +Cordova. "He carried back a pretty report to his chief!" + +"Yes," said Plaza, laughing; "he believed we were just the +advance-guard of a large force. He stayed with us the night, but I'm +afraid his slumbers were troubled ones. The bustle was +tremendous--soldiers coming and going every few minutes. The colonel +was giving all kinds of impossible orders; in fact, you would have +thought we had quite a big army there. Next morning I escorted the +Royalist a mile or so on the road. All our men were spread out, some +in fatigue dress, to make him believe there were at least two +regiments." + +"That was a good trick," laughed Alzura. + +"And the officers galloped about, shouting to the men to go to their +camps in the rear. Turning to me, the fellow exclaimed seriously, 'It +is all very well for Miller to have a couple of battalions; but we have +a couple as well as he!' + +"'Ah,' said I, trying to keep a straight face, 'you keep your eyes +open, I see. I warned the colonel not to let you see so much.'" + +"Did you really fool him?" asked half a dozen men in a breath. + +"Yes, and kept our position till the colonel was ready to move. If I +had my way, Miller should be commander-in-chief. He is now the best +man in the country for the post." + +"Bravo!" cried Cordova. "As it is, I suppose we shall all be under +Bolivar's thumb soon." + +"I don't much care who leads," said Alzura, "as long as we win; and +it's about time something was done. The Royalists are getting a strong +following in the city again." + +"Bah!" exclaimed Plaza scornfully, "they're just weather-cocks, +twisting about with every wind that blows--first Royalist, then +Patriot, then Royalist again! It's enough to take away one's breath. +Did you hear about Camba?" + +"He was one of us," said Alzura, "went over to the Royalists, and came +back again." + +"And was appointed second in command of the Legion!" + +There was a cry of amazement from every one in the room; but Plaza +continued, "It's a fact; only Miller put his foot down. 'My officers +are gentlemen,' said he. 'If you appoint this man over them they will +break their swords, and I shall be the first to do so.' That stopped +the game, and Camba was pushed in somewhere else." + +"It's a wonder he hasn't changed again," I said. + +"He is only biding his time, like a good many others." + +"I know nearly a dozen myself," said Alzura, "and one of them is a +neighbour of yours, Crawford." + +"Do you mean the fellow with the pretty daughter?" some one asked. + +"Yes. I respect the girl. She is an out-and-out Royalist, and makes +no attempt to deny it; but the old man is a schemer--he runs with the +hare and hunts with the hounds." + +"Don't vent your opinion too freely, my boy; Montilla has powerful +influence in high quarters." + +"Well," said Alzura doggedly, "if he isn't working hard to bring back +the Royalists, I am very much mistaken." + +The young officer's words made me very uneasy. I knew little of Don +Felipe's proceedings, as, although he was an occasional visitor at our +house, a certain coolness had sprung up between us. For this feeling +it would have been difficult, perhaps, to give any particular reason. +To all appearance the man had acted fairly enough; indeed, according to +his own account, he had always been my best friend. + +Still, I had very little love for him, and no respect at all. I was +rather suspicious of a man who changed sides just when it best suited +his interests. With Rosa things were different. She was a born +Royalist, and though I thought her views mistaken, I admired her pluck +in holding so stoutly to them. + +But the idea that her father was preparing to turn his coat again +worried me. True, he might win a big reward by helping the Spaniards; +but in the event of discovery, he could hardly expect to escape death. +I told myself the punishment would serve him right, and that the +business was none of mine; yet somehow I could not get rid of the +uneasy feeling. If Alzura's suspicions were correct, the man might be +taken and hanged at any moment. I said again it would serve him right, +but the justice of his sentence would not lessen Rosa's suffering. + +All that night I lay awake thinking. I could not get the girl out of +my head. You see, I had known her so long; we had played together like +brother and sister; she was so pretty and winsome that I hated the idea +of trouble assailing her. + +In the morning I was inclined to laugh at my fears. Every one knew +there were many people in Lima willing to welcome the Royalists, and it +had been openly stated more than once that Don Felipe Montilla had only +changed sides to secure his property. Doubtless Alzura, knowing this, +had jumped to the conclusion that he would willingly return to his +former allegiance. + +"That is about all there is in it," said I, feeling a little more +assured. "It is marvellous what stories some men can build up from a +word here and there! If Alzura lives till the end of the war, he +should be a novelist." + +At this time I was a great deal in Lima, being employed by Colonel +Miller in connection with the new expedition which Santa Cruz was to +lead south. Several nights a week I slept at home, much to mother's +satisfaction. My father continued to be busy in public matters, though +he had resigned his office as a protest against the invitation to +Bolivar. + +Now, it chanced, about a fortnight after young Alzura's disquieting +talk, that I had occasion to go late at night to Callao, and Jose +offered to accompany me. It is likely enough that my mother put the +idea into his head, for though brave enough herself, she was always +fearful on my account. However, I was glad to avail myself of Jose's +offer. The night was fine, the sky was studded with stars, and the +moon, nearly at the full, gave forth a splendid light. + +"You may go to bed, Antonio," said I to the old janitor, as he opened +the gate. "We are not likely to return till morning." + +"Do you remember our first night ride to Callao?" asked Jose. "There +was no need for any one to sit up for us then." + +"Yes, that I do. And the voyage in the schooner," I added gaily. +"That was an adventure, if you like! We were as near to death then, +Jose, as ever we have been since." + +"Yes," he said thoughtfully. "I have often wondered how we managed to +escape." + +Passing through the outer gates of the park on to the highroad, we +cantered our horses about a quarter of a mile, and then turned up a +narrow lane which separated our property from that of Don Felipe +Montilla. + +Suddenly checking his horse, Jose whispered, "See to your pistols, my +boy; there are horsemen coming this way." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +FALSE PLAY, OR NOT? + +There was no actual reason why we should feel alarmed; but Lima was an +unsafe place in those days, and people who travelled at night generally +went well armed. + +As yet the bend in the road prevented us from seeing any one, but +listening intently, we distinctly heard the sounds of a horse's hoofs. + +"There's only one, Jose," I whispered; and he nodded. I do not know +that we should have taken any notice of the man, but for his efforts to +conceal his identity. We came upon him suddenly, while the moon shone +full in his face, and before he had time either to draw his poncho +closer or to pull the slouch hat over his eyes. Both these things he +did quickly, but meanwhile we had seen, and a look of keen surprise +shot across Jose's face. Recovering himself instantly, he said +cheerfully,-- + +"Good-night, senor. Fine night for a ride." + +"So you seem to think," replied the other surlily. + +"You have come from the town, I see," said Jose, for we lived eastward +of Lima; "is all quiet there?" + +"Why shouldn't it be? Kindly allow me to pass; I am in a hurry," +responded our morose stranger. + +"Then 'twas lucky that you knew of this short cut," remarked Jose, +nothing daunted by the fellow's manner. "Well, good-night, senor. +Pleasant ride!" and he drew his horse aside that the stranger might +pass. + +"He isn't any too polite!" I remarked, as digging his spurs into his +horse the fellow galloped off. "He's a fine horseman, though, and has +the air of a military man, if I'm not mistaken." + +"Yes," agreed Jose; "he certainly rides like a soldier." + +"But he isn't in uniform." + +"No; he has left his uniform at home, I expect." + +"He must be pretty familiar with Lima to know this short cut." + +"I daresay he is. But didn't you recognize him? Well, I suppose it's +hardly likely you would; you were only a little chap at the time, and +perhaps never saw him. He's a rascal to the marrow!" + +"But who is he?" I asked impatiently. + +"Pardo Lurena." + +"Lurena? Haven't I heard my father speak of him?" + +"Very likely. He was one of the 'young bloods' of Peru, and, being a +cadet of a wealthy family, able to do much as he pleased. He was +always a thorough ruffian, and the common people hated him like poison. +His pranks, however, were hushed up by those in authority, until, for +some offence more startling than usual, your father got him clapped in +prison. The Dons howled finely, but your father stood firm, and the +people backed him up; so young Lurena had a taste of prison life. +There was great excitement over it at the time." + +"What happened afterwards?" + +"Lurena left Lima. He went from bad to worse, and finally joined the +ranks. Of course his relatives used their influence, and he was given +a commission; but he never rose very high, I believe." + +"What could he be doing in Lima to-night?" + +"Something rascally, I'll be bound! He may have been to the town, but +I believe the last place he stopped at was over there," and Jose +pointed toward Don Felipe's house. + +"You don't think there's some treachery afoot between them, do you?" + +"Why not? Once a traitor, always a traitor! Montilla means to save +his property at all costs, and to pick up as much as possible in the +general scramble. Should the Spaniards win, your father will say +good-bye to his estates." + +"Isn't your prejudice making you a little unjust, Jose? Remember that +we know nothing against Don Felipe." + +"Oh, don't we? He got the estates into his hands once, and by hook or +by crook he'll get them again!" + +I thought Jose exaggerated the danger, but this meeting with Lurena set +me thinking. The fellow was evidently a Royalist soldier, and on a +secret errand. If Jose's idea was correct, there could be only one +object in his visiting Montilla. + +But our neighbour was not the man to compromise himself unless there +was a distinct chance of success. Had he learned any news favourable +to the Royalist cause? If so, that might account for his action. + +Silently we rode through the sleeping town and along the road to +Callao, where Jose waited at an inn while I did the business which had +brought me to the port. The bay was filled with shipping, and men were +hard at work fitting out the transports for the troops ordered south. + +"Isn't it rather risky to remove so many troops?" I asked the colonel. +"Suppose the enemy should swoop down on the capital?" + +"They're quite welcome to do so," he replied, with a laugh. "Lima is +of no use to us really; it's Callao that matters." + +"Are you going with them, colonel?" + +"No; I stay behind with General Sucre." + +There was one question I wanted very much to ask, but it was long +before I could muster the courage to do so. + +"Colonel," I said at length, "I want to ask a rather queer question, +but I have reasons for it. Do you think the war will end in favour of +the Spaniards?" + +"That depends," he answered, looking at me in surprise. "It certainly +will do so if our people quarrel among themselves, which is what the +enemy reckon on. That is their sheet-anchor, in fact." + +"Would a clever man think they had a chance just now?" + +"Why, yes," replied the colonel thoughtfully; "he might think they +stand an excellent chance." + +"Thank you, sir," I said, and the incident of the preceding night +loomed up larger and uglier than ever. + +Day had fairly broken when I sought Jose for the purpose of returning +home. I said nothing to him of my talk with the colonel, though the +remembrance of it kept running through my mind. On our return I found +my father alone, so I told him my suspicions, and asked his advice. + +"It certainly has an ugly look, Jack," said he; "yet it may be easy of +explanation. For Rosa's sake, I hope Montilla isn't playing false. He +is in our counsels, and knows everything that goes on, so that he could +make the Spaniards pay high for his treachery." + +"And if he is discovered?" + +"He will be shot." + +"And you couldn't save him, if you would?" + +"I couldn't and wouldn't. A man may be a turncoat in good faith, but a +traitor--bah! But after all, my boy, it seems to me we are hunting a +fox that hasn't broken cover. This Lurena, whom Jose recognized, is no +friend of mine; and though he was an ensign in the Royalist army years +ago, it does not follow that he is a Royalist now. Ah, I have it!" +said he, in a tone of relief. + +"What--an explanation?" I asked curiously. + +"Yes; and the right one, I'll wager! It is through Lurena we get our +information of the enemy's doings! No doubt Montilla employs him as a +spy." + +"Then why was he so put out at meeting with us?" + +"Well, naturally he would not want his secret known." + +My father's idea was feasible enough, but it did not altogether satisfy +me; yet what could I do? If Montilla were playing false, I seemed +almost as guilty in not denouncing him. But for Rosa's sake I could +not bring myself to act; and after all, it was merely a matter of +suspicion. + +About three days before the sailing of the expedition I rode home to +spend the evening. Jose met me at the outer gate, and I saw in a +moment that something had happened. + +"What is it?" I asked. "Have you come to meet me?" + +"Yes. Send your horse on; I want to talk to you." + +We walked across the park out of earshot, when Jose said in a whisper, +as if still fearful of being overheard,-- + +"He is here again." + +"He!" said I; "who?" + +"Lurena. He went into Don Felipe's house half an hour ago." + +"Well, what of that? You know what my father said." + +I spoke boldly, as if there could be nothing in the business; but Jose +smiled grimly. + +"Look here, Jack," said he at length, "we can easily settle this +affair. If Montilla is innocent, there's no harm done; if he's +guilty--well, better for one to suffer than thousands." + +"What do you propose?" + +"To waylay this Lurena. He is almost certain to have papers on him +which will tell all we wish to know." + +"I can't do it, Jose. Don Felipe is Rosa's father, and I am reluctant +to bring trouble to her." + +"Would you rather sacrifice your own father and mother?" + +"How dare you ask such a question, Jose?" I cried angrily. + +"I dare anything for my master," said he, unmoved. "If the Spaniards +win, your father is doomed, and you also, while your mother will be a +beggar. See, Jack, I have no right to speak thus, but I can't help it. +With or without your help, I intend getting to the bottom of this +matter." + +I knew Jose of old, and that once his mind was made up, no amount of +threats or coaxing would turn him from his purpose. + +"If your father is right," he continued, "so much the better--the +knowledge will make our minds easy; but I can't and won't stand this +suspense any longer." + +In a sense I was completely in his power. Whether I went or not he +would go, and by himself would most certainly proceed to extreme +measures. + +"Very well, Jose," I said reluctantly, after weighing the matter in my +mind, "have your own way." + +"There is no other," he replied. "Come, let us go to the workshop and +get a few tools." + +I did not know his plan, but it was evident he had thought it all out. +First he made a simple but effective gag; then he selected a long piece +of thin but tough rope, several strips of hide, a large rug, and a tiny +lantern. + +"Now," said he with a chuckle, "I think we shan't have much trouble +with Mr. Lurena." + +On our way to the lane he told me his plan, and gave me full directions +as to my share in it. The night was dark, but we moved quietly, +speaking only in whispers, and straining our ears for the slightest +sound. + +At the bend in the narrow lane Jose unrolled the cord, and I, taking +one end in my hand, sat down in the darkness, laying the gag and a +strip or two of hide on the ground near me. Jose moved to the other +side of the lane, and we let the rope lie slack across the road. Then +we waited in silence for the coming of Lurena, feeling confident that +he would not leave the house till the night was far spent. + +This adventure was not to my liking, and I could only hope that in some +way my presence might be of use to Montilla. Somehow I had not the +slightest hope of my father's idea proving right. My old distrust of +the man returned in full force, and I dreaded what an examination of +Lurena's pockets would reveal. + +Slowly, very slowly, the minutes passed; a whole hour went by, and +still there was no sign of our intended victim. Had he left the house +by the front? I almost hoped he had. Yet, should he escape us this +time, I knew that now Jose had started his quarry he would run it to +earth. + +A second hour passed. He must come soon now or not at all. My limbs +were dreadfully cramped, and I began to get fidgety. Once I coughed +slightly, but a sharp pull at the rope warned me to be silent. At last +the hoof-beats of a horse could be distinctly heard. From the way he +rode, the horseman evidently knew the road well. Nearer and nearer he +came, while we, raising the rope, stretched it tight. The figure of +horse and man loomed up dimly, came close to us; there was a stumble, a +low cry of surprise, and the next moment our man lay on the ground, his +head enveloped in Jose's rug. + +A spectator might easily have mistaken us for professional thieves, we +did the thing so neatly. Almost in less time than it takes to tell, we +had thrust the gag into our victim's mouth, and bound both his legs and +arms. Then, while I removed his weapons, Jose lit the lantern, and we +looked for the incriminating papers. We searched minutely every +article of his clothing and the trappings of his horse, but without +result, except for a scrap of paper hidden in his girdle. + +Jose pounced on this like a hawk, and we examined it together by the +light of the lantern. I could have shouted for joy when at last we +were able to read it: "To all good friends of Peru. Pass the bearer +without question." It was signed by the president, Riva-Aguero, and +bore the official seal. + +"It seems you were right," whispered Jose sulkily. "Help me to raise +the horse, and we will let the fellow go." + +Fortunately the animal was unhurt, and very soon we had it on its feet. +Then we unbound the man, removed the rug from his head, and slipped out +the gag. + +"Mount and ride on," said Jose sternly, disguising his voice. "We wish +you no harm." + +"Give me my pistols, you rascal!" cried Lurena, stamping his foot +angrily. + +"Mount!" repeated Jose, and the click of his own pistol sounded +ominously on the still air. + +There was nothing for it but to obey, and fuming with passion, the +fellow clambered sullenly to the saddle. Shaking his fist at us and +vowing all manner of vengeance, he disappeared in the gloom. + +"I'm glad we came," said I, helping Jose to pick up the things; "that +bit of paper has removed a load from my mind. I thought my father +might be right, but must admit I was rather doubtful." + +"I am in no doubt whatever," responded Jose. "Either the fellow was +too sharp for us, or we made our venture at an unlucky time. If there +was nothing wrong, why did he ride off so quickly?" + +"Well," said I, laughing, "the click of a pistol in one's ears is not +much of an inducement to stay. I think he acted very wisely." + +"If all were square and aboveboard, he would have shouted for help." + +"And drawn more attention to himself! That would have been foolish in +any case. No, no, Jose; the case is clear, I think. We have misjudged +Montilla, and though I don't admire his methods, it is evident he is +working on our side. Let us be just, at least." + +"I wish it were possible," muttered Jose, leaving me to conjecture what +his words exactly meant. + +Strangely enough, my distrust of Don Felipe was as strong as ever next +day. The incident of the spy should have removed any lingering doubt +as to his fidelity, but it did not. Perhaps it was owing to Jose's +influence, but whatever the cause, I still found myself speculating +keenly on our neighbour's honesty. + +Now, mind you, I do not wish to be praised or blamed on false grounds. +What I did afterwards may have been right or wrong--and much, perhaps, +can be said on both sides--but it was not done through either love or +hatred of Don Felipe. True, the man was no friend of mine, but his +daughter was, and I could not bear to think of her suffering through +his misdeeds. + +On the very day that the troops for the south embarked, I met her quite +by accident. She had been for a gallop, and was returning home. Her +cheeks were flushed with the exercise, her eyes were bright and +sparkling; I had never seen her look so beautiful. + +"Well, Juan," she cried saucily, "so you have sent away your band of +ragamuffins? I wonder how many of this lot will come back! Upon my +word, I feel half inclined to pity them." + +This, of course, she said to tease me; because, if our men lacked +something in discipline, they were at least a match for the Spaniards +in bravery. + +"You are pleased to be merry," said I, riding with her to the gate, +"but I hope you do not seriously think that the Spaniards have any +chance of winning." + +"Why not? It is you who live in a fool's paradise Juan. Before long +the king's flag will be floating over Lima again." + +She spoke so confidently that I looked at her uneasily. Was there +really a Royalist plot on foot, and did she know of it? + +Perhaps I acted foolishly, but what I did was done with a good motive. + +"Send your horse on," said I, "and let me walk with you to the house. +There is something on which I wish to speak seriously to you." + +"Is it a penance for my sins?" she laughed, holding up her +riding-habit. "Please don't be too severe, Juan! Now begin, and I +will try to be good." + +"To begin is not so easy as you think, Rosa; but first let me tell you +one thing--the Spaniards will never again be masters of Peru." + +"Pouf!" cried she, tossing her head; "that is rubbish, and says little +for your understanding, Juan." + +"I am sorry you don't believe it; yet it is true, nevertheless. There +are Royalists in Lima who hope otherwise, but they will be +disappointed. More than that, some of them who are working secretly +against us will meet with just punishment." + +"What is that to me? I can't work for the king, being only a girl, but +no one can accuse me of hiding my opinions." + +I could have laughed at that had I been in the mood for merriment. All +Lima knew that Peru did not contain a stancher Royalist than Rosa +Montilla. + +"It is not of you I speak, but of the so-called Patriots, who are +sedulously plotting for the enemy. Already names have been mentioned, +and before long some of these people will be shot." + +I think it was then she first began to suspect my meaning. Her eyes +flashed fire, and looking me full in the face, she cried,-- + +"What is all this to me? What have I to do with your wretched story?" + +My face was hot, my forehead clammy with perspiration. I mumbled out +my reply like a toothless old woman. + +"Don't be angry, Rosa," I said. "I hate to give you pain, +but--but--can't you understand?" + +"No," replied she calmly; "I understand nothing." + +"I wish to warn you," I continued desperately--"to put you on your +guard. There is a rumour--I heard it in camp, but I do not vouch for +its truth--" + +"Come, make an end of this," she said haughtily, "or allow me to +proceed to the house. What is this rumour which seems to have tied +your tongue so?" + +"I will tell you. It is said that the leader of the conspiracy is Don +Felipe Montilla! Let me--" + +"Thank you, Juan Crawford," said she, making a superb gesture of +disdain. "Now go! If our friendship has given you the right to insult +me thus, you have that excuse no longer. Go, I say, before I call the +servants to whip you from the place." + +I tried in vain to offer some explanation. + +"Go, senor, go!" she repeated, and at last I turned sorrowfully away. + +I had done my best and failed. I had lost my friend, and had effected +no good, for I saw by her face that she would think it treason to +mention the subject to her father. And as I rode from the gate, I +wondered whether, after all, we had been mistaken in our judgment. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +"SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!" + +"Aren't you coming, Juan?" + +Two days had passed since my interview with Rosa Montilla, and I was +sitting in my room at the barracks, feeling at enmity with all the +world. + +"It's a pity we've nothing better to do than to make fools of +ourselves," said I savagely, when young Alzura burst in on me excitedly. + +He was dressed to represent some hideous monster that never was known +on sea or land, and in his hand he carried a grotesque mask. + +"Hullo!" he exclaimed; "some one been rubbing you down the wrong way? +Caramba, you are in a towering rage! Pray what has offended your Royal +Highness?" + +"Why, all this tomfoolery! Fancy a masked ball with Canterac in the +mountains ready to swoop down on us at any moment!" + +"The more reason why we should enjoy ourselves while we can. Besides, +you are as bad as the rest: you promised to go!" + +"I have forgotten it, then." + +"Well, you did; so make haste--the carriage is waiting." + +"I have no dress ready," said I coldly. + +"That doesn't matter in the least. Go in your uniform; you look very +well in it." + +"Thanks, I prefer to stay here." + +"You forget the ball is given in our honour! Colonel Miller won't be +too pleased at finding you absent. 'Twill be a slight on our host and +hostess." + +"Very well, if you put it that way, I'll join you in the messroom +shortly," said I indifferently. + +"That's right. Slip your things on sharp; the animals will get +restive." + +Alzura was in high spirits. He loved fun of all kinds, and this ball +was just to his taste. Plaza and Cordova shared our carriage, and both +of them rallied me on my glum looks. + +"Crawford's a bloodthirsty fellow," cried Alzura banteringly--"never +happy unless he's fighting!" + +"That's a libel!" said I warmly; "I'm sick of the whole thing. When +this war's over, I hope never to hear a shot fired again." + +"Be easy," laughed Cordova; "you'll be an old man by then, and too deaf +to hear even the report of a pistol." + +"There may be more truth in that than you think," I observed, bitterly. + +"Never mind, my boy," said Plaza; "you won't hear any shots fired +to-night. There's no great harm in enjoying ourselves for an hour or +two. Here we are! What a crowd outside!--Put on your mask, Alzura; +the people will like the fun." + +There was a roar of laughter from the spectators as Alzura, appeared, +and we went into the hall amidst a round of cheering. Most of the +guests wore some fanciful costume, but several officers, Miller and +O'Brien among them, were in uniform. + +The magnificent _salons_ were illuminated by thousands of lights; the +guests were numerous, and represented most of the beauty and wealth of +Lima. My father and mother had not come, neither did I see Montilla. +Rosa, of course, would have scorned to attend a ball given to the +Patriots. + +Despite the lights and the music and the striking gaiety of the scene, +I could not banish my feeling of dread. I felt, as people say, that +"something was going to happen," and moved listlessly among the +brilliant assembly, wondering what it would be. + +"You look bored, Crawford," remarked O'Brien, coming across to me. "Is +anything the matter?" + +"No, thanks; I'm a bit off colour--that's all." + +"Would you rather be in the mountains?" asked Colonel Miller, who had +joined us. + +"It depends on circumstances, colonel," I replied, trying to smile. + +When they had left me, I fell back on my occupation of gazing +indifferently at the brilliant scene. I could take no interest in it, +nor in the chaff and nonsense of my friends, who tried hard to make me +more like myself. It seemed that in some mysterious way I was waiting +for something, though what I could not imagine. When the summons +actually came, I was not in the least surprised. + +Alzura, who brought it me, had no idea he was assisting at a tragedy, +but, with a merry laugh, exclaimed, "Crawford, there is a lady outside +waiting to see you; she will not leave her carriage." + +"Who is it?" I asked. + +"I don't know; I haven't seen her. A servant gave me the message, and +I set off to find you." + +"Thanks," said I quietly, and crossing the brilliantly-lit _salon_, +took my cap and went into the vast hall. + +Who had come for me--my mother? That was my first thought, but a +moment's reflection showed that it was unlikely. Had there been +anything wrong at home, she would have sent Jose on a swift horse. The +answer to my question came as I stood on the flight of steps leading to +the hall. The crowd of people had dispersed, and only a solitary +carriage with its attendants stood at the door. Recognizing the +Montilla livery in an instant, I ran down the steps with a beating +heart. + +The carriage door was open, and the light from the hall fell full on +the white face of Rosa. + +"What has happened?" I cried. "Why do you look so frightened? Tell +me, quick!" + +Her only answer was to bid me step inside. The footman sprang to his +place, the coachman gathered up the reins, the carriage turned with a +swing, and almost before I realized it we were off at a gallop. The +girl's face was hidden now in darkness, but I had seen it for a moment, +and could not forget it. She was white and scared; her cheeks were +tear-stained, and her eyes full of apprehension and grief. + +Some terrible disaster had happened, but I could not learn what it was. +To all my questions she replied, "Home! home!" and ordered the coachman +to drive faster. Then she burst into a fit of crying, uttering +incoherent words, of which I could make nothing. + +"Is it your father, Rosa?" I asked. "Has anything happened to him?" +At which she cried still more, upbraiding me for I knew not what. + +The gates of the hacienda were wide open. We passed through at a +gallop, and the trembling, foam-covered horses drew up at the front +door. As soon as the carriage came to a standstill, I jumped out and +assisted Rosa to alight. All the servants seemed to have gathered in +the hall. Their faces were white, their eyes wild with dread; some of +them still shivered. Evidently a great calamity had occurred. What +was it? + +Looking around, I noted the absence of Don Felipe. That gave me a clue +to the nature of the disaster. Perhaps he lay dead in his room; +perhaps the government, suspecting him of treachery, had torn him away. +I did not hit on the exact truth, but my conjectures went very near it. + +Rosa's wild fit had passed; she was no longer a weeping girl, but an +imperious mistress. Her tears were dried; she had banished her fear. +There was a light of scorn and command in her eyes. + +"Away, cowards!" she cried. "Do you call yourselves men, and would not +try to save your master? Begone!" and she stamped her foot in passion. + +The servants slunk off abashed, and she led me along the corridor. The +door of her father's room was closed, but she opened it, and said, +"Come in, Juan; see your friends' handiwork!" + +The apartment was in total disorder. Chairs were overthrown; the table +was stripped of its contents; all kinds of articles lay strewn about +the floor: there were very evident signs of a fierce and prolonged +struggle. On one wall was the mark of a bullet, and a corner of the +apartment was splashed with blood. I gazed round eagerly for +Montilla's body, but it was not there. + +"See," said the girl, "he was sitting there when the ruffians burst in +upon him. He fought for his life like a cavalier of old Spain, but the +cowards were too many. They flung themselves upon him like a pack of +wolves, and bore him to the ground." + +"But who were they?" I asked in amazement. "Who did it? Tell me +plainly what happened." + +"Need you ask?" she said coldly. "The ruffians were your friends--your +servants, for all I know." + +"Rosa, you are speaking wildly. I do not wonder at it: this terrible +affair has upset your nerves." + +Then she turned upon me, her eyes blazing with angry scorn. + +"What is it that you wear beneath your tunic, Juan Crawford?" she +cried. "Are you ashamed that it should be seen?" + +At first I did not understand her meaning; then a glimmer of the truth +began to dawn on me, and slowly I drew out the silver key. + +"Do you mean this?" + +"Yes! 'The chief of the Silver Key'--that is what the black-browed +ruffian called himself. Fancy my father, a Spanish gentleman, the +prisoner of a band of half-dressed savages--your friends, Juan +Crawford!" + +"But I know nothing about it," I cried. "These men take no orders from +me. The key was given me by the chief when I myself stood in need of +protection." + +"Nevertheless they are your friends, and they have dragged my father +from his home." + +"But why? Surely there must be a reason! Tell me what they said. Try +to be calm, Rosa; your father's life may depend on your words." + +"I know nothing. How should I? I was in bed. My father sat there +writing when they broke into the house. The servants fled, and hid +themselves like frightened sheep. The cowards! I dressed and ran +here. My father had killed one ruffian, but--but he could not struggle +against so many." + +"I'll wager that he showed himself a brave man." + +"He did; but they overcame him," she continued, speaking more calmly. +"They bound him with cords: he was helpless. I begged the big bandit +to release him; I would have gone on my knees--I, a daughter of the +Montillas!" and she drew herself up proudly. + +"But the chief, Rosa--what did he say?" + +"That my father was charged with a serious offence, and that he must be +tried by the officers of the Silver Key. Think of that, Juan +Crawford!--my father tried for his life by those dirty bandits! Oh, +how I wish I was a man! Then they took him away. I was alone and +friendless; I thought of you, and told the coachman to drive me to +Lima. Then I remembered you were one of these people, and would have +turned back. But my father's life is precious; I would beg it even of +an enemy. O Juan, Juan, save him for me!" + +She broke down utterly. I tried to comfort her, and failed. She did +nothing but cry, "Save him, Juan, save him!" + +[Illustration: "Save him, Juan, save him!"] + +I had no faith in my power to help her, but I could not tell her so. +Why Raymon Sorillo had done this I knew no more than she--unless, +indeed, he had discovered Don Felipe conspiring with the Royalists. In +that case, perhaps, I might prevail on him to spare the prisoner's +life, and to restore him to liberty when the war was over. It was only +a tiny spark of hope, but I made the most of it. + +"Listen, Rosa," I said cheerfully. "I do not belong to this society of +which you speak, but its chief will do much for me. I will go to him +now and use all my influence. I will beg him earnestly to spare your +father's life, and I think he may grant it me. Cheer up, Rosa! In a +few days I shall return and bring your father with me, most likely." + +"O Juan, how shall I ever thank you! Forget the wild words I said to +you. I was distracted with fear and anger; I did not mean them, Juan!" + +"No, no," I answered soothingly; "I have forgotten them already. Now +go to bed; I must start at once. I shall take a horse from your +stables." + +"You have no sword!" + +"I shall not need one. There is no danger for me in the mountains. +The Indians will do me no harm." + +As soon as she had promised to go to her room I returned to the hall, +and calling the servants, sent one to explain matters briefly to my +father, and asking that my mother would come and stay with Rosa for a +while. Then going to the stables, I selected two good horses, and +ordered a groom to help me to saddle them. Sorillo might or might not +listen to my request, but it would be as well to waste no time on the +journey. + +The thought of taking Jose occurred to me, but I put it aside. There +was really no danger in the journey, while if Sorillo would not listen +to an appeal made in my father's name, he was not likely to listen at +all. + +Leading the spare horse, I rode through the grounds, cantered down the +narrow lane, struck the highroad, and turned in the direction of the +mountains. Just where Sorillo might be I could not tell, but I +determined first of all to try the ravine where I had once spent +several days. + +I have said that I had little faith in the success of my mission. Why +the Indians had committed this outrage was a mystery, and I could think +of nothing which would help me to solve it. That Don Felipe had acted +treacherously I could well believe; but why, in that case, did not +Sorillo hand him over to the government? Why should the officers of +the Silver Key take it upon themselves to try him? + +I rode on gloomily till the sun was high in the heavens, halting at a +solitary hut, where the woman gave me food and drink for myself and the +animals. She was kind enough in this matter, but to my questions she +would return no answers. She knew nothing about the war, except that +the soldiers had slain her only son, and her husband had been absent +for over a year. He might be Royalist or Patriot, she did not know, +only she wished people were allowed to live in peace, and to cultivate +their little plots of land. + +Giving her some money, I mounted and rode on, feeling refreshed by the +brief halt. The district was for the most part bare and uninhabited. +Here and there were the remains of a ruined hut, and on the route I +passed the deserted hacienda which had once afforded me a night's +shelter. I met no people, except occasionally a few women and little +children; the men and growing boys were in the mountains or in the +ranks of the army. + +It was evening when I reached the foot of the mountains. My horses +were tired out, and the worst part of the journey still lay before me. +However, the light had not altogether faded, so I began the ascent, +hoping to meet with some of Sorillo's men. As it chanced, I had not +long to wait. + +A sudden "Halt! who are you?" brought me to a stand, and I answered at +random, "A friend of the Silver Key." + +"Are you alone?" asked the voice, with just a tinge of suspicion. + +"Yes," I replied. "I am Juan Crawford, and am looking for Raymon +Sorillo. Can you take me to him?" + +A man stepped from behind a rock, and eyeing me suspiciously, +exclaimed, "Wait, senor. I cannot leave my post, but I will call for a +guide;" and putting his hand to his mouth, he whistled softly. + +The sound was answered by one from higher up, and presently a second +Indian, armed to the teeth, came running down. The two talked together +in whispers, and at last the second man said, "Come this way, senor; I +will lead you to the chief. He will be pleased to see the son of Don +Eduardo." + +Under the circumstances I thought this rather doubtful, but I followed +him up the path. + +"Are you staying in the ravine?" I asked. + +"Yes, senor, for the present." + +"Did you go with the chief to Lima?" + +"Ah, the senor knows of that! The old crocodile showed fight, and +killed a good man; but he is safe enough now." + +"He has not been put to death?" I asked, my forehead clammy with +perspiration. + +"Not yet, senor; he must first be tried." + +"But what have you discovered?" I asked, thinking the fellow might be +able to give me some information as to the cause of Don Felipe's +abduction. + +In this I was mistaken. The man knew, or pretended to know, nothing +about it. The chief had given orders, but not reasons, and had, as +usual, been obeyed unquestioningly. At a word from him his men would +have ridden into Lima and dragged the president from his palace. + +It almost seemed as if Sorillo expected his stronghold to be attacked. +The path was guarded by sentries, and a score of men were stationed at +the entrance to the ravine, They passed us through without trouble, and +before long I found myself in the presence of the chief. + +"You are surprised to see me?" I said briskly. + +"Yes; I thought you were in Lima." + +"I was there last night." + +"You have made a wonderfully quick journey. You must be tired and in +need of refreshment. Come; I can at least offer you a good supper." + +"Not yet, thank you. I want to ask you a question first. What have +you done with Don Felipe Montilla?" + +"The dog is in the hut yonder." + +He spoke with both anger and contempt; his face underwent a sudden +change; for the first time I saw how cruel it could look. My heart +sank as I realized the uselessness of any appeal to him for mercy. +Then I thought of Rosa, and said,-- + +"It is on Don Felipe's account I am here. What has he done? Why has +he been brought here?" + +"If another dared question me like this, I would answer him with a +pistol shot," he cried fiercely; "but I do not forget that you are the +son of Don Eduardo Crawford. Come, let us eat and forget this +business." + +"Will you tell me afterwards?" + +"I will tell you nothing, but you shall hear for yourself. To-morrow +the man will be tried, and if he is found guilty, not all South America +shall save him. But we will try him fairly, and you shall bear witness +to our justice." + +"I want mercy!" said I. + +"You do not know what you ask yet. Wait till the morning. And now +come; you must not be able to accuse me of inhospitality." + +The guerillas led away my horses, and I followed Sorillo to his own +hut, where in a short time a plentiful meal was laid. I was both +hungry and thirsty, yet I had to force myself to eat and drink. +Sorillo made no attempt at conversation, and I did not care to talk. + +When the things were removed, he had a bed made on the floor, and +suggested I should lie down. + +"I am busy," said he. "Most likely I shall be up all night, but that +is no reason why you should not rest. I will have you wakened in good +time in the morning." + +"Thank you," I answered; and as he left the hut I lay down on the bed +and closed my eyes. + +Though tired out, hours passed before I was able to sleep. In the +darkness I could see Rosa's white face, and hear her pitiful cry, "Save +him, Juan, save him for me!" + +What had he done to make Sorillo so angry? Surely he was not so bitter +against every traitor? He had hinted that even I would not beg for +mercy when I knew the truth. It would have to be something very +dreadful, I thought, to make me forget my promise to Rosa. + +And what of Don Felipe? How was he passing the night? Did he know the +charge to be brought against him in this most irregular court? and +would he be able to clear himself? I wondered. + +So thinking and dreaming, between sleep and wakefulness, I lay on the +chief's bed, while the long hours rolled slowly away. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +ROUGH JUSTICE. + +I did not take much rousing in the morning, and even before remembering +the exact circumstances, felt oppressed by the weight of coming sorrow. +I breakfasted alone, Sorillo sending a profuse apology for not being +able to join me, though I was rather glad than otherwise at his absence. + +Leaving the hut, I went into the ravine. There were perhaps a hundred +men in sight, all armed, and apparently waiting for some signal. Their +comrades, no doubt, had been dispatched on an errand, or were guarding +the neighbouring passes. In front of Don Felipe's hut stood a sentry, +and, somewhat to my surprise, I now noticed a second hut, slightly +lower down and similarly guarded. + +"Two prisoners!" I thought. "I wonder who the other is? Sorillo did +not mention him." + +Nearer the head of the ravine some soldiers were at work, and going +towards them I beheld a strange and significant sight. In the side of +the hill was a natural platform, broad and spacious, while round it +stretched in a semicircle a wide stone seat, which the men were +covering with bright red cloth. Below the platform stood a ring of +soldiers with impassive faces. + +I was still wondering what this might mean, when Sorillo, touching my +arm, led me to the centre of the stone seat, saying, "Sit there; you +shall be a witness that the people of the Silver Key treat their +enemies justly." + +Rather reluctantly I took the seat indicated. Sorillo sat next me, and +six officers, ascending the platform, took their places, three on +either side of us. That portion of the seat occupied by the chief was +slightly raised; but this, of course, makes no difference to the story. + +At a signal from Sorillo the door of Don Felipe's hut was opened, and +the prisoner came out escorted by two armed men. The soldiers, opening +to right and left, made way for him, and by means of the boulders, +which served as steps, he climbed to the platform. + +In spite of my prejudice against the man, I rejoiced to see how boldly +he held himself. He appeared to have summoned to his aid all the pride +of his dead-and-gone ancestors. He glanced contemptuously at the +gigantic Sorillo, and meeting my eyes, smiled defiantly. As to the +officers, he did not give them even a look. + +[Illustration: He glanced contemptuously at the gigantic Sorillo.] + +"Thank goodness," said I to myself, "no one can call Rosa's father a +coward!" + +Then Sorillo began to speak, clearly and distinctly, but with no note +of anger in his voice. + +"Don Felipe Montilla," he said, "you are brought here by order of the +Society of the Silver Key." Don Felipe's lips curled as if in +amusement. "It is charged against you that you, having taken the oath +of loyalty to the government, have since been in traitorous +communication with the Royalist leaders. Do you deny or admit the +charge?" + +Don Felipe shrugged his shoulders carelessly, saying, "A truce to your +mummery! Do you think I would plead for my life to a band of +cut-throats? What care I for your society?" + +I thought this outburst would provoke his captors beyond measure, but, +as far as I could judge, it produced no effect at all. They sat quite +still, as if the remarks had been addressed to others. + +"It is our custom," continued Sorillo, "to give those brought before us +every chance to defend themselves. We are not lawyers; we do not +juggle with words; our one desire is to get at the truth." + +"By St. Philip," muttered Montilla, "this is the last place I should +have thought to find it in!" + +"For this reason," continued the chief, ignoring the sarcastic +interruption, "the story shall be told plainly, and then you will +understand exactly what you are charged with. Three nights ago we +stopped a man returning from Lima. Many times he had gone to and fro +unmolested, protected by a pass from Riva-Aguero. At last he was +recognized by one of our men as Pardo Lurena, an utterly worthless man, +who had already changed sides several times during the war." + +"He would have made a good recruit for you," remarked Montilla. + +"Suspecting this man, we had him watched," continued the chief, again +passing over the interruption, "and found that always he went to your +house, senor, returning under the cover of night. We knew you to be an +excellent Patriot, yet the circumstance made us uneasy. At length we +decided to ignore the president's passport. Lurena was stopped and +searched, with this result," and he flourished a letter before the +prisoner. + +Don Felipe must have known by now how helpless his case was; but he +only smiled. In truth, at this crisis of his life he showed no want of +pluck. + +"There is much in this letter," said the chief mercilessly. "It +contains a full list of the troops just dispatched to the south, and of +those still remaining in Lima, with an exact statement as to the +quantity of their stores and ammunition. It describes their position, +and advises General Canterac how he can best enter Lima and seize +Callao. It provides also a list of those who will join him, and +stipulates that the writer shall keep not only his own estates, but +shall be given those of which he has lately been deprived." + +At this last revelation Don Felipe changed colour somewhat, and +withdrew his eyes from my face. + +"This letter," said Sorillo, "came from your house; it is signed F. M., +and I charge you with having written it. Can you deny that it is in +your handwriting?" + +The prisoner seemed to have regained self-possession, for looking +steadily at Sorillo, he exclaimed, "A gentleman of Spain does not +answer the questions of a mountain robber." + +Passing the letter to me, Sorillo said, "You know this man's +handwriting; perhaps you will satisfy yourself that he wrote this +letter?" + +"No," said I coldly, thrusting the paper away; "I will be neither judge +nor witness in this case." + +"Very well," answered the chief; "let the second prisoner be brought +forward." And two men immediately fetched Pardo Lurena from his hut. + +He was still a young man, but looked old. His eyes were shifty and +cunning, his lips full and thick; he did not seem to be at all the kind +of man to play so daring a game. Don Felipe looked at him so +scornfully that he turned away his face in confusion. He gave his +answers clearly, however, and told the story from beginning to end +without a tremor. + +It was as Sorillo had said. The fellow admitted being a Royalist spy +employed in carrying messages between General Canterac and Montilla. +The Don, he declared, had procured him the pass signed by Riva-Aguero, +and had given him the letter now in the guerilla chief's possession. + +Don Felipe never once interrupted him either by word or gesture; to +look at him, one would have thought he was merely a spectator, with no +interest in the matter one way or another. But when at last the tale +ended, and Sorillo called upon him to speak, his attitude changed. + +"Do your murders your own way," he cried defiantly. "If the farce +pleases you, play it. What has it to do with me? When I am accused of +crime by the government of my country, I will answer." + +"Don Felipe is right, Sorillo," I interrupted. "If he has done wrong, +let him be brought before a proper tribunal. Whether he be innocent or +guilty, if you kill him you commit murder. You and your followers have +no right to punish him." + +"In the case of a traitor we take the right," answered Sorillo +drily.--"But there is a further charge, Don Felipe Montilla, more +serious still. You have been proved false to your country; I accuse +you also of being false to your friend." + +Hitherto, I am bound to admit, the guerilla chief had acted like a +perfectly impartial judge; now there was a ring of anger in his voice +and a dangerous glitter in his eyes. As to Montilla, I could hardly +suppress an exclamation of surprise at the change in his appearance. +No longer boldly erect, he stood with drooping head, pale cheeks, and +downcast eyes. In the first act he had behaved like a man of spirit; +the second he began like a craven. + +"Listen!" exclaimed Sorillo sternly, and his first words told me what +would follow. "For many years there has lived in Lima a man who loves +the Indians. He saw that they were treated as dogs, and because of his +great pity he resolved to help them. To this end he worked day and +night, making many enemies among the rulers of the country. They tried +to turn him from his purpose, now with threats, again with offers of +heavy bribes: he would not be moved. So badly were the Indians treated +that it mattered little whether they lived or died. They banded +together, procured arms and ammunition, and determined to fight for +their liberty. Their friend sent them word that the attempt was +hopeless; but they were very angry, and would not listen. Then he left +his home to speak to them himself, and endeavour to dissuade them from +their purpose." + +Montilla had not once raised his head, and now his limbs quivered. As +for me, I sat listening with fascinated interest. + +"Side by side with this friend of the Indians," the chief continued, +"there lived a Spanish gentleman, who told the viceroy falsely that his +neighbour was going to the mountains to raise the standard of +rebellion. The viceroy, who was frightened, sent soldiers to seize +him. Second in command of the party was a lieutenant, young in years +but old in crime. To him this Spaniard went secretly. 'If this man +should be killed in the scuffle,' said he, 'you can come to me for five +thousand dollars.' + +"The lieutenant did his best to earn the money, and thought he had +succeeded. As it chanced, however, his victim did not die, but his +estates were confiscated and given to the man who had betrayed him." + +The speaker stopped. All was still; save for the leaping waters of the +torrent, no sound was to be heard. I glanced at Montilla: he was +deathly pale, and on his forehead stood great beads of perspiration, +which, with his bound hands, he was unable to wipe away. + +"Shall I tell you who these men were?" asked Sorillo. "One is Don +Eduardo Crawford; the others stand here," and he pointed to the +prisoners. "Listen to your accomplice, Felipe Montilla, if you care to +hear the story repeated." + +Again Lurena gave his evidence glibly. I think he had no sense of +shame, but only a strong desire to save his life. He might not have +committed the deed for the sake of the money alone, he said, but he +hated my father for having cast him into prison. + +It was poor evidence on which to try a man for his life, yet no one +doubted Montilla's guilt. There he stood with trembling limbs and +ashen face--truly a wretched figure for a cavalier of Spain! His +courage had broken down completely, and to all the questions put by his +self-appointed judge he answered no word. + +At length Sorillo asked his officers for their verdict, and with one +consent they pronounced him "Guilty!" + +"It is a true verdict," exclaimed Sorillo; "any other would be a +lie.--And now, Felipe Montilla, listen to me for the last time. You +have been proved a traitor to your country, and that alone merits +death; but this other crime touches the members of the Silver Key more +closely. When the great men of Peru called the Indians dogs, Don +Eduardo was our friend. He took our side openly, encouraged us, +sympathized with us, pitied us. And you tried to slay him! not in fair +fight, mind you, and only because you coveted his possessions. For +that you die within forty-eight hours, as surely as the sun will rise +to-morrow!" And all his hearers applauded. + +The condemned man still made no reply, uttered no appeal for mercy, but +stood as one dazed. But I thought of the daughter who loved him so +well, and sprang to my feet. + +"Hear me!" I cried excitedly. "If Don Felipe has done wrong, it is +against my father. Do you think he will thank you for killing his +enemy? Is that his teaching? You know it is not; you know that he +would forgive him freely--would beg his life from you on his bended +knees. If you really love my father, if you feel that he deserves your +gratitude, spare this man's life. If he has sinned he will repent. I +have come here for him. Do not let me go back alone. Am I to say to +my father, 'You are foolish in thinking the Indians care for you; they +care nothing! I asked of them a boon in your name, and they refused +it'? Raymon Sorillo, I appeal to you, give me this man's life for my +father's sake!" + +I looked at him earnestly, hoping to find a spark of mercy in his eyes. +Alas, there was none! He was hard as iron, cold as ice; on that day, +at least, there was no pity in him. + +"You are foolish," said he; "you are like a child who cries for the +moon. Set this man free and he will immediately begin his old games of +deceit and trickery. He cannot help himself. It is his nature, as it +is a spider's to weave its web. Your father's happiness depends on +this traitor's death." + +I heard him patiently, and then renewed my appeal. It was quite +useless. + +"Remove the prisoners," said he; and at a sign the troops marched off, +the officers dispersed, and none save we two remained on the platform. +For a long time neither spoke. I was thinking of Rosa anxiously +awaiting my return. I had bidden her hope, and there was no longer any +hope. I made no attempt to deceive myself in this respect. Sorillo +would do much for me, but this one thing he would not do. I dreaded +the thought of returning to Lima. What would Rosa say and do when she +heard of her father's shameful death? Perhaps that part might be +spared her; she need not learn the whole truth. I must invent some +story which would save her the knowledge of his double treachery. + +At last I turned to the chief, saying, "Will you allow me to speak with +Don Felipe in private? He has a daughter at home; he may wish to send +her a last message." + +"He is not worth your kindness; but do as you please." + +I thanked him, and walked toward the hut in which Don Felipe was +confined. The sentry let me pass without protest, and opening the door +I entered. + +The sight before me was a pitiful one. The wretched prisoner sat on a +wooden bench in the dreary hovel. His arms were bound, but he was free +to walk about if he so wished. At the click of the latch he raised his +head, but seeing me dropped it again quickly, as if ashamed to meet my +gaze. + +"Don Felipe," I began, "have you any message for your daughter?" + +Instead of answering my question, he himself asked one. + +"Will that brigand really put me to death?" he said. + +"I am afraid so. I have begged hard for your life, but in vain." + +Looking at me curiously, he exclaimed, "I cannot understand why you +should wish to save me!" + +"For Rosa's sake! When you were carried off, she came to me, and I +promised if it were possible to bring you back with me." + +"Then you do not believe the story you heard to-day, about--about--" + +"My father? Yes, I believe it; but that is no reason why I should be +unkind to Rosa. Poor girl! 'twill be hard enough for her to lose you." + +"Is there no way of escape?" + +I shook my head. "An armed sentry stands outside; a hundred soldiers +are in the ravine; the path is closely watched. I would help you if it +were possible." + +"It will be dark to-night." + +"That would help us little. Even if you escaped from the hut, you +would be challenged at every dozen yards. No, I can see no way out." + +I think that at this time he began to fully realize the danger he was +in. He had a hunted look in his eyes, and again the perspiration stood +on his forehead. Fear was fast killing shame, and he seemed to care +nothing that I was the son of the man whom he had tried to murder. + +"Juan," said he, "can't you make an excuse to visit me after dark?" + +"I should think so," I replied. + +"And will you cut these cords?" + +"If you think it will help you at all." + +"Leave that to me," said he, speaking almost hopefully. "By St. +Philip, I shall escape the ruffian yet!" + +What his plan was he did not tell me, but it seemed to please him +greatly. He even laughed when I again mentioned Rosa, and said he +would carry his message himself. And with hope there came back to him +something of the old cunning and smoothness of speech for which he was +so noted. + +"I am sorry you were misled by that preposterous tale," said he softly. +"Pardo Lurena is a villain, but we will unmask him. Of course, there +was a little truth in his story, but so twisted and distorted that it +could not be recognized. Your father will understand, however, and +even you will come to see that I am not greatly to blame. A little +thoughtlessness, Juan, and a desire to help a friend--no more; but that +can wait. You will be sure to come, Juan; you will not fail me?" + +"I will do my very best, Don Felipe, for your daughter's sake." + +Wishing him farewell, I returned to the chief's hut. He was not there, +so I lay down to think out the situation; but my head was in a hopeless +muddle. I went into the ravine again, and, watching the soldiers, +wondered how the unhappy prisoner hoped to escape them. + +As it chanced, his plan was doomed to disappointment. Toward the end +of the afternoon I stood chatting with Sorillo and some of his +officers, when a messenger rode up the ravine. His horse had travelled +far and fast, while he looked worn out with fatigue. + +Springing to the ground, he saluted, while the chief cried, "What news, +Sanchez? it should be worth hearing!" + +"I think it is," replied the man, with a significant smile. "General +Canterac is marching on Lima at the head of a Spanish army." + +"How many men has he?" + +"Nine thousand, perhaps ten--horse, foot, and guns. The advance-guard +is not far off." + +"Thanks, Sanchez.--Let the men assemble, Barros: a dozen to stay here, +the rest to follow me. Has Cerdena sent word to Lima? Good. He knows +his business.--Juan, you will just have time to ride clear, and not +much to spare. No doubt Canterac has sent some of his troops by the +near cut." + +All was bustle and activity in the ravine. Officers issued commands, +troopers saddled their horses, muskets were seen to, an extra supply of +ammunition was served out, and in a very short time everybody save the +few men left to guard the ravine was ready to march. + +"What can your handful of men do against Canterac's army?" I asked +Sorillo as we rode away. + +"Not much beyond cutting off a few stragglers," he replied, smiling; +"but we shall obtain information of which our leaders in Lima seem to +stand badly in need." + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN. + +Since these events happened I have asked myself many times whether I +did right or wrong, and even now I scarcely know how to decide. Those +who blamed me said I was Sorillo's guest, and should not have abused +his confidence. Others urged that I was bound, if possible, to prevent +him putting a man to death unlawfully. All, however, agreed that none +but a madman would have embarked on so preposterous an enterprise. + +The idea occurred to me suddenly. The guerillas, split up into groups, +had gone, some this way, some that, to watch the movements of the +Royalist troops. Sorillo had kept me company till we cleared the pass, +when he, too, with a word of farewell, rode away. It was now dusk, +and, as the chief had truly said, there was no time to waste; yet I did +not move. Right in my path, with outstretched arms and pitiful, +beseeching face, stood Rosa Montilla. I knew it was but the outcome of +a fevered brain; yet the vision seemed intensely real. + +The girl's eyes looked at me reproachfully, her lips moved as if in +speech. I fancied I could hear again her parting cry, "O Juan, save +him!" + +I asked myself impatiently what more could be done. I had tried my +best and failed, and there was an end of it. Besides, the words of the +chief rang in my ears in ominous warning: Don Felipe could not be +trusted! To set him free was like giving liberty to a venomous snake; +his hatred would now be all the more bitter in that he had struck and +failed. + +Why should I add to my father's danger? The fellow had tried to slay +him once; the next time he would make no mistake. I would make no +further effort to help such a traitor; I would ride on. But again the +beseeching face of the girl stopped me, and again I was moved to think +how I could aid the miserable prisoner. Like a flash of lightning I +thought of the silver key. _That_ would unlock his prison door. +Although I fully believed in Don Felipe's guilt, I remembered he made +no effort to defend himself. He would not admit Sorillo's right to try +him. Before a lawful judge he might be able to vindicate his actions +in some way; at least he should have the chance to do so. Thus +thinking, I turned back in the direction of the ravine. + +Half of the sentries, I knew, had been withdrawn to ride with their +chief, but the number on guard mattered little; the silver key was an +all-powerful talisman. I rode slowly, not wishing to tire the horses, +to whose speed and strength we might later be indebted for our lives. +I thought, too, it would serve my purpose better to reach the ravine in +the dead of night, when the men would be sleepy and less likely to ask +inconvenient questions. + +I was stopped at the entrance to the pass, but not for long. The +Indians who had seen me ride out with their chief had no suspicion of +my object. + +"Where is the chief?" asked the officer. "Have the Royalists got clear +of the mountains?" + +"No; they are still in the defiles. But I am in a hurry; I have come +for the Spanish prisoner Montilla." + +Fortunately this officer had not attended the trial of Don Felipe, and +Sorillo was not the man to give reasons for his orders. My main +difficulty would lie with the sentry at the door of the hut, but I did +not think he would disobey the authority of the Silver Key. + +In any case, boldness was my best policy; so I clattered up the ravine, +stopping hardly a yard from the astonished sentry. + +"Quick, man!" I cried, springing to the ground; "are you asleep? Open +the door. I have come back for the prisoner. Is he still bound? +Good. Can you tie him to this horse so that he cannot escape?" + +"Yes, senor, if the chief wishes it. But, pardon me, senor, I have no +orders." + +"Orders!" cried I angrily; "what would you? I have but just left the +chief; and is not this" (producing the silver key) "sufficient +authority? Am I to tell the chief that he must come himself for the +prisoner?" + +"No, no, senor; but I am only a simple soldier. I must not open the +door unless my officer bids me." + +"He is below," I said; "we cannot pass without his permission. And I +must hurry, or it will be too late. Quick, drag the fellow out and +bind him firmly on the horse; then come with me." + +The sentry had no inkling of the truth, and, never dreaming that his +officer could be deceived, opened the door. Then the prisoner, whether +from fear or from cunning I could not tell, acted in such a manner that +no one would think I was helping him to escape. + +He refused to stir an inch from his bench, and kicked vigorously when +the sentry tried to seize him. Then he yelled so loudly that the +officer came running up in alarm. + +"The bird has no wish to leave his cosy nest," laughed he.--"Give me +the rope, Pedro, and get a gag; the chief won't want to hear that +music.--Now, senor, if you'll bear a hand we'll hoist him up.--Be +still, you villain, or you'll get a knock on the head.--Had not one of +my fellows better go with you to guard this wild beast, senor?" + +Now, from the officer's point of view this was a very sensible +proposal, and one which I dared not oppose for fear of exciting +suspicion. + +So I answered carelessly, "A good thought, and I am obliged to you; +though," with a laugh, "the prisoner won't be able to do much mischief +when you have finished with him." + +"No, indeed; he'll be pretty clever if he can get these knots undone," +replied the officer complacently.--"Now, the gag, Pedro. Quick, or +he'll spoil his voice in the night air.--There, my pretty bird! you +shall sing later on." + +All this occupied time, and I was in dread lest dawn should break +before we left the ravine. Then we had to wait till Pedro had saddled +his horse; and I watched the sky anxiously. At last we were ready, and +bidding Pedro ride in front, I took leave of the unsuspecting officer. + +"A safe journey," he cried. "I should like to know what Sorillo means +to do with the fellow." + +"You'll hear all about it when the troops return," said I, laughing and +hurrying after Pedro. + +Thus far the venture, with one exception, had succeeded admirably. The +prisoner was out of his cage, and would soon be clear of the pass. +Then I should only have Pedro to deal with. His company was a +nuisance, but it must be borne with for the present; later I should +have to find means to get rid of him. + +We rode slowly down the narrow path, Pedro in front, Don Felipe and I +abreast. The poor fellow was in a hapless plight. The gag hurt his +mouth, and the cords cut into his flesh. Had we been alone, I should, +of course, have done something to ease his pain; but as long as Pedro +was there, this was out of the question. + +"Anyhow, it's better than being shot," I thought; "and really the +wretch deserves it all." + +We passed the sentries without trouble; but at the bottom of the pass +my difficulties began again. + +"I suppose the chief has gone to San Mateo, senor?" said Pedro +questioningly. "That is the best place to watch from." + +This was an awkward question, as I had intended making a straight dash +for Lima; but it would not do to arouse the man's suspicions. We were +too close to the mountains to run any unnecessary risks, and if Pedro +showed fight there, our chance of escape was gone. + +So I answered, "Yes," and rode along, wondering what would come of it. +Every step led us into greater danger. We might run into the arms of +the guerillas, in which event Don Felipe's fate was certain; or be +stopped by the Royalists, when I should be made prisoner. + +Day was now breaking, and with the strengthening light I began to see +our position more clearly. It was not promising. We were farther from +Lima than we had been when in the ravine, and were making straight for +the mountains again. Another half-hour's riding would cut us off from +escape completely. What could be done? There was no time to lose, and +I must hit on a plan at once. The simplest and perhaps the only one +likely to be successful I set aside without a moment's hesitation. Not +for a dozen men's lives, my own included, would I harm the unsuspecting +man whom chance had thrown into my power. I might, however, frighten +him into obedience. As far as I could see, it was that or nothing, and +the attempt must be made at once. + +So, with beating heart and greatly doubting what would be the issue, I +whipped out my pistol, and, levelling it at him, said quietly, "Move +your hand to your musket, and you are a dead man! do as I bid you, and +no harm will befall you. Leave your gun, get down from the saddle, and +hold your hands above your head." + +In the circumstances it was a risky experiment, because if the man +should guess the truth I was entirely at his mercy. For him there was +no more danger than if my pistol were a piece of wood. + +"But, senor--" he began, staring at me in surprise. + +"Get down!" I repeated sternly. "It is my order. Don't waste time, or +I shall be obliged to fire." + +Pedro was a brave man; indeed, all the Indians in Sorillo's band held +their lives cheap. He did not exactly understand what was happening, +yet he seemed to think that all was not right. + +"The chief!" he exclaimed. "Does he--" + +"Get down!" I cried once more, brandishing my weapon. + +With a thundering shout of "The Silver Key! Help for the Silver Key!" +he clubbed his musket and dashed straight at me, regardless of the +levelled pistol. + +One moment's pressure on the trigger and he would have dropped to the +ground helpless, but I refrained; instead, I pulled the rein, and my +horse swerved sharply, though not in time. The musket descended with a +thud; the pistol slipped from my nerveless fingers; I seemed to be +plunging down, down beneath a sea of angry waters. + +How long I lay thus, or what happened during that time, I do not know; +but I awoke to find myself beside a roaring fire, and to hear the hum +of many voices. A soldier, hearing me move, came and looked into my +face. + +"Where am I?" I asked anxiously. + +"Not far from Lima," said he. "A few hours since you weren't far from +the next world. How did you get that broken head?" + +I tried hard to remember, but could not; the past was a total blank. + +"Well, well, never mind," exclaimed the man kindly. "Try to sleep; you +will be better in the morning." + +With the coming of dawn I saw that I was in the midst of a large camp. +Thousands of soldiers wrapped in their ponchos lay motionless before +smouldering fires. Presently there was a blowing of bugles, and the +still figures stirred to life. Officers rode hither and thither +issuing orders, the men ate their scanty rations, the cavalry groomed +and fed their horses--there were all the sights and sounds connected +with an army about to march. + +Then the infantry formed in battalions, the horsemen mounted, bugles +sounded in numerous places; there was a cracking of whips, the creaking +of wheels, and all began to move slowly forward. Soon but a few men +remained, and it seemed that I had been forgotten. + +At length a man came to me. He was dressed in uniform, but his words +and actions proved him to be a surgeon. + +"Feel better?" he asked. "Can you eat something? I can only give you +army food; but that will fill up the hollows. Now let me look at the +damage. Faith, I compliment you on having a thick skull. A thinner +one would have cracked like an egg-shell. Don't try to talk till +you've had something to eat." + +"Just one question," I said faintly. "Who are the soldiers just moved +out?" + +"Why, General Canterac's troops. I see you belong to the other side. +But don't worry; we shan't hurt you." + +"Then I am a prisoner?" + +"That's always the way--one question leads to a dozen, Yes, I suppose +you are a prisoner; but that's nothing very terrible," and he hurried +off to procure food and drink for me. + +Later in the day he came to have another talk, and I learned something +of what had happened. + +"We crossed the mountains almost without a check," he began. "The +Indians did us some damage; but they were only a handful, and we saw +none of your fellows." + +"But how came I to be here?" + +"Ah! that's a queer story. A party of scouts screening our left flank +had just reached the base of the mountains, when they heard a fellow +yelling at the top of his voice. By the time they got in sight, the +man had evidently knocked you down, and was off at a mad gallop." + +"Alone?" I asked. + +"No; that's the strange part of it. He was leading a spare horse which +carried something on its back. Our men could not get a good view, but +it looked like a full sack, or a big bundle of some sort. They +followed rapidly, and were wearing the runaway down when the Indians +appeared in force on the hills. Of course that stopped the pursuit, +and after picking you up, they came on with the army." + +My memory returned now, and I understood what had happened. Pedro had +escaped, and carried Don Felipe with him to the Indians of the Silver +Key. + +"Poor Rosa!" I sighed; "it is all over now. She will never see her +father again. Sorillo will take care that he doesn't escape a second +time." + +My thoughts dwelt so much on this that I took little interest in the +rest of the doctor's conversation. He was very jubilant, though, I +remember, about his party's success, telling me that in a short time +General Canterac would be master of Callao, and that the Patriots had +nowhere the slightest chance of victory. + +"What will be done with me?" I asked. + +"I shall send you with our sick to the hospital at Jauja. The air +there is bracing, and will help you to recover more quickly." + +"Thank you," I said, though really caring very little at that time +where I was sent. + +Next day I was placed with several Spanish soldiers in an open wagon, +one of a number of vehicles guarded by an escort of troopers. My +friendly surgeon had gone to Lima; but I must say the Spaniards behaved +very well, making no difference between me and their own people. + +As to the journey across the mountains, I remember little of it. The +worthy Pedro had made such good use of his musket that my head was +racked with pain, and I could think of nothing. Most of the sick +soldiers were also in grievous plight, and it was a relief to us all +when, after several days' travelling, the procession finally halted in +Jauja. + +Here we were lifted from the carts and carried to a long whitewashed +building filled with beds. They were made on the floor, and many of +them were already occupied. Accommodation was found for most of us, +but several had to wait until some of the beds became vacant. + +Two or three doctors examined the fresh patients, and one forced me to +swallow a dose of medicine. Why, I could not think, unless he wanted +me to know what really vile stuff he was capable of concocting. + +I shall pass quickly over this portion of my story. For weeks I lay in +that wretched room, where dozens of men struggled night and day against +death. Some snatched a victory in this terrible fight, but now and +again I noticed a file of soldiers reverently carrying a silent figure +from one of the low beds. + +By the end of September I was strong enough to get up, and the doctors +pronouncing me out of danger, I was taken to another building. This +was used as a prison for captured officers of the Patriot forces, and +the very first person to greet me as I stepped inside the room was the +lively Alzura. + +"Juan Crawford," cried he, "by all that's wonderful! From the ballroom +to the prison-house! There's a splendid subject for the moralist. +Where have you been, Juan? your people think you are dead. Miller is +frantic; all your friends in Lima are in despair." + +"Do you know anything of Don Felipe Montilla?" I asked. + +"Montilla? No; there is a mystery about him too. It is given out that +he was abducted by brigands, but some people whisper another story." + +"What?" + +"That he fled to the Royalists, my boy, as I prophesied he would." + +"Then you were a false prophet." + +"Then I ask the worthy Don's pardon for suspecting him without cause. +But how did you get here?" + +"I was brought in a wagon." + +"Lucky dog! Always lucky, Juan. I had to walk," and he showed me his +feet, naked, and scored with cuts. + +After sympathizing with him, I asked him how events were shaping. + +"Canterac did not capture Callao, as he hoped, and is now back in the +highlands. Many things have happened, however; let me be your +chronicle. Where shall I start?" + +"From the day that Canterac swooped down on Lima." + +"That was nothing. He sat down in the capital; we hugged the guns at +Callao and looked at him. When he got tired he took himself off, and +we returned to our quarters." + +"Nothing very exciting in that." + +"You are right, my boy. Your judgment is marvellous. But we had a day +of excitement shortly before I came on this trip. You should have been +there. Lima went stark mad! The guns at Callao thundered for hours; +the capital was decked with flags; the people cheered till they were +hoarse; there was a very delirium of joy. It was the greeting of Peru +to her saviour--her second saviour, that is." + +"Why can't you speak plainly? Do you mean Bolivar has come?" + +"Your second question, Juan, shows there was little need for the first. +Yes, Bolivar, the protector or emperor, or whatever name the new master +of Peru cares to be known by. The hero of South America has arrived; +let the Spaniards tremble!" + +"For any sake give your tongue a rest. What has Santa Cruz done?" + +"What has Santa Cruz done? A very great deal, my boy, I assure you. +He has lost his whole army--men and horses, guns and ammunition, wagons +and stores. What do you think of that, young man? You will be +compelled to swallow Bolivar after all." + +"Let us change the subject. Tell me about yourself." + +"Ah," said he, "that is indeed a great subject! Your discernment is +worthy of praise. I can talk on that topic for hours without tiring. +Where shall I begin?" + +"Where is the jailer?" + +"Why?" + +"That I may ask him to send me back to the hospital." + +"Juan, you are a fraud! But hark! that is the bell calling us to +dinner. Blessed sound! Come with me to the banquet." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +AN OPEN-AIR PRISON. + +There were fifteen or sixteen Patriot officers of all ranks in the +prison, and I found most of them jolly fellows. We lived all together +in two large rooms, one of which was used as a bedroom. In addition, +we were allowed at certain hours to walk up and down a long corridor, +so that we got a fair amount of exercise. + +Alzura and a few of the other youngsters spent much time in planning +methods of escape, and they were glad of any suggestions I could offer. +As a rule, our arrangements ended in talk. The viceroy put his trust +rather in keen-eyed sentries than in locks, bolts, and strong walls. +An armed man stood on either side of the door leading to the corridor, +which was itself guarded by a chain of soldiers. At the yard-door, +through which we were not permitted to pass, an officer with several +men always stood on duty. + +Three or four times every week, in the middle of the night, an +inspecting officer would summon us to get up and answer our names. +This was a great nuisance, as it disturbed our sleep, but fortunately +it did not take long. We slept on the floor fully dressed and wrapped +in our ponchos, so there was no delay in making our toilets. + +We were given sufficient food--of a sort; but we had no amusements of +any kind, and absolutely nothing to do. Our sole occupation was +walking round and round the room like caged bears, and chatting about +the war. + +Most of us voted Alzura a bore in this respect, but I think on the +whole he did us good. His was the first voice heard in the morning, +and the last at night. He was equally ready to talk with ensign or +general, and on any subject under the sun. He would jest or laugh, or, +I really believe, weep with you at a moment's notice. He would +instruct the artillery officer in the management of guns, advise the +cavalryman how to ride, and show the general the best way to order a +battle. Alzura was a genius, and most of us were only now beginning to +find it out. + +When the talk turned to the best way of escaping, he was delightful. +Never was there a fellow with such ingenious schemes; only, as it +happened, they were not quite suitable to our circumstances. Had we +been in an underground cell, with massive walls and an iron door, he +would have had us out in less than no time. When I mentioned casually +that we were not so placed, he would reply good-humouredly, "No, dear +boy, but some day you may be, and then my instructions will come in +handy. But, as you say, the position at present is slightly different. +First, we have to pass the sentry on this side of the door. I suppose +we are all agreed on that point? Well, then, having got rid of him--" + +"But we haven't got rid of him!" + +"No; quite true. I can see him from here, and a very surly fellow he +looks. I wonder the officer doesn't give us some one with a more +amiable face. However, that's outside the argument. Now, supposing we +had disposed of this fellow, the question is, what to do next." + +"But we haven't disposed of him!" + +"Just so; but we ought to be prepared in case he is withdrawn, or +anything of that sort, you know. However, if you won't follow my +advice, it's no use giving it. It's simply folly to go on talking." + +"I felt convinced you would say something sensible before you had +finished," laughed one of the youngsters gaily. + +Alzura laughed too, and gave the fellow a playful tap on the head, for +he loved a joke whoever chanced to be the victim. + +That same evening he told us of a fresh plan--for Alzura was as full of +plans as an egg is of meat--and before he came to the end, we were +laughing so uproariously that the sentry ordered us to make less noise. + +"I daresay you fellows have wasted the day as usual," he began; "that +is the worst of having some one to do your thinking for you. I really +wish you wouldn't depend so much on me." + +"That's the penalty of being so clever, my boy. The world always +overworks its greatest men. It's quite reasonable, after all." + +"But it's hard on me, nevertheless," observed Alzura; "though I suppose +one ought not to complain of being a genius. Well, I've been working +my brains all day--" + +"Your what?" + +"Oh, shut up, and let me speak! I've hit on a lovely plan: it will +work like a machine; it can't possibly fail. We have been on the wrong +tack, trying to meet force with force. What we want is craft. Do you +follow me, boys?" + +"Yes, yes; go on! Let's hear the lovely plan." + +"When you do hear it, you will wonder why no one thought of it before. +It is simple beyond belief, almost." + +"A true mark of genius, Alzura. But we're waiting to hear this +infallible plan." + +"Well, look here. Just study that sentry's face a minute. Who is he +like? Don't know? Why, isn't he just like our friend Crawford?" + +The little group laughed with delight, while I said reproachfully, "Oh, +come, Alzura!" + +"Not so much the face, dear boy," said he, "but the figure. He's just +your height and build; you will admit that. And his clothes will fit +you, Juan. Now, do you see?" + +I confessed to being still in a fog, so he continued his explanations. + +"This is the idea," said he. "You and Barriero--Barriero is +wonderfully strong--stroll down to him presently. Pretend you want to +ask him a question. That will put him off his guard. What happens? +You spring on him suddenly, clap a rag in his mouth, and with our help +hold him so that he cannot struggle. Then you exchange clothes and +stand on guard. When the relief comes you march away. Understand?" + +"Nothing could be simpler," I murmured, while we were all nearly +choking with suppressed laughter. + +"Grand, isn't it?" said he. "I knew you would be struck."--I +was.--"Then we'll serve the next fellow the same way, and the next, and +so on till we are all out. After that we'll seize the viceroy--" + +But by this time we were convulsed with laughter, and the sentry, in no +very gentle tones, advised us to be quiet. + +"It's a great scheme, Alzura," I said presently, "a wonderful scheme, +but it can't be carried out. Suppose the trick was discovered after my +escape, all you fellows would be punished sharply, and I shouldn't like +that." + +"No," said he, in a disappointed tone; "I thought your scruples might +stand in the way." + +Alzura's plan was still fresh in our minds when the Royalists showed us +how to pass the sentry. One morning, directly after breakfast, an +officer entered the room with a number of soldiers, and we were ordered +to stand in line. Producing a paper, he read a list of the names, and +each man, as he answered, was told to step forward. Then we were +marshalled in twos, the left arm of one man being tied to the right of +the other. My companion was Alzura, and very disgusted he looked at +the treatment. + +"What are they going to do with us?" he asked. + +"I don't know. Perhaps they heard we wanted to get away, and are +obliging us." + +"Silence!" roared a Royalist sergeant; "no talking!" And Alzura +groaned. How was he to live if he had to keep his tongue still? + +A long strip of tough hide was now brought, and was knotted at +intervals to the fastenings between each pair of prisoners. It formed +a sort of gigantic single rein, and I suggested in a whisper to Alzura +that we were to be harnessed to the viceroy's chariot. + +"'Twill save horseflesh, and we shall be doing something for our +living," I added. + +Some of the soldiers now went to the front of us, some to the rear; the +door was flung wide open. "March!" cried the officer, and into the +corridor we marched, through the yard, and so into the open road. + +"Out at last," I remarked to Alzura. "The Royalists have hit on an +even simpler plan than yours." + +"Simple, but not clever. There is no art in this kind of thing." + +"Oh, isn't there?" I laughed, giving the thongs a tug. "The +arrangement strikes me as unusually artistic." + +"You are trying to be witty, dear boy. Don't. The Royalists will be +revenged on us, and who shall blame them? Hullo, they aren't taking us +into the town!" + +"No; we're going for a pleasure trip somewhere, I expect. How kind of +them to think we need a change!--I say, Barriero, don't you think this +is an improvement on Alzura's plan?" + +Barriero, who was one of the couple in front of us, laughed and said, +"Well, I can't say yet. I'll tell you when I know more about it." + +At the gate of the prison our escort had been strengthened by a number +of horsemen, who now rode on either side of us, so that any hope of +escaping was quite extinguished. We knew nothing as to our +destination, which I think the officer in charge did not make known +even to his subordinates. A few people stood at the outskirts of the +town to watch us pass, but during the remainder of the day we saw no +one except our guards. + +The march was terribly painful and fatiguing, though I have no wish to +suggest that we were ill-treated. The fact was, the long confinement +we had undergone made us keenly alive to the trials of a wearisome +journey such as this. About midday a halt was called, our fastenings +were loosened, while we were allowed to sit down and eat a ration of +meat which was served out to each of us. Some of the soldiers rested; +others stood on guard, with orders to shoot any man who made the +slightest effort to escape. + +"They needn't fear my running far," said Alzura ruefully, showing me +his bleeding feet. + +"Caramba!" cried a soldier sitting near, "that won't do, senor. The +rocks are sharp in this part of the country. Wait; I have some green +hides in my knapsack. I'll make you some sandals if the colonel halts +for an hour." + +"I shall be very grateful for your kindness," said Alzura; "the pain in +my feet has kept me from admiring the scenery, and there are some grand +views about here." + +"I've seen finer in Lima," muttered the man, who was already busy at +his self-imposed task. + +"Give me some stuff," said one of his comrades; "I'll make one sandal +while you make the other. The youngster will have his feet cut to the +bone. He ought to be at school instead of marching about the country." + +"I'm not eager to march," laughed Alzura; "I'll stay behind willingly." + +"Ugh!" exclaimed the first soldier, "you would soon be dead in this +wilderness. We have seen some sights in this district--haven't we, +Alonzo?" + +"That we have," replied his companion, "and I don't want to see any +more of them." + +The two worthy fellows worked so industriously that in less than half +an hour the sandals were completed, the holes pierced, and the laces +put in, all ready for use. + +"I don't know how to thank you," said Alzura earnestly, "but if we +manage to live through this war, I may be able to pay you back. At +present you must take the will for the deed." + +"It's all right, senor; we could not see you suffer like that. And our +officer will say we did right. Just in time, too! There's the summons +to assemble." + +At the evening halt we were again set free a short time, being +refastened for the night. After travelling for four days in this way, +we saw from the top of a high hill the waters of a magnificent lake, +studded with islets. It seemed quite near; but several hours passed +before we reached its border--a broad morass, through which ran devious +tracks. + +Our leader now stopped, and we saw a number of soldiers carefully +crossing one of the tracks from the lake. As soon as they reached us +we were unbound and placed in single file, while the chief of the +escort said, "The journey is ended. Yonder is your home while the war +lasts. It is not a lively place, but you will be out of mischief. +Follow your guides, and walk carefully; you will not enjoy sinking in +the quagmires." + +We appreciated his advice more when, about half-way across, a stout +middle-aged major, missing his footing, plunged into the liquid mud. +In an instant he was immersed to the chin, and but for Barriero, who +grasped his head, would have disappeared altogether. As it was, he +presented a miserable appearance, and showed us how terrible was the +danger. + +Several boats were moored at the edge of the lake, and an officer +directed us to get in, one by one. Barriero, Alzura, and I entered the +same boat; which was fortunate, as the prisoners were divided into +three groups and taken to different islets. + +There were six of us in our group, and twelve soldiers under the +command of a non-commissioned officer. The guard occupied comfortable +quarters, while three mud huts were reserved for us. The islet was +quite bare of trees, and was so small that Alzura pretended he could +not stretch his legs comfortably for fear of slipping into the water. + +The men who had rowed us over did not land, but took the boats to +another islet, much larger than ours, which we guessed to be the +headquarters of this novel prison. + +"The governor of this place is a clever warder," remarked Barriero; +"there's no getting away from here." + +"Why not?" I asked. + +"The risk is too great. Just think for a minute. First one would have +to swim to the shore, and then cross the morass in the dark, as it +would not be possible to escape in the daytime. It's really waste of +time to mount a guard over us." + +"We must set our wits to work," observed Alzura gravely. + +"No, no," I cried; "Barriero's is the only way, and a very poor one it +is. The swim is a trifle, but to cross the morass--" + +"Why not build a bridge?" suggested Alzura. + +"And use our bodies as part of the foundations," said Barriero, +laughing. "If you make any more idiotic remarks, Alzura, I'll throw +you into the lake." + +"All right," said he. "You'll be sorry when Crawford and I escape and +leave you behind." + +"I've a long time to wait," replied Barriero, "so I'll pass some of it +in sleep." + +Alzura and I shared one of the huts between us. There was no +furniture; the floor was of mud, and so were the walls, while the roof +was thatched with some dried vegetable matter. The place was not +exactly a palace, but it sheltered us, and for that we were thankful. + +The sergeant in charge of the islet was a good-humoured fellow. +Feeling sure that we could not escape, he treated us quite genially, +though maintaining discipline at the same time. He often talked of the +war, giving us news now and again of events which never happened. + +On the third morning after our arrival, we saw several boats leave the +main island and visit the various islets on which prisoners were kept. + +"That's the governor making a tour of his kingdom," the sergeant +explained. "He is bringing us a week's provisions, and will no doubt +have a peep at his new subjects." + +The governor was a Spanish officer, quite old, but stiff and erect in +spite of his many years. He ordered us to draw up in line, called our +names from the list, hoped we should be comfortable, ordered the +sergeant to put in irons any man who disobeyed him, wished us all +good-morning in courtly old-world style, stepped into his boat, and was +rowed away. + +"Not a word about attempting to escape!" remarked Barriero. + +The sergeant heard the remark, and said with a laugh, "It is needless, +senor. No one ever got away from here. Some have tried, and they are +at the bottom of the morass. Why, even I would not venture to cross +that terrible place, except in broad daylight with a trusty guide. If +you think of trying, senor, let me advise you to stay where you are. +Here you can be comfortable; there--ugh!" and the man shuddered at the +very thought of it. + +"Your advice is good, sergeant, and I intend to profit by it," cried +Barriero. "We saw one man slip when we were crossing, and I shan't +forget his face in a hurry. Caramba! it makes me shiver yet." + +"Besides," continued the sergeant, "suppose that by some miracle you +cross the marsh, what would happen then? You would die of hunger. But +I will grant you a further miracle. You shall cross the mountains and +join your friends. Is the danger over? It is but just beginning. You +will be killed in battle. But your luck clings to you, and you still +survive. Well, then, the war comes to an end; you are hunted down, +captured with arms on you, and shot as rebels." + +"What a charming picture, sergeant!" laughed Alzura. "It seems to me +we are better off where we are." + +"I am glad for your own sake that you think so," said the officer +gravely. "I grow attached to my birds with their clipped wings, and +only desire their welfare. There was a young fellow here once, a +pretty boy, senor, like yourself"--Alzura bowed gracefully--"and I had +grown to love him. But he got tired of the place and the company, I +suppose, and one night he slipped into the water. I fired my musket, +and a boat which is always kept ready started in pursuit. He reached +the morass first, and found a track. My men followed cautiously. They +could not see him, but presently they knew there was no need to go +further." + +"How?" asked Alzura curiously. + +"The shriek of the boy as he went to his death told them what had +happened. Ah, it was not the first time some of them had heard such a +wail!" + +"Sergeant," said Alzura, "you tell such lively stories that I wonder at +any one becoming tired of your society!" + +"You are pleased to be merry," replied the man, "and I, too, can be the +same, only not when speaking of the morass. Come, let us forget it for +a while. Although you are my prisoners, you will not find me a harsh +jailer." + +This was quite true, but not all his kindness could make up to us for +loss of liberty. Barriero and the other three prisoners seemed quite +resigned to their fate, but Alzura was always hankering after the +delights of Lima and home, while I, too, longed very much to see my +parents and friends. So we often sat for hours watching the margin of +the lake, envying the men who went ashore. They carried on their heads +whatever bundles they had, and we carefully noted the landing-place, as +well as the track across the morass which they appeared to take. + +"It seems easy enough, doesn't it?" Alzura would say; "but in the dark +it would be different! Think of the quagmires, Juan! Caramba! the +sergeant was right. We had better give up our dreams, Juan, eh?" + +I felt sure that this was wisely spoken, but somehow the next day we +again went to look at the opposite shore and possible freedom. That +horrible morass had a wonderful fascination for us. We thought of it +by day and dreamed of it by night; but the weeks slipped away, and +still we were prisoners on the islet. + +The new year came, and in May 1824 we were joined by another captive. +This was a treat for us, as he brought news from the outside world. He +told us there had been many disturbances, that Bolivar was now +undisputed ruler and leader of the Patriots, but that the end of the +war seemed as far off as ever. + +"If they keep us till the country is at peace," said he, "we shall die +of old age on this islet." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +A DANGEROUS JOURNEY. + +"I think," remarked Alzura, one day toward the end of June, "I'll get +the sergeant to put me in irons." + +"Why?" I asked in surprise. + +"Because sitting here and looking at the land is driving me crazy." + +"Then don't look at it." + +"I can't help it, and that's the truth. Wouldn't it be grand if we +could only cross that morass safely!" + +"But we can't!" + +"No," said he; "but suppose we could? Suppose there came a night when +it was just dark enough to hide us, and yet light enough to show us the +track? Wouldn't it be a feather in our caps if we could get back +safely to Miller?" + +"It would; but we should lose our nerve in that horrible swamp, even if +we reached it." + +"Very likely; and our lives too. Let's go back to the hut." + +We had often talked like this, but now there seemed more purpose and +earnestness in my chum's manner. I looked at him closely as we +returned to our quarters, and wondered if he had decided to run the +risk. + +"A quarter of a mile isn't a long swim, is it?" he said, after a time. + +"Oh no!" I agreed cheerfully. + +"And we might easily save sufficient food from our rations to last a +long while." + +"Most likely we shouldn't need it long." + +"It would be very useful if we did." + +"Look here, Alzura," said I, turning on him suddenly, "let's make an +end of this business. What are you driving at? Are you going to risk +your life in that morass?" + +"I'm very tired of this place," he answered moodily. + +"So am I; but that doesn't lessen the danger of the swamp. Now, let us +make no mistake. There is, perhaps, one chance in a hundred. Is it +worth risking? Death in a morass must be rather horrible. Don't you +think so?" + +"Well, it can't be very pleasant; but you admit we stand a chance of +getting across." + +"One in a hundred, no more." + +"Ah, well," said he thoughtfully, "let us sleep on it." + +I could not help thinking that my chum must want his freedom badly to +even suggest such a venture. Any hot-blooded enterprise, I knew well, +appealed to him strongly; but this one required cool, dogged patience +and nerves of iron. Barriero was a brave fellow too, but he honestly +admitted he would rather be shot than try to cross the morass in the +dark. As for me, I trembled at the thought of taking part in so +hazardous an enterprise. + +However, it seemed to me that Alzura was making up his mind to go. +Every day he let fall broad hints, and at last stated his intentions +without reserve. + +"Juan," said he one evening, "I'm going. The war may last a couple of +years yet. Are you coming with me? Don't if you'd rather not risk it." + +"Have you counted the cost?" + +"Yes. I know it's a touch-and-go affair; that is why I won't press you +to join me." + +"Two will stand a better chance than one," said I thoughtfully, "and +you mustn't try it alone. Shall we ask Barriero to come with us?" + +"May as well pass the compliment," answered Alzura, laughing. "But he +won't, I'm positive." + +And he was right; for Barriero, on being asked, said hotly,-- + +"You're a pair of idiots, and I don't know which is the bigger." + +"It must be neither or both, if we're a pair," chuckled Alzura. + +"Why can't you be satisfied?" growled Barriero. "You've plenty of +food, no work to do, and are well treated. And there isn't one chance +in a thousand of your getting through." + +"Crawford said one in a hundred!" + +"Well, anyway, you're certain to lose your lives, and I shall be blamed +for not stopping you. It's my duty to inform the sergeant, and have +you chained up." + +"You can't," said Alzura--"you can't betray us." + +"You're two lunatics--stark, staring lunatics--and I wish you had told +me nothing of your mad scheme." + +"It's awfully risky," said I, "but not so mad as you think. We shall +choose our night, and we know just where to land. Then we shall take +provisions to last us three or four days." + +"You won't need them," interrupted Barriero, in a tone of conviction +which was far from encouraging. + +But now that the affair had really been decided on, the dangers of the +morass soon lost some of their terrors. We were able to talk about +them calmly, and thus grew familiar with them, at least in imagination. +Every day we set aside a portion of the dried meat and biscuit which +formed the chief part of our food, until at last we had as much as +could be carried easily. It would be stupid to load ourselves with too +heavy a burden, as Barriero rather unkindly reminded us. + +We waited three whole weeks after coming to our decision before +starting on the venture, and then, one favourable night, slipped down +to the edge of the islet. Barriero, who had kept the secret, came to +wish us good-bye, and the poor old fellow shook like a timid child. + +"It is a mad game," said he, "a downright mad game. I shall never +forgive myself for allowing you to go. It isn't too late now to draw +back. Do take my advice, and don't risk it. I shan't sleep a wink all +night if you go." + +"Never mind, my boy," replied Alzura, laughing; "you'll have plenty of +time afterwards for a nap.--Now, Juan, off with your clothes." + +The other prisoners were sound asleep in their huts; so were the +soldiers, with the exception of the two sentries. These men were +supposed to keep a sharp lookout, but nothing had happened for so long +a time that their duty was mostly a matter of form. However, Barriero +kept watch while we each stripped and made a bundle of our food and +clothes to carry on our heads. + +"Good-bye, old man," we said to him when we were quite ready; and he, +gripping our hands, whispered back,-- + +"Good luck; but I wish you would not go. Take care, and come back here +rather than lose your lives, if you cannot find the track." + +We promised to do so, and then took quietly to the water. The first +part of the journey gave us no trouble whatever. We were both good +swimmers, and quickly arrived at the spot which we had selected as the +landing-place. Here we crouched on a patch of firm ground, undid our +bundles, and proceeded to dress quickly. A smothered exclamation from +Alzura made me glance at him. In his hurry he had whisked his shirt a +yard or two away, and it had settled in the liquid mud. + +"There's an end to that garment!" said he. "Well, after all, it's no +great loss; 'twas mostly made of holes. What have you found, Juan?" + +"A stout staff tipped with iron, left here by the soldiers, most +likely. What a piece of luck, my boy! Now we shall be able to test +the ground." + +"Yes, the balance is on our side," said he happily, buttoning his +tunic. "Are you ready? Give me the staff, and I'll go first." + +Of course I could not let him do that; so turning it off with a laugh, +I cried,-- + +"No, thank you. I'm not going to trust my life to your hands, or +rather feet. Now, follow me closely. Walk just where I do, and if you +see me disappearing, pull me back sharp. We're on the track now, and +must try to keep on." + +"Spoken with the wisdom of a sage!" said Alzura saucily. "I say, Juan, +how shall I know when you're moving?" + +There was certainly reason for his sarcasm. As often as not, when I +raised my foot I brought it down in the same place again, or, according +to Alzura, even went a step backward. The night was not particularly +dark--indeed, we had doubted whether it was dark enough for us to swim +ashore unobserved--but the marsh was fearfully deceptive. + +In places the track was merely a dry hump here and there, for which I +had to feel with the staff. Twice, in spite of every precaution, I +missed my footing, and the second time had sunk to the waist before +Alzura could pull me out. + +"I can't see you very well, Juan," said he, laughing, "but I have an +idea that you would cut a fine figure in a ballroom just now." + +"Especially if it were a fancy-dress affair," I replied in the same +tone. + +We were in no merry humour, mind you; but the weakest joke was better +than dwelling on the horrors which surrounded us. Each of us knew +that, but for Alzura's quickness, I should have disappeared for ever, +leaving no trace behind me. Twice before the break of day I had saved +him from a similar fate. + +We left the islet about ten o'clock, and at midnight were still in the +morass, unable to move. Alzura had joined me on a piece of firm +ground, just large enough for us to stand on, and no more. It was +darker now, so that we could see nothing clearly, while I failed to +touch any solid substance, except that behind us, with my pole. +Alzura's attempts were equally unsuccessful. + +"You're a pretty guide!" said he. "You've got off the track; we had +better try back. Give me the staff." + +"Be careful; mind how you turn. Can you feel the ground where we stood +just now?" + +"Yes; here it is," and the next minute he stepped back to feel for the +proper path, while I stood trembling lest he should slip in and be +smothered before I could get to his assistance. + +"Can you find a place?" I asked. + +"Only towards the lake. It's nothing but marsh to right and left. I +think I'll come to you again. What is it? Did I hurt you?" + +"Oh no, not at all!--only crushed my toes a bit with the pole! What +are we going to do now?" + +"I suppose it's too early for breakfast?" he began, and then in a +different tone he added hastily, "Oh, I say, what a joke! I've dropped +my bundle of food somewhere. Perhaps it's just as well; I shall walk +lighter." + +"But you'll want something to eat," I suggested. + +"Of course I shall. How dense you are! Don't you see how the accident +will benefit us both? There are two now instead of one to eat your +rations, so you will have all the less to carry." + +"Oh," said I doubtfully, not quite appreciating the logic. "Well, we +don't want breakfast yet, and the question is, what are we to do? The +sergeant's bound to discover our escape at breakfast-time, and a +search-party will be sent ashore immediately." + +"It will be light in an hour or two," observed Alzura cheerfully--"at +least light enough for us to find the track again. Let us sit down; it +won't be so tiring, and we can't make ourselves any wetter or dirtier. +It's a good thing I didn't start on this journey alone; I should be +with my provisions now." + +"It's always pleasanter to have company," said I, shivering, and not +noticing the absurdity till Alzura laughed. + +There was certainly very little pleasure in our position just then. We +were wet through, chilled to the marrow, and plastered with mud from +head to foot. Our limbs felt horribly cramped, yet we almost feared to +stretch them, and the enforced delay was fast diminishing our chances +of escape. The dawning light might show us the route, but it would +also set the soldiers on our heels. Altogether, I was rather inclined +to envy Barriero, sleeping peacefully in his hut. + +As soon as ever it became light enough, Alzura jumped up, saying, +"Where is the pole?" and grasping it, he began trying to touch bottom. +He poked long and vigorously in all directions, but without success, +till it seemed as if our only plan was to return and give ourselves up. + +"Yet there must be a way out," said I impatiently. "The track leads +here plainly enough, and it wouldn't come to an end just in the middle +of the morass." + +"I shouldn't think so," said Alzura. "I wonder whether they've missed +us yet. How old Barriero will grin on seeing us back again!" + +"We aren't back yet," I replied. "Look at that hump yonder. It seems +solid, doesn't it? Lend me the pole. Ah, too short! What d'you +think, Alzura?" + +"It looks all right," said he; "but appearances are often deceptive. +Besides, we can't reach it." + +"We can jump it, perhaps." + +"Yes," said he thoughtfully, "we might. It's a big risk, though. If +it isn't firm ground, the one who jumps will go to his death." + +"I'll chance it," said L + +"No, you won't; it's my venture. Stand aside, and give me room for a +take-off. Remember me to the others if I go down." + +"Wait," said I; "there's no need for you to go. We can put it to the +test without risking life," and I hastily unslung the packet of +provisions which hung over my shoulder. + +"Bravo, Juan! that is a good dodge. Mind your aim, though!" + +"All right," and raising the bundle, I swung it carefully to and fro, +trying to gauge the distance. Then giving it an upward sweep, I let it +go, and we watched breathlessly as it fell plump on the spot. + +"Firm as a rock," cried Alzura. "Viva! now for the jump, my boy; it's +easy enough." + +"As long as we come down in the proper place. Stand back," and pulling +myself together, I took the leap, landing close beside the bundle. +This I picked up, and, telling Alzura to throw me the pole, proceeded +to investigate. + +"Is it all right?" he cried softly. + +"Yes," said I, and stood back while he jumped across. + +"Caramba!" said he, "that's a nasty bit well over!" and I noticed that +his limbs trembled. + +"All's well that ends well," I replied. "Come on, my boy; we've done +the worst part, and the track's as plain as a pikestaff now. If we can +reach the hill we came down months ago, 'twill be an easy matter to +hide." + +"I wonder if the sergeant has discovered anything yet? According to +his account, the guards will think us dead." + +"So much the better for us; they'll give up the search sooner. Hurrah! +the ground's getting firmer at every step. I believe we're out of the +morass." + +The words were hardly spoken, when, my foot catching in some coarse +grass, I fell sprawling, face downwards. + +"Not quite," observed Alzura, pulling me up, while I tried to get the +mud from my mouth and eyes. "It's a lucky thing you didn't try that +trick before. Faith, Juan, you do look a picture! I'd willingly give +a hundred dollars to be able to pop you down in Lima!" + +"Come along, and don't be idiotic, or we shall find ourselves back on +the islet." + +"Yes," said he, still grinning all over his face; "we can't stay here +laughing all day." + +"I'm not laughing," I cried indignantly. + +"Aren't you? Well, you see, old fellow, it's rather difficult to tell +what you're doing through that black mask. I shouldn't try to rub it +off. Let it cake, and we'll chip it off with a stone." + +"This way," said I gruffly, taking no notice of his attempts to be +funny. "We'd better make straight for the mountains and hide +ourselves." + +"We've need to," he replied, with a meaning laugh. + +We were now in a wide plain, dotted with numerous hillocks, and a good +deal cut up by streams from the overflow of the lake. The ground was +damp, while here and there we plumped straight into a marsh. By this +time, however, we were in such a state that nothing mattered, and being +unwilling to lose time, we took the shortest though not the most +pleasant route. + +We had a good start of the soldiers, who, as it happened, were +completely thrown off the scent through finding Alzura's bundle. +Knowing the terrible nature of the morass, they concluded we were both +dead, and returned to the island with the tidings. + +We learned this long afterwards from Barriero, who told us how he had +mourned our sad fate, and blamed himself repeatedly for having let us +go. At the time, however, we expected every moment to hear the patter +of feet behind us, and raced on till, breathless and panting, we +reached the base of the mountain. + +Here we stopped a few moments to recover breath, and then, climbing +some distance, proceeded to search for a cavern. + +"There ought to be several," said Alzura, "for the mountain has been +mined. Didn't you notice the _rodados_ as we came down?" + +"Those heaps of rubbish?" + +"Yes. All that refuse has been taken out of the mountain. Here's a +heap, and the mouth of the tunnel won't be far away. Now, keep your +eyes open." + +I did my best; but Alzura found the cavern, and in a short time we were +both inside. The place was dark, and smelt dreadfully, the roof almost +touched our heads, and the passage was very narrow. + +"A nice trap!" I remarked. "If the soldiers catch us here, there's an +end to our freedom." + +"I'm not so sure of that. The gallery may run a long way back, and +perhaps communicate with another. Shall we explore it?" + +"Not now; I'm hungry and tired." + +"So am I, and wet and cold too. I wish we had a fire. Better take +your things off and wring them; you'll be a bit more comfortable." + +I followed his advice, and then we sat down to feast on the dried beef +and biscuits, which, happily, we had been able to keep in good +condition. It was not a brilliant banquet, but we were hungry, and our +teeth were sharp. + +"I think it's a pity I lost my stock," remarked Alzura, lazily enjoying +the food. "That bit won't last long." + +"You must eat less. I shall put you on short rations in the morning." + +"Tell me that to-morrow; I'm sleepy now." + +"Aren't we going to keep watch?" + +"I don't think it's worth while. The soldiers aren't likely to look +here for us, unless you attract their attention by snoring too loudly," +and the rascal chuckled himself off to sleep. + +In a few minutes I lay down beside him, and slept soundly till he +wakened me by beating a tattoo on my ribs, and saying that he wanted +his supper. We had, in fact, slept through most of the day, and it was +too late to think of making a fresh start till the first thing in the +morning. + +However, as soon as day broke we set out with a hazy idea of making our +way to Lima. By dint of careful economy, our provisions would last for +three days, and then we must trust to luck. We had no notion how the +war had gone, and I should not have been surprised to hear that the +Royalists were again masters of the country. + +About noon on the third day of our journey we sat down beside a +pleasant stream in a picturesque ravine. There was sufficient food +left for one meal, and Alzura voted for having it at once. + +"It's a long time since breakfast," said he, "and this mountain air +sharpens one's appetite. Besides, it's good policy to make sure of a +thing while one has the chance." + +"All right," said I, laughing, and opening the bundle, "here you are. +Don't grumble with me when we have to go to bed without supper." + +"We may get a fresh supply before then; who knows?" + +I did not think it likely; but all the same I joined him in an attack +on the provisions, which we devoured to the very last morsel. Then we +had another drink of water, and rose to resume our journey. As if this +were a signal, the rocks round about suddenly became alive with armed +men, who yelled some orders which we could not understand. Then +clambering over the boulders, they surrounded us, and in a short time +had bound our arms tightly with strips of hide. They were +fierce-looking fellows--Indians, never seen westward of the Andes--and +apparently unfamiliar with the Spanish language. I tried to question +them, but they did not understand, while neither of us could make out a +word of their patois. It was clear, however, that they meant to take +us with them; and as we marched off, Alzura said, with a laugh,-- + +"What a lucky thing, Juan, that we ate our supper in good time!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +BACK TO DUTY. + +Since the beginning of the war I had seen a great deal of Indian +endurance, but nothing to equal that of our new captors. They marched +along in a curious fashion at a kind of jog-trot pace, taking short +steps and carrying their feet close to the ground. Mile after mile was +covered without apparent effort, and when at last a halt was called, +not a man looked the least bit tired. As for Alzura and me, we were +exhausted, and lay down just as we were. The Indians lit a fire, +roasted some maize, and loosening our bonds, gave us a share of the +food, a drink of water, and a little coca. Whether they were friends +or foes we could not tell, but despite their ferocious looks they did +us no harm. + +While on the march I had resolved to try them with the charm of the +silver key; but, to my dismay, I found it was no longer round my neck. +A part of the chain was still there, but it had snapped off, and the +key was gone, sunk probably in the dreadful morass. However, turning +to one of the fellows, I said, first in Spanish, then in the patois +used by Sorillo's men, "We are officers in the Patriot army, and +friends of Raymon Sorillo and the Silver Key; who are you?" + +He shook his head solemnly, and looked at me with a blank stare. + +"Try him with English, Juan," laughed Alzura. "I wonder where he lives +when he's at home? Perhaps he knows Portuguese. I'll have a shot at +him." + +If Alzura knew Portuguese--which I rather doubted--the Indian was +ignorant of that language, and was quite unmoved by my comrade's flood +of oratory. + +Perhaps he thought Alzura was singing. But my companion in adversity +did not take the suggestion in good part; indeed it seemed to annoy him. + +"Never mind," said I cheerfully; "they can't march us about for ever. +We are bound to meet with civilized beings some time or other." + +"But these fellows may belong to the Royalists! Many of the Indians on +this side of the mountains do. Then we shall be taken back to the +island!" + +"We shall have guides across the morass, though; that's one thing to be +thankful for." + +"And be put in irons! Perhaps you think that's a subject for +cheerfulness?" + +"We shouldn't be able to risk our lives again, at all events." + +"Oh, go to sleep," exclaimed Alzura, "if you've nothing more sensible +than that to say!" and he rolled a little nearer the fire. + +The next morning the Indians resumed their journey, and after a weary +tramp of many miles, encamped on the side of a mountain, where stood +several huts in a half-ruined state. One of these was set aside for +us, and a sentry was placed at the door. + +Here we remained for three weeks while our captors made frequent +excursions, starting early in the morning and returning late at night, +though of their object we had not the faintest idea. At the end of +that time we were taken with them; and from morn till night, for +several days in succession, we roamed about those dreadful mountains, +till every muscle in our bodies ached with fatigue. + +"What is the use of it all?" I asked Alzura gloomily. "What do they +expect to gain by this continual tramp up and down?" + +"It's my belief that they can't help themselves," he replied. "It's a +disease, a form of madness, which keeps them continually on the move. +Yesterday we climbed the same hill a dozen times, and finished at the +starting-point. Or perhaps it's some new kind of warfare they've +invented." + +"It's awfully ridiculous, anyhow, and I don't see that we've gained +much by leaving the island--unless it's exercise." + +"When the war is over, I'll give up walking altogether," said my chum +resolutely. "When I'm not on horseback, or in a carriage of some kind, +I'll be carried about in a chair. If this lasts much longer, my feet +will be worn out." + +That evening the Indians lit their fire earlier than usual--a +circumstance for which we were duly grateful. We ate our supper, and +sat chatting together cheerfully, being put in good humour by the +warmth and brightness of the ruddy flames. + +Suddenly we heard in the distance the long-drawn-out note of a night +bird, repeated again and again, and each time nearer to us. It was +answered by our sentries; but the men round the fire made no movement, +nor did they show the slightest interest when half a dozen horsemen +rode up. The leader, however, rose slowly and talked to the strangers, +who, after seeing to their horses, came and sat down. + +"Juan," said Alzura, "these fellows belong to a different tribe. +Perhaps we shall have a chance of making ourselves understood." + +"They are looking at us very pointedly," I answered; and raising my +voice, I said, "Can any of you talk Spanish?" + +"Yes," cried several together, coming near to us; "what do you want?" + +"To make ourselves known," I replied. "These worthy fellows can't +understand us, and we're tired of playing hide-and-seek in the +mountains." + +"Who are you? Where do you come from? Are you for the king?" asked +one. + +This was treading on dangerous ground; but as we really were worn out, +and there seemed no chance of escape, I thought it best to take the +bull by the horns. At the worst we should only be handed over to the +enemy and sent back to prison. + +So I answered quietly, "No; we are Patriot officers who have escaped +from the Spaniards. If you are on our side, perhaps you will help us +to return to our own people." + +"You are with friends, senor, if what you say is true," remarked one +who seemed to have some sort of authority. + +"_If?_" said I, trying to speak haughtily; "do you doubt it?" + +"Well," said the fellow, with a knowing grin, "you don't look much like +officers of any kind." And he was right. + +We were, in fact, a pair of as dreary-looking objects as one would be +likely to meet. Our sandals were worn out, our clothes hung in rags, +and the holes in Alzura's tunic made it painfully apparent that he did +not indulge in the luxury of a shirt. Whether we wore uniform, and if +so what kind, would have been difficult to decide, as we were still +plastered with mud from head to foot. So I could not altogether blame +the man for his distrust. + +However, I repeated my statement, told him we had fought under the +Englishman Miller, and at last introduced the name of Raymon Sorillo. + +"We know him well," I said in conclusion, "and are good friends of the +Silver Key." + +Apparently my words were interpreted for the benefit of our captors, +who jabbered together for a considerable time, while Alzura and I +anxiously awaited the result of the conference. + +At last the leader of the horsemen, turning to me, said, "Senor, it is +decided that I shall take you to the army, where your words can be +proved. If your story is not true, you will be shot as spies." + +"All right; we agree!" I exclaimed joyfully, for it was a delightful +thought that we were to escape the strange beings who spent their time +in running about the rocks. + +"We shall start early," he continued, "so you had better get some +rest." Which we did, as soon as our excited state permitted. + +"Bravo!" exclaimed Alzura, after breakfast the next morning; "this is +an improvement. Fancy being on horseback again! This will be better +than trudging on foot, Juan, eh?" + +"What about the men who have lent us their horses?" + +"Oh," said he merrily, "I believe they would as soon walk as ride, and +I'm sure they could keep up longer than the animals." + +By this talk you will understand we had been provided with a couple of +horses; and taking leave of our original captors, we rode off with our +new ones. Of course, both Alzura and I were unarmed, and the leader, +in a quiet way, so arranged that we were never very far from a man with +a musket. + +He was rather a lively fellow for an Indian, and having made sure we +could not escape, talked with us freely. He told us the men we had +just left were very useful, having already sent in a great deal of +valuable information to the Patriot army. He also said that Bolivar +had crossed the Andes with a large army, and that a decisive battle was +expected at any time. He was very curious about our escape, and could +barely credit that we had crossed the morass without assistance. + +"It has been done before," he said, "but only once or twice, and then +by natives." + +"We shan't do it again," laughed Alzura. "It nearly turned our hair +white. It was the nastiest experience I have ever had--worse than when +the Royalists cut us up at Torata." + +"Were you in that battle, senor? Wasn't it terrible?" and the man +looked at my comrade with renewed interest. + +Indeed, from that time he treated us both with increased respect, and +the journey passed quite pleasantly in his company. During the second +day we met several groups of mounted Indians, and a detachment of +regular soldiers; which showed that we could not be far from the main +encampment, on the plain between Rancas and Pasco. Our guide expected +to reach it that night, but we did not get in till after breakfast next +morning. + +The plain was a splendid place for a camp, though rather high up, being +some twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea. Surrounding it +on all sides, huge mountains towered, their mighty summits hidden by +the clouds. The table-land itself was alive with soldiers, and +presently I caught sight of the flag which had been presented to the +Peruvian Legion. + +"Take us over there," I cried excitedly to the guide.--"There are our +comrades, Alzura. I see Plaza, and Cordova, and the sour-faced old +major. Viva! viva!" and I rose in the stirrups with delight. + +What explanation the Indian gave I do not know. We were plucked from +the saddles and bandied about from one fellow to another in less than +no time, every one helping to keep up a running fire of remarks. + +"Now let the Royalists tremble!" exclaimed Plaza, striking a dramatic +attitude, spoiled only by the fun and twinkle in his eyes. + +"Only think, our little Alzura has returned to us!" cried another; "let +us embrace him." + +"Wait till he's been scrubbed a few times," suggested Plaza. "The +legion should be proud of these 'young bloods.' What airs and graces! +What remarkable and novel costumes! What--" + +"Can any one lend me a shirt?" interrupted Alzura. + +"A shirt?" exclaimed Cordova. "My dear fellow, I have a dozen, quite +clean and doing nothing, I shall be proud to let you and Crawford each +have one." + +"Oh, thanks!" said Alzura. "I thought something practical ought to +come from all that talk. Come on, my boy, let's have them at once. +Where are they?" + +"Just down in Lima. You have only to--" but a roar of laughter drowned +the end of the sentence. + +"You really don't require one," remarked Plaza; "it would spoil the +rest of your uniform--that is, if you have one under that dirt." + +Every one was still enjoying the joke, when a number of officers in +brilliant uniforms approached our quarter of the plain. In the leader +I recognized Bolivar; and, to my great satisfaction, Colonel Miller was +one of his suite. + +"Your men seem to be enjoying themselves, colonel," we heard Bolivar +remark; "what is it all about?" + +At that moment Miller caught sight of us, and leaving the general's +question unanswered, called us over, saying, "Alzura! Crawford! Where +have you been, my boys? We had quite given you up.--General, these are +two of my young officers who have been missing for months." + +Bolivar, who was in good humour that morning, made us stand by him and +relate our adventures. Then he complimented us on our pluck, and +turning to an officer, said, "Take these youngsters to O'Brien, and ask +him to supply them with decent clothing; they have at least earned +that. And I am very proud of you, boys; and so, no doubt, are your +comrades." At which Plaza led off a round of cheering. + +I was very glad to see the great, big, jolly Irishman again, and he +lost no time in getting us fresh uniforms from the stores, with an +extra poncho apiece. + +"You'll be glad of that at night," said he, "for up here the +thermometer is generally below freezing-point. I must come to see you, +if there's time, and hear your story." + +O'Brien was quite right about the biting cold, but on that first night +at least we hardly felt it. Dressed in our new clothes, comfortably +wrapped in our ponchos, seated close to a roaring fire, and surrounded +by old friends, Alzura and I felt amply repaid for all our toils and +privations. + +In honour of our arrival our brother officers had organized a grand +supper, the greatest delicacy being a small loaf of white bread, which +they insisted on sharing with Alzura and myself. After supper, we had +to give an account of our adventures; and many a laugh went up as I +told of my chum's plans, of our disasters in crossing the morass, and +of the strange Indians who had mistaken us for Royalists, which, Plaza +unkindly remarked, was a poor compliment to the enemy. + +"After all," he continued, "you haven't had such a very bad time. Now, +while you've been playing, we've been at work." + +"Oh," cried Alzura, smiling blandly, "that would be a change for you!" + +"We've made roads," said Cordova, with a solemn air, "built huts, +collected fuel, carried corn, and driven cattle. We've worked harder +than the labourers on your father's estates." + +"Glad to hear it," laughed my chum. "I thought Bolivar would make +something of you. A pity we weren't with you, though." + +"A great pity! With Crawford and you helping, there would have been +little for us to do." + +"It must have been rough work crossing the mountains," I observed. + +"Rough? rather! especially as Bolivar has turned us into cavalry," and +he proceeded to give a graphic account of the passage. + +"The shelving ledges on the mountain sides are so narrow that the +troops were obliged to advance in single file. The cavalry, of course, +were greatly handicapped. Each man rode a mule, and had a led horse, +which he dragged after him by a lasso. Sometimes a break in the track, +caused by a deep gully or a waterfall, occurred, when the men had to +dismount, and to lead their animals. + +"But the worst of all was when night came while we were still on the +march," said Plaza. "We always walked then, and more than one fellow +went tumbling down some frightful precipice. We lost our way two or +three times, though there were plenty of trumpeters stationed at +intervals. But Cordova will tell you about that," and there was a +general laugh. + +"Oh," said Alzura, scenting a bit of fun, "order, please, for Cordova's +story.--Now, my boy, out with it!" + +"'Twas nothing," replied Cordova airily. "We missed our way, and had +to return, that's all. A mere accident, only these fellows make such a +fuss about it." + +"Plaza, you tell the yarn," said I. "Cordova's much too modest, and +that's quite a new thing for him, too!" + +"Well, it happened on the wildest night of the whole journey. A +terrific snowstorm came on, half blinding us. We were wet through and +tired as dogs, and the camping-place was still a long way off. We +couldn't see much, but there was plenty of noise. The wind howled, the +trumpeters blew loud enough to wake the dead, officers shouted to their +men, horses neighed and mules brayed: it was a regular pandemonium! To +crown all, we were following the windings of a roaring torrent." + +"And Cordova was leading," interrupted Major Gamarra. + +"Some one suggested we were on the wrong track, but our friend knew +better. 'Follow me,' said he; 'I can guide you by the sounds of the +trumpets.' And we followed." + +"Like a flock of sheep," chimed in the major. + +"We went on," continued Plaza, "till even Cordova admitted something +was wrong; then we stopped." + +"Why didn't you turn back?" + +"Out of the question, my boy. We tried it, and lost half a dozen +animals in the attempt. The only thing possible was to advance till we +reached an open spot. When all our fellows were across we turned +round, and began the march back." + +"Bravo, Cordova!" cried my chum, who was bubbling over with laughter. + +"Oh, come, wait a bit. You haven't heard the best of the joke yet. We +had done nearly half the distance, when we met the head of another +squadron that followed us. 'Go back,' we yelled; 'you've missed the +proper path.' 'Go back yourselves,' they shouted in reply; 'we can't!' +Well, you know, neither party dared move till daybreak; so we stood +there, crouching against the rocks and holding on to the animals. We +could neither eat nor sleep. The wind flung the snow at us in masses, +and we were frozen to the marrow. Some pretty things were said about +Cordova before the morning, I can assure you." + +"To hear them talk, one would think they were made of sugar!" grunted +Cordova. + +"It took us four hours the next day to get out of the mess," laughed +Plaza, "and then we had to catch up with our division. Altogether, it +was a very pleasant incident, though the major here and a few others +failed to see the fun." + +"But how came Canterac to let you through the passes without a fight?" +I asked. + +"A case of pride going before a fall, I expect. He thinks to serve us +as he did at Torata.--By the way, Crawford, you gave Miller his wrong +rank this morning. He's a general now, and chief of all the Peruvian +cavalry." + +"Bravo, that's grand news! There isn't a better soldier in the army." + +"Only he's so fearfully energetic. He'll keep one on the move for +sixteen hours, and then suggest a little scouting as a titbit to wind +up with," said Cordova. + +"You've had a good rest now, anyway." + +"We shall pay for it, though." + +And Cordova was not far wrong. We had barely fallen asleep when the +bugles sounded. The troops rose, and mounted officers dashed about, +carrying orders to different squadrons and battalions. + +"Breakfast at once; ready to march in an hour," were the commands, and +we wondered what information Bolivar had obtained. + +Some said one thing, some another, and very soon a fine crop of rumours +sprang up. Canterac was advancing with twenty thousand men; his troops +had mutinied, and declared for the Patriots; he was retreating hot-foot +for Cuzco; he was a prisoner in the hands of the mountain tribes. +Every man suggested the event he fancied most, and seemed quite annoyed +if one expressed any doubt of its accuracy. + +"Just our luck," grumbled Alzura. "I did think we should have had a +little rest." + +"It's just because you're here that we're moving," laughed Plaza. +"Directly Bolivar caught sight of you and Crawford yesterday morning, +he determined to march. 'Canterac won't stand against those fellows,' +he said." + +"Bolivar is a capable fellow and a good judge," said Alzura. "I wonder +where General Miller is." + +"Went off in the night, reconnoitring with a party of mountaineers. +It's wonderful how those wild fellows have taken to him. They'll go +anywhere with him. Come along; it's nearly time for us to move, and +Bolivar doesn't like to be kept waiting." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN. + +Contrary to custom, we moved off the ground slowly, marching along with +swarms of Indians on our flanks and in front. For once in a way +Bolivar had adopted caution instead of the fiery recklessness he +usually displayed, and seemed resolved on running no unnecessary risks. +Our course lay southward, over very rough, broken ground, and a staff +officer informed Plaza we were making for the plains of Junin, to the +south of Lake Reyes. + +"We shall catch Canterac there," said he, "or Canterac will catch us; I +hardly know which at present." + +Our bivouac that night was cheerless and uncomfortable. The position +was a very strong one, but Bolivar was evidently determined to leave +nothing to chance. The sentries were doubled and in some places +trebled, so that most of us were unable to snatch more than a few +hours' sleep. Early in the morning the journey was resumed, and after +a tedious march of fifteen miles through mountainous country we +suddenly beheld the Royalist army crossing the plains at our feet. The +men, breaking into a thundering "Viva," waved their caps or swung their +lances in the air, and the cavalry were ordered to shift their saddles +from the mules to the led horses. + +"'Twill be a cavalry action," said Plaza, vaulting into his saddle. +"Here comes an 'aid' with orders." + +"There goes Miller with a squadron," cried Alzura. "We shall be out of +it. The Colombian Horse are moving too. We shall be left behind with +the infantry." + +"Not so fast," said Plaza, laughing, as Bolivar's messenger dashed up +to Colonel Suares, who was in charge of our squadron. "Now for it!" + +"You won't be quite so eager presently," growled the tough old major. +"Look at the ground; see the defile between the swamp and the hills. +Canterac can cut us to pieces there, and he's soldier enough to know +it." + +"No, no, major; his cavalry aren't a patch on ours. We've never had a +chance to show our mettle before." + +"Well, we shall have one now," said the major, as we began to descend +to the plain. + +Two Colombian squadrons were in front of us, while Miller was still +further ahead and bearing to the left. On the other side of the defile +we caught a glimpse now and then of the Royalist cavalry forming up. +The ground was so broken that we could only go at a foot-pace, and I +began to think the major might be right. + +As we entered the defile there came a great shout of "Viva el Rey!" +from the plains ahead, and the next instant the Royalist horsemen, +thirteen hundred strong, and led by Canterac himself, dashed madly to +the attack. + +"Viva! viva!" they yelled, cutting and thrusting with sabre and lance. +The onset was like a mighty avalanche, and our men were for the most +part overwhelmed. A few of the strongest and best mounted cut their +way through, but numbers were overthrown, and the rest came flying +back, with the victorious Royalists slashing and cutting on all sides. + +"By St. Philip," muttered Plaza, "we shall be swept away." + +Our colonel, seeing the danger, manoeuvred us into an angle of the +marsh, just as the mob of horsemen, friend and foe inextricably mixed, +swarmed down, shouting, struggling, fighting. + +"Forward! forward!" yelled the exultant Royalists, sweeping past like a +whirlwind. + +Farther away on the left, another body was driving Miller's men into +the swamp, and it seemed that the Patriot cavalry must be annihilated. +But our squadron remained untouched, and leading us into the plain, +Suares issued an order to charge the Royalists who were handling +Miller's troops so roughly. + +"We must win or die, my lads!" he cried; "the country depends on us." + +The men cheered with a will and shook their sabres; we settled more +firmly in our saddles; the colonel rode to the front; the squadron +moved forward and broke into a trot. Men and officers alike knew that +our leader had spoken no more than the truth. We must win or die! On +us alone hung the issue of the battle. If we failed, hardly a man of +the Patriot cavalry would leave the field alive; if we won, the +Royalists must stop the pursuit in order to help their comrades. + +It was a heavy task, but one thought cheered and nerved us. We were +all Peruvians belonging to the Legion, and it was but fitting that the +desperate venture should fall to us. How our infantry battalion would +cheer, how proudly they would greet us, should we return victorious! +It would be glorious to show both friends and enemies that the +Peruvians could strike a stout blow in their own defence. + +"Gallop!" + +We received the order with a cheer, bent low in the saddle, and grasped +our sabres firmly. Suares knew his work, and led us across a wide +stretch of smooth, firm ground, the very spot for a cavalry charge. + +Finding themselves between two foes, the Royalists faced about and +dashed at us. The shock was tremendous: men and horses were bowled +over like ninepins; great gaps appeared in the ranks; men went down and +were trampled under foot in the furious fray; there was a ring of steel +as sabre clashed with sabre, and the defiant shouts of the combatants +mingled with the groans of the wounded. + +Reeling and panting, I found myself on the other side of the press. +Plaza was there, too, with a dozen of his men. Alzura broke through +smiling in spite of a nasty cut across the face, and was followed by +many more. Then above the din General Miller's voice was heard, and we +flushed with pride. + +"Bravo, my boys!" he cried; "I'm proud of you! All the army will sing +your praises presently." + +Freed from the Royalists, his men had got out of the swamp, and now +came to join us. The few Colombians who had cut their way through in +the first attack galloped back, and inspirited by General Miller's +stern "Hurrah!" we once more flung ourselves on the foe. It was steel +to steel now, and the Spaniards stood their ground well till they saw +their comrades retreating from the defile. Then, with the exception of +a devoted few who stayed in a grim ring around the standard-bearer, +they turned to flee. + +"The flag!" cried the general; "have at the flag!" And like a torrent +in flood, we swept down on the little band. + +"Rally to the flag!" cried a voice I knew well, and the next instant I +was crossing swords with Santiago Mariano. I do not care much to dwell +on this part of the fight. These Royalists were the pick of their +squadron, and it seemed as if each man would die where he fought rather +than surrender the colours. Three or four times the flag disappeared, +but came up again the next instant, and presently I saw it borne aloft +by Santiago, who had been forced away from me in the fierce turmoil. +Hardly a dozen men remained with him now, and we were all round him. + +"Surrender!" cried the general. "It is a pity to kill so brave a man!" + +Santiago laughed lightly, dug the spurs deep into his horse's sides, +cleared a passage with his sabre, and wheeling his horse by the +pressure of his knees, bounded away, crying defiantly,-- + +"Rally to the flag! Viva el Rey!" + +A young Colombian officer levelled his pistol; but Miller struck it up, +saying,-- + +"The odds are heavy enough now. If you want the flag, get it with your +sword." + +The youngster's face flushed, but he kept his temper, and saluting the +general, dashed after Santiago, crying,-- + +"To me, Colombians!" + +As Suares had foreseen, our action gave the beaten squadron a chance to +rally; officers and men who had survived the crushing avalanche +collected in groups, and the fight was proceeding fiercely on the open +plain. Ordering our squadron to re-form, the general placed himself at +our head. + +Meanwhile, I was watching the gallant Santiago and his handful of men. +He was a superb rider, and able to guide his horse without using the +reins, thus leaving both hands free. His Royalist comrades, now +reunited, were opposite the defile, and too far off to help, while +several detachments of Patriot cavalry were hurrying to cut off his +retreat. Behind him, too, thundered the hot-headed Colombian officer +with a dozen troopers. + +"That plucky Royalist officer will be killed," said the general to +Colonel Suares. "He's a gallant fellow--eh, Crawford?" + +"He is, sir," I answered warmly; "and I'd give anything to see him get +through safely." + +"Why, Crawford," returned the general, smiling, "that sounds very much +like treason." + +By this time we ourselves were in motion, but as my place was on the +flank, I had a good view of Santiago's desperate venture. A body of +Colombians, some twenty strong, had thrown themselves across his path; +and though they were our allies, I could hardly keep from cheering as +he dashed through them, losing, as far as could be seen, only one man +of his little band. + +Casting a backward glance to see how his followers fared, he waved the +flag again, and I could guess at the defiant shout of "Viva el Rey!" +that came from his lips. + +"He's just splendid," said I, between my teeth. But surely now his +time was come! Close on his heels rode the beaten Colombians, while in +front another detachment, far stronger, awaited him. What would he +do--surrender? That, I felt sure, would never enter his head. + +One chance of escape there was if he would take it. By swerving +sharply to the left he might avoid the hostile troopers, and gallop +across the plain to the Royalist infantry. It was evident he saw this +way out; but his blood was up, and he made straight for the forest of +lances. + +"Lost!" said I, with a groan. "Poor old Santiago!" + +I counted eight men with him, and Royalist and Patriot troops combined +held none braver. It was magnificent, and yet terrible, to watch them +spring at the massed troops, Santiago only slightly in advance of them. +I held my breath as they leaped into the throng and were swallowed up. +We were not near enough to distinguish the flag amidst the flashing +sabres and the long-handled lances, but I feared it had fallen with its +daring protector. + +The tumult showed that some of the brave few still lived, and suddenly +I heard General Miller, as if his feelings had surprised him into +speech, say in English,-- + +"By Jove, he's through!" + +It was true. There in the distance rode a man bare-headed, waving a +flag defiantly, and for all we knew cheering for the king. One by one +four others joined him, and continued the gallop: their comrades lay +dead on the plain. + +Had half the Royalist cavalry possessed Santiago's pluck, the story of +this affair at Junin would have had a different ending. + +As it was, the Spaniards began to waver. They could barely hold their +own against the reassembled squadrons from the defile, and our arrival +had turned the scale. They began to give ground slowly but surely, in +spite of their officers' appeals. I saw Santiago again; indeed he was +the most conspicuous man, though not the highest officer, on the field. +Wherever the troops seemed weakest, there he was, flag in hand, +cheering them on and fighting desperately. + +When at last they could stand it no longer, but broke and fled, he got +together another little band to protect the retreat. But for him, I +doubt whether Canterac would have saved a quarter of his cavalry. +Once, when turning at bay to repel a fiercer rush than usual, he caught +sight of me, and his face lit up with a smile. He had been wounded, +but not dangerously, and his sword-arm was vigorous as ever. + +Again and again, with the aid of his choicest troopers, he stemmed the +onset; but his efforts were vain--we were too many. His men dropped +one after another, and he was forced to continue the retreat, till the +remnant of the Royalist horsemen found shelter behind the lines of +their infantry, who greeted us with a scattering fire. + +It was now growing dusk, and we could not attack an army, though +General Miller decided to hang on a little longer. In the long pursuit +our men had become scattered over the plain, and he dispatched various +officers to collect them. Then turning to me, he said,-- + +"Crawford, ride back, find General Bolivar, and tell him the Royalists +are in full retreat. If followed up strongly, I believe they would +disperse." + +Saluting, I turned my horse and rode back rapidly. The scene was +bewildering. Officers galloped this way and that, shouting to their +men; riderless horses careered madly about; slightly-wounded troopers +were hobbling to the rear; others, more unfortunate, lay on the ground +groaning and calling for water; while here and there mounted men were +escorting groups of prisoners toward our infantry lines. + +Several times I stopped to ask where General Bolivar was. He had +entered the defile with the cavalry; but from the time our first +squadrons were routed I had seen nothing of him. At last an officer +told me that, seeing his horsemen overthrown, the general had galloped +back to the infantry, which he had posted on a very high hill about a +league away. + +"He quite expected to be attacked," added my informant, "never dreaming +we should recover ourselves. The Peruvians saved us. They are fine +fellows!" For in the gathering gloom he could not distinguish my +uniform. + +"Thanks!" said I, laughing; "I'll repeat that compliment to my +comrades," and rode on. + +Bolivar was standing, or to be correct, walking about, on the brow of +the hill, looking anxiously toward the plain. Several messengers had +brought him word of the varying fortunes of the fight, but none had +arrived from Miller. + +I passed close to the head of the Peruvian infantry, and the colonel +shouted,-- + +"What news, Crawford!" + +"Good!" I replied, hurrying along; and reaching Bolivar, I jumped to +the ground and saluted. + +"Where do you come from?" he cried. + +"General Miller, sir. The Royalists are in full retreat--horse, foot, +and artillery. The general wishes me to say that a vigorous pursuit +would probably disperse them altogether." + +"Too late," said he; "tell General Miller I have ordered the cavalry to +retire on me.--Caza," to one of his officers, "lend--" + +"Lieutenant Crawford, sir." + +"Lend Lieutenant Crawford your horse; his is done up.--Now ride as fast +as you can, and give General Miller my message." + +I saluted, sprang into the saddle, dashed past the Peruvian infantry, +down the hill, and into the defile. Here I found the main body of our +cavalry retiring in accordance with Bolivar's command, and heard that +Miller, with a squadron of Peruvians, was still following the Royalists. + +It was quite dark now, and the route was covered with hillocks; but I +rode on swiftly, trusting to luck, and at length came up with the +general, who had halted in his pursuit. On receiving Bolivar's message +he immediately gave orders to retire, and about seven o'clock we +reached our camping-ground. + +Fortunately we managed to collect a little fuel, for the night was so +intensely cold that few of the seriously wounded, though receiving +every possible attention, survived its rigours. Even lying close to +the fire and enveloped in our ponchos we shivered. + +A surgeon had sewn up the cut in Alzura's face, and we gave him the +most sheltered place, and the one nearest the fire. There was not much +sleep for any of us that night; we were far too excited, and spent most +of the time fighting the battle over again. + +To my delight, every one talked of Santiago and his magnificent bravery. + +"Didn't we take him prisoner once, down south?" asked Plaza. "His face +seemed familiar to me." + +"Yes," said I: "his name is Santiago Mariano, and at that time he was a +major." + +"Faith," observed Alzura, looking up, "as far as fighting goes, he +ought to be a commander-in-chief! A wounded Colombian told me the +fellow sprang on them like a lion falling on a herd of deer. A lucky +thing for us that the Marianos are in a minority among the Royalists." + +"Canterac nearly did the trick though," growled the major. "I thought +he would drop on us in that defile. I tell you what it is: Bolivar can +thank our colonel that he has any cavalry left." + +"Bravo, major! I heard this evening that we saved the army." + +"So we did," chuckled Plaza; "and we can say it without a word of +boasting. I don't care about praising my own men." But the rest was +drowned in good-humoured laughter, as every one knew that the finest +troop in South America--and the world, too, for that matter--was +Plaza's. + +However, it appeared that we really had done a smart thing: for the +next morning Bolivar held a grand parade, and in presence of the whole +army ordered that henceforth the regiment of which we formed part +should be known as the "Hussars of Junin;" and General Miller publicly +said that we deserved the honour. + +After the parade we marched into the town of Reyes, which had been +sacked by the Royalists. Bolivar occupied the only hut that had a +roof, the rest consisting of nothing but bare walls. The inhabitants +had fled into the surrounding country, but now they returned, and did +all they could to assist us, lighting fires, cooking our scanty +rations, and erecting sheds to shelter us from the cold. + +"I suppose it's all right," said Alzura; "but I can't help thinking +Bolivar has made a big blunder. While we hang about here, Canterac is +pulling himself together, and we shall have all the work to do over +again. If I were the general--" + +"I should join the other side immediately," laughed Plaza. + +"Please don't interrupt," said Cordova. "It amuses me to hear these +youngsters talk. I'll wager Alzura would have finished the war two +years ago, only the end might not have been as we anticipate." At +which there was a general laugh. + +"What I don't like about Bolivar is his play-acting," I said. "Have +you seen his hut? Have a look at it in the morning. The doorway is +hung with silver ornaments in place of laurel wreaths, which the +Indians were unable to get." + +"But he can't help the Indians idolizing him!" + +"Nonsense! Did you ever hear of such rubbish with San Martin? And the +Indians worshipped him!" + +"Ah!" exclaimed Plaza, "you're a San Martin man, and jealous of the new +sun!" + +"A new comet," said I, a bit testily perhaps, because Plaza had +happened on an explanation very near the truth. + +"At any rate," observed Cordova, "it's better to be here at our ease +than tramping fruitlessly about the mountains. I'm fairly tired of +that fun. I want a day or two at Lima." + +None of us guessed how much weary marching lay before us ere we +returned to the capital. However, for the time we were in +comparatively good quarters, and though grumbling occasionally because +Bolivar had not followed up the victory at Junin, were quite prepared +to make the best of things. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +A DISASTROUS RETREAT. + +When General Canterac retreated from Junin, he fled from his own +shadow. Instead of pursuing him closely, we advanced in a leisurely +way to Guamanga, and stayed there a month doing nothing. Then we +marched to Challuanca, where Bolivar, being needed at the capital, left +us under the command of General Sucre, who had shown himself a very +skilful soldier. It seems we were not strong enough to proceed, and as +the rainy season was at hand, no one thought the Royalists would return +to the attack. + +The Patriot army was spread across the country for many miles, our post +being on a high tableland four leagues from Challuanca. The weather +was abominable. Frequent storms swept through the district, the rain +fell in torrents, the thunder pealed in reverberating claps among the +mountains, and many animals and some men were killed by the lightning. +It was bitterly cold, too, and our only shelter was a cluster of +miserable Indian huts, where we passed all our time when not on duty. +Often I returned to my cheerless quarters cold, shivering, and +drenched, yet with no change of clothing. + +To add to our misfortunes, it was rumoured that the various Royalist +armies, having united, were marching to attack us; so for days together +we were kept on the alert, riding for hours over the desolate country +and returning thoroughly exhausted. + +One evening early in November I got back after a twenty miles' ride +with a small patrol, and found the camp in a state of confusion. + +"What is it, Alzura? what's all the fuss about?" I asked, wearily +getting off my mule--for we rode horses only when absolutely necessary. + +"Oh, my dear Juan, you will be delighted," he replied, his face +brimming with fun. "We are just going back to Challuanca. The viceroy +is somewhere in our rear with all his army, and we have to run for it." + +"My animal is dead-beat," said I gloomily. + +"You must walk, and lead both animals. Never mind, dear boy; the +excitement will keep you going," he answered, laughing. + +"Hullo! is it you, Crawford? In luck's way again! And I've been +worrying about your being left behind," said Plaza, coming up. + +I did not exactly see where the luck came in; but the sound of the +bugle cut short my reply, and I took my place in the column. That +march was the longest twelve miles I remember. Sometimes riding, +sometimes walking, aching in every limb, and more than half asleep, I +plodded along the rocky path, dreamily wondering at every step whether +I could take another. As soon as we arrived at Challuanca I just lay +down on the bare ground, and was fast asleep in a second. + +It was daylight when the sounds of bugles awakened me, and I rose +sleepily. The army had disappeared, with the exception of our +squadron, which I afterwards found formed part of the rearguard. + +"Come on, sleepy-head," sang out Alzura, "or you'll get no breakfast. +I've seen to your animals. A wonder they didn't kick you to death in +the night!" + +"The poor beasts were too tired to have a kick left in them. Where's +General Sucre?" + +"Going on to a place called Lambrama. Do you know Miller is a +prisoner?" + +"A prisoner? I don't believe it." + +"It's true, nevertheless. His scouting party has returned without him. +From what I can hear, we're in a tight fix." + +According to rumour, Alzura was right; but after a long and wearisome +march we reached Lambrama, where General Sucre halted. During the +afternoon, while we rested in the valley, a great shout from the troops +on our right brought us to our feet, and we saw a soldier on a +beautiful white horse descending a pass into the valley. + +"That's General Miller's horse!" I cried excitedly. + +"And the general's on its back!" said Plaza. "Viva! viva Miller!" And +the cry was taken and repeated by thousands of lusty throats. + +I had witnessed San Martin's brilliant reception, and had seen Bolivar +feted by his admirers; but this outburst was the most remarkable of +all. One would have thought the general was a personal friend of every +man in the army. + +Each battalion, as he passed it, broke into renewed cheering, the men +flung their caps into the air, and the whole scene was one of amazing +enthusiasm. The general rode along slowly, and his smiling face showed +how greatly he was touched by his reception. + +"The man's a marvel!" exclaimed Plaza admiringly. "Look at him! One +would think he had just come from a pleasure-trip instead of being +hunted through the mountains. I warrant the viceroy would count his +capture cheap at half a million dollars." + +"Say a million, and it would still be cheap," said Alzura; and most of +us agreed with him. + +General Miller apparently brought important information, as, shortly +after his arrival, orders were issued for a fresh start. I need not +dwell long upon our sufferings during that disastrous retreat. The +Royalists had outmarched us, and, hoping to stop our advance, closed +many of the defiles and destroyed the bridges by which we should have +crossed the numerous rivers. + +Several times we caught a glimpse of the enemy, and one night the +hostile armies bivouacked within two miles of each other, but separated +by a deep and rugged valley. The terrible march was so weakening us +that many officers hoped the enemy would attack at once. But this the +viceroy, who was a clever old soldier, would not do. His plan was to +wear us down by degrees and only fight at an advantage. + +For several days we remained watching each other, but on November 25th +the Royalists disappeared, and Sucre immediately made preparations to +cross the valley. A swollen river lay in our path; the bridge was +destroyed, and there was no material with which to build another. + +The crossing was simply terrible. The weather was intensely cold, and +even at the ford the infantry were breast high in icy water. It was +death to remain behind, however, and though many men, numbed and +exhausted, were swept down the stream, only two lives were lost. + +On the last night in November we reached a valley whose sides were +clothed with enormous trees, and the order to encamp was gratefully +received. + +"Thank goodness!" said Alzura. "We shall have a comfortable night at +last. The trees will shelter us from the cold winds, and we shall be +as cozy as in bed." + +"Humph!" said Gamarra testily; "much you know about it. In half an +hour you'll wish we had camped on the top of a mountain." + +"Why?" I asked curiously, for the valley seemed to me a very suitable +camping-ground. + +"Wait!" growled the crusty old major; "you'll soon know." + +This sounded very mysterious, but in a short time the secret was out. +We had just settled ourselves comfortably when Alzura started up, and +some one said, in a tone of great disgust, "Mosquitoes!" + +They were very fine specimens, and, I suppose, exceedingly angry at our +invasion of their territory. They came buzzing up in countless +thousands, and though many were slain, the slaughter made no apparent +difference in their numbers. + +I had put on my gloves, and now hastily covered my face with a +handkerchief. The mosquitoes were by no means dismayed. Thirsting for +blood, they would not be denied, but drank deeply. To any one +mosquito-proof the scene would have been most laughable. We made a +desperate fight, but the victory was to the mosquitoes. + +Our hands, necks, and faces were swollen from their venomous bites. +Some of the men could hardly see; and though we were dreadfully +fatigued, every one longed to hear the bugle-call to fall in. No one +wanted to remain in what Plaza christened "Alzura's paradise." + +The welcome sound came at break of day, and we moved out quickly, +abandoning the battlefield to our active and vigorous foes. As soon as +we reached the open country the rain began to fall, and continued in +torrents all that day and the following night. + +"I don't exactly see how much better off we are than Barriero," +remarked Alzura, as we lay down to sleep in a muddy puddle. + +"You should have stayed with him, then." + +"It's all very well to say that now. Why did you bring me away?" + +I was too much staggered by the audacity of the question to make a +suitable reply. + +Hungry, cold, and wet, we resumed the retreat, and soon began defiling +into another valley. Our squadron was right in the rear, and suddenly +the sounds of firing and the cries of startled men were heard in front +of us. + +"Mount!" cried the colonel; for we were still leading our horses, and +most of our mules were dead. "Forward! Trot!" + +"Some of the enemy have doubled and cut in on our flank!" said Plaza +excitedly. + +"Gallop!" roared the colonel, as entering the valley we caught sight of +what was going on. + +Unperceived by us, a Royalist detachment had stolen down the valley and +flung itself on the flank of our two rear battalions. Taken by +surprise, and outnumbered, our men were speedily overpowered, and +before we had arrived on the scene they had dispersed in all directions. + +To the shouts of "Viva el Rey!" and encouraged by their officers, the +Royalists were hotly chasing their beaten enemy. The valley was in a +state of terrible confusion. The dead bodies of men lay scattered +about; a few of the victors were dragging off an abandoned gun; others +were carrying away stores and baggage. The fight was a complete +disaster for our side. + +"We can't do any good," whispered Alzura, as the colonel halted us, +"and I doubt if we aren't cut off ourselves." + +"Better charge at once," muttered Plaza; "the more we look at it the +less we shall like it." + +"My lads," cried the colonel, riding down the ranks, "there is a stiff +bit of work before us. Let us remember we are the Hussars of Junin." + +The troopers responded with a ringing "Viva!" and as we got a firmer +seat on our saddles, Alzura remarked,-- + +"That's the way to talk, Juan. These fellows will fight to the death +now." + +There was something fresh happening on the other side, but we had no +time to see what it was. The bugle sounded, and with the colonel +leading we dashed straight across the valley. An infantry battalion +peppered us from the right, and a squadron was drawn up right across +our path. + +Men began to fall. Here and there a riderless horse, darting from the +ranks, tore across the valley. We were, as Alzura said, in a warm +corner. + +Bullets whizzed past our ears, but we noticed them not, riding straight +as a die at the hostile cavalry. + +"The major's down!" cried Plaza. "Poor old major!" + +That was his only epitaph. We had no time to sorrow for any one just +then, though we mourned for him sincerely enough afterwards. + +"Charge!" roared the colonel; and the sabres flashed as the horses +bounded forward, thundering with their hoofs on the ground. + +"Caramba!" cried Plaza; "it's your old friend Mariano. Well, friend or +foe, this is his last fight if my blade can reach him." + +Yes, the officer who had accomplished this daring flanking movement was +none other than Santiago Mariano, who, with the flush of success on his +handsome face, was again leading his men to the charge. + +"Viva el Rey!" he cried, and his voice rang high and clear above the +din. "Down with the bandits!" + +Crash! We were into them, fighting our way through desperately. +Horses pranced, and bit, and kicked. Men shouted triumphantly, or went +down with a cry of agony on their lips. Here a gap was made and filled +at once, as some daring fighter urged his way forward. + +Alzura rode with the colonel, carrying the colours, and we pressed +after them, knowing that our sole chance of safety was to get through +the Royalist squadron. On coming out at the other side we heard a +voice crying, "Bravo! bravo, my bold hussars!" and there was General +Miller, who seemed to scent a fight as a hound scents its quarry. + +By this time Santiago had re-formed his squadron, and was dashing at +our rear, when from the rocks above us sprang a line of fire, and his +horsemen, wheeling round, rapidly withdrew. While we had been +fighting, General Miller had rallied the beaten battalions and posted +them in a commanding position to cover our ride through the pass. + +That night in bivouac we counted Santiago's venture had cost us more +than two hundred men, all the spare horses, and a quantity of stores. + +"I hope you are proud of your Royalist friend," said Alzura to me. "He +has done us a nice bit of mischief." + +"He's a smart soldier." + +"He is that," agreed Plaza, "and a splendid swordsman. I had a good +bout with him, but could not pass his guard, though he was defending +himself against three of us." + +"Did any one see the major after he fell?" I interrupted. + +"No," said Alzura; "but I feel sure he is dead, as the bullet passed +through his forehead. He was a grim old fighter, and I'm sorry he's +gone." + +"So am I. But he died a soldier's death, poor old chap," said Cordova. +"We must have lost heavily since the retreat began. I wonder what +Sucre intends doing now." + +"Why, continuing the retreat." + +"To Lima? If so, he won't have a hundred men left by the time he +reaches the capital." + +"Well, what can he do? We can't stay here and starve, and he can't +make the Royalists fight." + +"As to starving," laughed Alzura, "I would as soon starve here as +elsewhere. I'm getting used to it." + +"And I don't know," remarked Cordova, "that forcing a fight will be so +very brilliant for us. We have had one sample to-day." + +"Oh, go to sleep! You might be a raven as far as croaking's concerned. +One would think we were in a hole and couldn't get out. Trust to Sucre +and Miller; they'll pull us through all right." + +"I'm going to sleep," announced Alzura gravely. "I had a beautiful +dream last night, and want to go on where reveille interrupted it. I +dreamed we were in Lima, at a banquet given by the city to the Patriot +officers. There was a band to play during the feast; the hall was +brilliantly lit; the table was laden with all kinds of good things. We +were just beginning when the band struck up, and I woke to hear +Crawford saying, 'Are you going to sleep all day?' It was a splendid +feast, though. Such a quantity of--" + +"Sit on him, Juan! stifle him with his own poncho! Fancy talking of +banquets now! Cruelty to animals I call it." + +"Why, I thought you'd be delighted," grumbled Alzura. + +In a very short time we were all asleep. We rose at dawn, hungry and +shivering, to resume our journey. On this day the enemy marched +parallel with us, but on the other side of a deep gorge, and General +Sucre tried in vain to draw them into an engagement. Their leader was +too crafty. Why need he sacrifice his men? + +"It's a pity from our point of view," remarked Plaza, as we toiled +along, "but they are playing the proper game. We're like fruit +ripening on a tree. When thoroughly fit we shall just drop and be +gathered without difficulty." + +"Who's croaking now?" asked Cordova, + +"I'm simply stating facts," replied Plaza. "Look at the road." + +"Thanks; I've seen more than enough of it already." + +"We're half starved." + +"That's less than a fact," laughed Alzura. "You can put me down as +three-quarters. If decent food were set before me, I shouldn't know +how to eat it." + +"We're losing hundreds of men," continued Plaza quietly, "and we've one +miserable field-gun." + +"Take a dose of your own medicine," said I, laughing. "Trust to Sucre +and Miller; they'll pull us through." + +The captain's gloomy fit soon passed off, and he was as cheerful as +ever; but there was no doubt of our being in a very awkward position. +As far as fighting went, we could hold our own till doomsday; but we +were bound to eat, and food did not grow on the mountains. + +Bolivar was working with all his fiery energy to hurry up +reinforcements from Colombia and Chili, but until they arrived he could +not send them on. Then, too, the viceroy had gained over several +Indian tribes, and they had already cut one detachment to pieces. As +far as I could judge, the Royalists had the whip-hand, and unless they +made a mistake we should very shortly be at their mercy. + +On the sixth of December we halted at a little village, and a thrill of +joy went through the troops when it was rumoured that our leaders +intended to attack the enemy at all risks. Wearied men, who had thrown +themselves exhausted on the ground, struggled to their feet; starving +men forgot their pangs; the very invalids crawled into the ranks, some +of them so weak that they could barely trail a musket. + +"Stand by your horses!" said the colonel, as the enemy were only three +miles off, and we might be required at any moment. + +An hour passed and we still waited; the morning wore away; afternoon +merged into evening, and we were ordered to encamp. Something, we knew +not what, had gone wrong. + +"I don't know if there was a chance to-day," observed Plaza, "but won't +there be one to-morrow?" + +"Why?" + +"Because the Royalists will block the road along which we must retreat. +Then we must either throw ourselves against a terribly strong position, +or stay here and starve." + +Events soon proved that he had not spoken at random. Early next +morning the enemy moved to an almost impregnable post. Twice our +number of strong men, flushed with victory and well equipped with guns, +might well have hesitated to attack. As for us, it was sheer madness. + +Things had come to the worst now. Further retreat was barred; our +provisions, even if we subsisted on the shortest of short rations, +would not last five days, while to move against the foe was simply to +commit suicide. + +"Lucky Barriero, sitting in his little hut!" said Alzura; "no fighting, +no starving! The next time we're taken prisoners we'll make the best +of it, Juan." + +"I doubt if the Spaniards will make many prisoners--that is, among the +officers," growled Cordova. "The men will be spared, but we shall be +put out of the way of doing mischief." + +I think myself Cordova exaggerated the danger; but his opinion was +shared by the great majority of the Patriots, and it was this fear +which made them resolve to fight to the bitter end rather than +surrender. + +After breakfast we lounged about on the heights watching the Royalists, +who had encamped just without gunshot, wondering what our leaders would +decide to do. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS. + +"They're coming down!" cried Alzura excitedly, rushing into our tent. + +It wanted two hours to sunset; we had done nothing all day, and tired +of watching the enemy on the opposite heights, most of us had gone to +sleep. + +Alzura's announcement woke us up, and running forward, we glanced +eagerly at the hill, which a battalion of infantry was descending. + +"Skirmishers, nothing more," said Plaza quietly. "They fancy we might +attempt a night attack. Take my word for it, they won't be foolish +enough to meet us on the plain." + +"Unless they try a rush in the dark." + +"That's just possible, but not probable; they're sure of us without +that." + +"There goes a battalion of our light infantry in extended order," +remarked Cordova; "but there won't be any real fighting to-night. I'm +going back to bed." + +"A very sensible proceeding, too," exclaimed a genial voice; and +turning round we beheld General Miller. "I should advise all of you +not on duty to do the same," he added. + +"Are we going to fight, general?" I asked eagerly. + +"Hullo, Crawford! I've been so busy that I've lost sight of you +lately. Well, I hardly know. Perhaps the viceroy would be better able +to tell you; he knows more about it than I do." + +"I don't think he'll abandon his strong position just to give us a +better chance, sir," remarked Plaza. + +"Perhaps not," replied the general. "But you mustn't think he's in +clover up yonder. His men are as hungry as ours, and that's saying +much. If it is a fight, however, 'twill be a fight to the finish, and +the Hussars of Junin won't be missing!" + +"Take us with you, sir!" + +"That's just what I've come to see the colonel about. I intend to get +all the regiment together and use it as a battering-ram." + +"He thinks the Royalists will attack," said Alzura, as the general +passed on. "He has heard something important, you may depend. And why +shouldn't they? they're two to one, and have no end of guns." + +"I like his idea of using all the regiment," laughed Cordova. "Nearly +a half of the third squadron are mounted on baggage mules; their horses +are all dead." + +"They must get fresh ones from the enemy," I suggested. + +"Come," said Plaza; "there's nothing more to see here." And we +returned to the tent. + +Anxious to have a good long night, Cordova soon fell asleep; but Alzura +and I sat up chatting till within an hour or two of dawn. We could +hear the hostile skirmishers peppering away at each other at intervals, +and somehow the sounds seemed to be the prelude to a coming battle. + +Fortunately the morning dawned fair, but there was a nip in the air +which impelled us to move about smartly. Then the sun rose gloriously +over the eastern peaks, and its genial warmth raised our drooping +spirits. I cannot account for the feeling, but somehow the whole army +felt that a battle was imminent, and the faces of the troops wore a +look of excited expectancy. + +Directly after breakfast, or what we were pleased to call breakfast, +the men began moving to their positions, each corps being formed in +close column. For the better understanding of what happened, I must +try to describe our position. We were drawn up on a nearly square +tableland known as the Plain of Ayacucho, a league in circumference, +and flanked right and left by rugged ravines. We had the village at +our backs, and the only road by which we could retreat was effectually +blocked. The Royalist army was perched just below the summit of a +gigantic ridge called Condorcanqui, which formed the eastern boundary +of the plain. + +At seven o'clock our regiment moved out, and the men of the third +squadron, of whom Cordova had spoken, provoked much humour and +good-natured chaff as they rode past on their baggage mules. It was +thought that they would help to make a show, but no one suspected that +later on, when ordered to remain in the rear, they would answer firmly, +"No, we will conquer or die with our comrades!" + +The cavalry, consisting of four regiments, was stationed in the centre, +with an infantry division on either side, and a third in the rear as a +reserve. + +About nine o'clock a great cheer rose from all parts of the plain: the +Royalists were descending the craggy side of Condorcanqui. Between the +infantry of each division appeared the cavalry, the riders leading +their horses and advancing with difficulty. It was an impressive +scene, and we stood watching with breathless interest. + +Then our fellows renewed their cheering as General Sucre, riding along +the line, addressed a few rousing words to each particular corps. + +"A tough nut to crack," remarked Plaza, watching the Royalists form, +"but we'll get at the kernel before the day's over." + +"There's the beginning!" cried Alzura, as the infantry on our right +slowly advanced. "Hurrah! we're to help!" for an aid-de-camp from +General Sucre had just dashed up to Miller with orders. + +We waited eagerly for the word to mount, but our turn had not yet come. +Two cavalry regiments moved off with Miller, and left us gazing at the +drama being unfolded before our eyes. + +Our infantry columns marched to the attack like so many automatic +machines; the Royalists waited firmly, as if confident of victory. We +stood holding our horses, and quivering with excitement. Much would +depend upon the result of that first encounter. + +"They're stopping to fire," cried Alzura. "Now they're moving again. +Viva! they're going to charge. Look at the sun on their bayonets." + +Would the Royalists give way? No; they stood firm as the rocky heights +behind them--not a man moved. It seemed to me that there was not even +a tremor in the whole mass. If our fellows charged and failed, they +would be cut to pieces. We were like spectators in a theatre, only the +drama was a real one. + +A mighty "Viva!" floated back to us as our men broke into the charge. +It was neck or nothing now--decisive victory or stern defeat. + +"The Royalists will run," muttered Plaza; "they must." + +But they did not, and the next instant bayonet crossed bayonet in +desperate conflict. + +Excitement drove us well-nigh crazy. We cheered and shouted and waved +our sabres, as if by so doing we could help in the fight. Our troops +had met their match, and seemed to make no impression. Unless they +went forward shortly they must retreat. + +"If they're driven back," remarked Plaza, "they are lost." + +How the struggle would have ended I cannot tell, but just then we broke +into a cry of relief. The two cavalry regiments which had made a wide +detour were seen bearing down on the Royalists' flanks. They swept +along at hurricane speed. Nothing could stand against the shock of +their long lances. A portion of the Royalists, facing about, delivered +a telling volley at short range. Men and horses went down with a +crash, but the survivors were not checked. A second volley crashed +into them, making wide gaps, and then, with the force of a roaring +torrent, they literally swept away the barrier of men and steel. + +"That settles it," said Plaza, breathing deeply; "the bravest troops in +the world couldn't recover from such a smashing blow. It's a case of +complete rout, in that part of the field at all events." + +He was right too. The enemy would not, indeed could not rally. Here +and there small groups stood at bay, fighting desperately but vainly to +stem the onset of their pursuers. All they could do was to die +fighting, in the hope that the sacrifice might save their comrades. +Even those who reached the heights were not out of danger. Whiz, whiz +sped the bullets; and numbers of the fugitives rolled down the mountain +side till their bodies were caught by crag or brushwood. + +So greatly was our attention absorbed by the scene that we had scarcely +noticed what was happening on our left. Suddenly, however, a heavy +fire broke out, followed by the quick reports of hundreds of muskets. +Our colonel glanced in the direction uneasily. His orders were strict. +He was on no account to move his regiment, and yet-- + +"Crawford," said he, looking round, "see what that firing means." + +I sprang to the saddle and galloped off. But for our success on the +right, I should have felt inclined to take a gloomy view of things: our +left had given way. + +Two Royalist battalions were advancing in pursuit, while still further +on the left a cavalry regiment was swooping down on one of our reserve +battalions sent in support. The crafty enemy had crossed a deep +ravine, on the farther side of which a whole division was stationed. + +A mounted officer, with cap gone and cloak flying in the wind, pulled +up on seeing me, and said rapidly, "Where is your regiment? Take me to +your colonel quickly. We want cavalry; we must have cavalry, or our +whole left will be rolled up!" + +"This way," I replied, and together we galloped towards the Hussars of +Junin, reaching the colonel just as General Miller dashed up from the +right. + +"What is it?" he asked hastily. + +"We are overpowered, sir. The enemy have four field-guns across a +ravine; our division has suffered terribly, and the troops are giving +way. The general requires a regiment of cavalry immediately." + +"Tell him it's coming," replied Miller.--"Now, colonel, here's a chance +for your men to show their mettle. We've smashed the enemy on the +right; let the 'Hussars of Junin' do the same on the left." + +How we did cheer as our colonel led us out! General Miller's face wore +an anxious expression as he glanced over the field. Everywhere the +victorious Spaniards were driving back our left wing; we should only be +just in time to repair the mischief. + +"Push those two infantry battalions across the ravine while I rally the +fugitives," said Miller. But he had barely spoken when the Royalist +cavalry dashed down on the right flank. + +"Here's Crawford's friend again!" said Plaza. "We might have guessed +he had a hand in this business." + +Santiago made a handsome picture as he tore along well in front of his +regiment, and enemy though he was, I could not help feeling proud of +him. We turned to meet this vigorous onslaught, and though Santiago +fought with all the traditional valour of his race, his men, already +tired by their great exertions, could not stand against us. + +Stopping their flight, our own infantry rallied, and advanced in +support, while their loud cheers proclaimed the arrival of a second +cavalry regiment. Nothing daunted by his repulse, Santiago led his +troopers against the new enemy, while we bore down on the hostile +infantry. + +"Gallop!" cried our colonel; and neck by neck the horses flew over the +ground, the men waving their sabres and cheering lustily. We could see +the glittering steel of the bayonets now, could almost look down the +barrels of the muskets, when there came a blinding flash, the thud of +falling bodies, and hoarse shrieks of pain. + +"Forward!" thundered the colonel, "forward; remember the 'Hussars of +Junin!'" + +Crash we went right into them before they could fire another volley, +and then it was horseman against footman, sabre against bayonet. To +and fro we surged, striking parrying, thrusting, till at last the brave +enemy, unable to continue the struggle longer, fled to the ravine, +hotly pursued by our victorious regiment. + +In a calmer moment we should have pulled up, but there was no stopping +now. Some one raised a warning cry: it came too late. Down the ravine +we went, the horses slipping and scrambling--some rolling over and +crushing their riders; the majority, keeping their feet somehow, +reached the opposite bank. A small detachment of the enemy halted to +fire a scattering volley, which did some mischief. A man close to me +fell forward on his horse's neck. + +"Good-bye, Crawford!" said he faintly; "I am done for." + +It was Cordova; but there was no time to help him. On we dashed +straight at the guns, which the gunners dared not fire, so mixed up +were friend and foe. A cry of "Viva el Rey!" arose in our rear. +Santiago was galloping back. + +The Royalists could not stand. Miller had brought up three battalions +in double-quick time; the guns were ours; horse and foot we swept over +the plain, driving the enemy pell-mell in all directions. Only the +regiment led by the undaunted Santiago endeavoured to cover the +retreat, and at last it too fled. + +Not so their brave leader; he remained on the field. I found him +later, with a hole in his side and a nasty gash across the face. He +was not dead, however, and with assistance I carried him to the +village, where a surgeon dressed his wounds. Then I returned to my +regiment. + +"It's all over!" cried Alzura exultantly. "The viceroy is taken +prisoner, and Canterac has come to sue for terms. He is with Sucre +now." + +"Where is Plaza?" + +"Just gone to find poor Cordova. It's hard lines to drop off in the +moment of victory. And the war is over now; the Royalists will never +lift their heads again." + +This was not quite correct, as a few still held out in other parts of +the country, but they were powerless to do any real mischief. This +battle of Ayacucho--or Battle of the Generals, as we called it--secured +the independence of Peru. Fourteen Spanish generals, some of them the +most famous in South America, gave up their swords; nearly six hundred +officers and most of the rank and file became prisoners of war. + +Late that evening I went to see Santiago. He lay on a bench in a +miserable hut, where several wounded officers had been brought for +shelter. Two small earthen lamps gave a feeble light, barely +sufficient for us to see each other's faces. I bent over him, and +choked back the sob that would rise in my throat. We neither of us +tried to gloze over the truth. He was dying, and we both knew it. + +"I am glad you have come," he whispered. "It will soon be over, and I +am not sorry; I have tried to do my best." + +"Indeed you have, old fellow; friend and foe alike are loud in your +praise." + +"I have been loyal to my king; I have done my duty," he continued, not +heeding the interruption. "Life is precious, Juan, but honour is the +first thing. My name is unstained. I die as I have lived, a cavalier +of Spain!" + +That thought cheered him as he took his last and long journey. He was +young and handsome and well beloved; he had fair estates and hosts of +friends; he might have risen high in the councils of his nation; but +death, stern and unyielding, claimed him, and he braced himself to meet +it. + +"Thank God!" he murmured; "I die with a clear conscience." + +I stayed with him till nearly midnight, when he became unconscious. +Then having work to do, I sorrowfully went away. Next morning, on my +way to the hut I met General Miller. + +"Poor fellow!" he said, when I told him of Santiago's state. "I will +come with you. I remember him well." + +Just as we were moving on, we met General Sucre accompanied by a +Spanish officer, who on seeing Miller ran forward and embraced him. + +"I know you!" he cried. "I am Valdes. You and I must be friends." +Then turning to General Sucre, he added, "This Miller has often kept us +on the move. I am called active; but he was a regular wizard--here, +there, everywhere, without giving a clue to his intentions until he +dealt us some sly blow." + +I looked at this celebrated Spanish general with a great deal of +interest. He was a small, spare man, with keen eyes and rough, +weather-beaten face. He wore a broad-brimmed beaver hat, a coarse gray +surtout, and long brown worsted leggings. He stooped slightly, and to +judge by appearances, one would never have thought he was perhaps the +finest soldier in the Spanish service. + +Sucre left the two chatting, and presently Miller said, "I was just +going to visit one of your men, a Colonel Mariano. Do you know him?" + +"Mariano? He was my best cavalry officer. It was he who helped me to +cut up your rearguard some time ago, and to drive back your left wing +yesterday. I'll come with you." + +"He will be very pleased to see you, no doubt.--You go first and show +us the way, Crawford." + +Santiago lay with closed eyes, breathing so faintly that at first we +thought he was dead. + +"Santiago," I softly whispered, "do you know me? I have brought you a +visitor." + +His eyes opened slowly, and there was a fleeting smile in them, but he +did not speak. + +"Colonel!" said Valdes, stepping to the side of the bench. The sound +of that voice brought the poor fellow for a short time from the Valley +of the Shadow. By some extraordinary means he managed to sit up +without assistance, raised his hand to the salute, and in a clear, +ringing voice exclaimed, "At your service, general!" + +It was the last act of his life. On placing my arm round him to +prevent him from falling, I found he was dead. + +"A fine fellow," said General Miller quietly. + +"A thorough soldier to the end!" cried the Spanish general. + +I said nothing, but mourned none the less the true friend I had found +in the ranks of our enemies. + +We were very quiet in camp that day. The excitement of battle had +passed, and we were counting the cost of our triumph. Many familiar +faces were missing, and the death of Cordova especially affected us. +We had been through many perils together, had endured many hardships, +and it seemed a pity that he should not have lived to taste the sweets +of victory. + +Shortly before sunset that same day I received a message from General +Miller asking me to go to his quarters. I found him expecting me, and +he at once plunged into the subject upon which he wished to speak. + +"The war is now over, Crawford," said he, "and General Sucre is able to +release a large part of his force. I am proceeding to Cuzco, but there +is no need for you to do so. You have done your share, and I intend +sending you on special service to Lima." + +"Oh, thank you, general!" I answered, my eyes sparkling and my cheeks +flushing with pleasure. + +"The regiment will return in a few weeks at the most," he continued. +"Be ready to start in the morning, and don't forget to remember me +kindly to your parents. Some day I hope to call upon them." + +"I am sure you will receive a very warm welcome when you come, +general," I replied, taking the hand held out to me. + +"Well, dear boy," said Alzura, on my return to our quarters, "what is +the news?" + +"Good," said I, "though perhaps it's a bit selfish to say so. I start +to-morrow for Lima. The regiment proceeds to Cuzco, but it will return +to the capital in a few weeks." + +"All right, old fellow. I'm glad to hear of your good fortune, though +I shall miss you awfully. Mind you hunt up my people and tell them I'm +all right and hoping to see them soon." + +Of course I promised to do so, and then went to wish the others +good-bye. + +"I hope you will find all your people well," exclaimed Plaza on hearing +the news. "After all, you're only a sort of advance courier, and we +shall soon meet again." + +"We shall expect you to give a ball to the officers of the regiment, +and a feast to the men, when we reach the capital," cried Alzura +merrily. + +"Meanwhile," said Plaza gravely, "take my advice, and have a good rest." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +HOME AGAIN. + +Home again! The weary journey was at an end. + +I had crossed the desolate mountains, and was riding into Lima. The +city was gay with flags and bunting; decorations abounded on all sides; +joy-bells pealed, and the streets resounded with the merry laughter and +chatter of the citizens. + +News of the brilliant victory at Ayacucho had evidently preceded me. + +I longed to ride home at a gallop and throw myself into my mother's +arms; I yearned eagerly for a glimpse of my father's face. I was (do +not think the confession weak) utterly homesick. Duty, however, +claimed me a while longer, and I turned my horse's head toward the +Government House. + +It was not possible to move at more than a foot-pace. The crowd surged +around me; little children, garlanded with flowers, ran close to my +horse's hoofs. I was terribly afraid some of them would be trampled to +death. + +Many soldiers were there, too, their uniforms spick and span, and +unspotted by the soil of the Andes. Mine was dirty, bloodstained, and +not altogether free from rents. I rode carefully, but my eyes were +heavy and my limbs ached with fatigue. + +Darting suddenly from the throng, a man seized my bridle-rein and cried +aloud, "A soldier from Ayacucho! Here is one of our brave deliverers!" + +[Illustration: "A soldier from Ayacucho! Here is one of our brave +deliverers!"] + +Instantly I was surrounded by the crowd, which pressed me so closely +that my horse could barely move. Viva after viva rent the air; +laughing girls and women half smothered me with flowers; men marched +beside me or fell into line behind, forming a kind of triumphal +procession. One would have thought I was the saviour of the country--a +second Bolivar! + +Thus, laughing, cheering, and singing, they escorted me to the +Government House, where, leaving my astonished horse with the guards, I +hurried inside. An official, in all the glory of a gorgeous uniform, +demanded my business, and remarked haughtily that the president was +engaged. + +"Tell him," said I, "that a lieutenant of the Hussars of Junin is here +with dispatches from General Sucre." + +After waiting a few minutes, I was conducted through the spacious hall +to a room guarded by a file of soldiers. My attendant knocked timidly +at the door, which was immediately opened, and I entered the apartment. + +Bolivar sat at a table dictating letters to his secretary and talking +to several officers of high rank. His complexion seemed sallower than +ever, his dark hair had more of gray in it, but his eyes had lost none +of their penetrating keenness. + +I saluted and stood at attention, waiting for him to speak. + +"Ah," exclaimed he, in his loud, rasping voice, and turning his eyes +askance as he usually did in conversation, "you are Lieutenant +Crawford! I have not forgotten you. How is it that you still have +only two stripes?" pointing to the stripes of silver lace round my +cuff, which denoted the rank of lieutenant. + +"I do not know, general," I replied. + +"Your Excellency!" corrected one of the officers standing near. + +"Let him alone!" cried Bolivar; "he is a soldier, and 'general' comes +more naturally to his lips.--Where are the dispatches?" + +I presented them. + +"Humph! enough work here for the rest of the day," said he on glancing +through them.--"Garcia," turning to one of the officers, "countermand +the reception; I shall be too busy.--Ah, here is a letter from Miller! +I see he commends you very highly, young man, and desires to bring you +to my notice. There is nothing I like so much as rewarding true +merit.--Garcia, make out Lieutenant Crawford's commission as captain in +the Hussars of Junin, for bravery on the field.--I congratulate you, +captain. I see by your face you are anxious to go." + +After thanking him for my promotion, I said, "Yes, general; I have not +seen my father and mother for a very long time." + +"Your father--ah, now I remember. He is no friend to me--would be glad +to see me out of Peru, in fact, eh? Well, I shall go some day. But he +is a true man for all that, and an Englishman. I love the English. +Perhaps it is as well for your father that I do. Tell him, Captain +Crawford, that Bolivar has some good points." + +"He has already recognized them, general," I answered. + +"He conceals his discovery well, then. But I will not keep you longer. +Present yourself at my levee in the morning, and don't forget to wear +that extra band of lace." + +"There is no fear of that, general," said I, with a smile; "I am too +proud of the honour." + +Apparently the remark pleased him, as he was very gracious when I took +my leave, though the officers-in-waiting looked at me as if I had been +overbold. + +Out again into the street. The crowd had dispersed, and only a few +people were about as I once more mounted my jaded animal. Now for +home! Forward, good horse! My spirits rose with every step; the tired +feeling left me; I could have sung aloud for very joy. + +The sight of the Montilla hacienda sobered my happiness somewhat. The +grounds were trim and well-kept, but the dwelling looked untenanted. +What had become of Rosa? Perhaps--yes, that must be it--she was +staying with my mother. I urged my horse into a spasmodic gallop, but +the poor beast soon resumed his old pace. + +There was a horse behind me, though, that could gallop. I turned +quickly to see who the rider was, and laughed gaily. + +"Why, Jack!" cried the faithful Jose, his eyes brimful of pleasure. + +"Captain Crawford, if you please!" I interrupted with assumed dignity. + +"Captain or general, it's all the same to me, as long as you're home +again, Jack, with no scratch on you! Hurrah! won't there be a fuss in +the house to-night!" and away he went at breakneck speed toward the +gate. + +"Better so," said I, jogging along. "He'll be able to prepare them a +little.--Come, old boy," to my horse, "can't you manage even a trot? +Well, never mind; we're nearly there." + +The gate of the park was wide open, and inside stood more than half of +my father's servants. They could not wait for me to reach the +courtyard. How they cheered, to be sure! It was a pleasant foretaste +of the welcome that awaited me. + +Good old Antonio was at the little gate, so I dismounted and spoke a +word with him, though my feet itched to be dashing along the courtyard. +Then I sent my horse to the stables, with strict orders that it should +be carefully groomed and fed, and made comfortable. + +At last! My heart beat loudly; my head was dizzy; I could barely +distinguish the figures in the hall. But my mother's arms were round +me, her lips pressed close to mine, in a fond embrace. + +Then came my father's welcome, and presently, in the brilliantly-lit +drawing-room, a young girl came forward and placed her hand in mine. +She was dressed in black, and looked somewhat sad and careworn, as if +life had not been particularly pleasant of late. + +"Welcome home, Juan," said she softly; and I saw by her face she was +thinking of the night when I had ridden hurriedly away in the vain +endeavour to save her father's life. We did not speak of it then, and +when, after changing my clothes, I returned to the drawing-room, Rosa +was not there. + +"She has gone to her own room," explained my mother, noticing my look +of disappointment. "It would have been difficult for the poor child to +stay with us this first evening." + +"She has heard of her father's death, then?" + +"Yes," said my father, quickly and with a warning glance. "She knows +that the Indians shot him, thinking he had been in correspondence with +the Royalists." + +I understood at once that my father was aware of the truth, but that, +with his usual kindly thought, he had kept it from both the bereaved +girl and my mother. He never alluded to the miserable incident, nor +did I; and Rosa was left in ignorance of the real reason for her +father's untimely end. + +Of course, we sat late talking over my adventures in the mountains, and +of the terrible battle which had secured the independence of Peru. + +"Yes," said my father confidently, "whatever else happens, the +Spaniards will never again rule over this country; their power is +broken. But we are not yet out of the wood: as a Peruvian, I still +fear Bolivar's ambition." + +"Oh," I exclaimed gaily, "I had forgotten Bolivar! He has made me a +captain!" and I told them all about my interview with the celebrated +general. + +"I admit his good points," laughed my father; "but I do not like to see +one person invested with such tremendous power. Still, there is no +doubt we owe our liberty in great part to his wonderful energy, +together with his determination never to acknowledge defeat. He has +toiled day and night like a slave." + +"I shall be glad when your regiment returns, Juan," said my mother. "I +am longing to see your brave friends, and especially Alzura. I seem to +know him quite well already." + +"You are sure to like him, mother. He is a delightful companion, full +of fun, and always laughing and joking. Plaza is older and more of a +soldier, but I owe a great deal to his kindness." + +"We will endeavour to repay it, my boy," said she brightly, kissing me +good-night. "Don't stay up too long. Remember you have to attend the +levee in the morning." + +When she had retired, I asked my father for news of Raymon Sorillo. + +"He is still serving against the Royalists, but his band has sadly +diminished. He came here secretly one night, and informed me of your +attempt to rescue Montilla. I think he was very angry; but he said it +was a daring act, and almost successful. However, he bears no malice, +and is as ready as ever to stand your friend." + +"Ugh!" said I, getting up with a shiver; "I hope I shall not need his +assistance." + +The next day, after attending the levee, where Bolivar was particularly +gracious, I obtained an indefinite leave of absence, and returned home. + +Rosa was alone, and though rather dreading to be asked about the +business of the silver key, I thought it best to get the interview +over. As it happened, I need not have worried myself at all. + +"I wanted to see you, Juan," she said, giving me her hand. "It seems +ages ago when I sent you out on that terrible errand. I ought not to +have done it; but my father's life was at stake, and I did not think of +the danger to you." + +"Think no more of it, Rosa. After all, the danger was trifling; the +Indians would not have hurt me." + +"I don't quite understand the story," she said thoughtfully, "but I +know you risked your life." + +"There was little risk. I had a slight chance to rescue your father +from the Indians, and seized it. Unfortunately the attempt failed, and +I was captured by the Royalists. So in one way you did me a good turn; +for while the other fellows were starving and fighting in the +mountains, I was pretty comfortably off." + +"But you were in the great battle?" + +"Yes, I was. I escaped from prison chiefly to please a mad-brained +young lieutenant of my regiment. But it is all past now, Rosa, and +there will be no more fighting." + +"I am sorry for his Majesty," she said simply, "and for the loyal +gentlemen who have died for him." + +"There were some splendid fellows amongst the Royalists," I said, and +proceeded to tell her the story of the gallant Santiago Mariano. + +"He must have been a brave man, Juan!" + +"He was, and he had equally brave comrades. Now that the struggle is +over, they will join us, and we shall all work together in peace for +the prosperity of our common country. The war has been a terrible +evil, but I am hoping that much good may come from it. I dream of a +grand future for Peru, and of a time when the Land of the Sun shall +recover its ancient glory." + +"I hope your dream will come true, Juan. I am sure you will try to +make it do so," she said. "But you must not expect me to be pleased +that we are no longer loyal subjects of the Spanish king." + + * * * * * * + +Here ends the story of my adventures during the War of Independence. +The Spanish power was completely crushed; but, as my father had +foretold, there were still many misfortunes in store for our unhappy +country. The men who had fought so hard for liberty quarrelled among +themselves. There were endless disputes and conspiracies, and many +soldiers who had bravely faced death on the battlefield were executed +by their fellow-countrymen. + +For two years Bolivar ruled at Lima. He was at the height of his +glory. He had freed Venezuela, New Granada, and Ecuador from the +Spaniards, and joined them into the one country of Colombia. Upper +Peru he had formed into another country called Bolivia, and he was the +real master of Peru proper. + +His boundless ambition, however, overreached itself. Enemies rose up +against him on all sides. He was driven from power, and seven years +after the battle of Ayacucho died a broken-hearted man. + +After his departure from Lima, my father's Spanish friend, General La +Mar, who had once been Governor of Callao, was elected president, and +the country settled down into a state of something like order. + +There still remain a few personal matters to be recorded before my pen +is finally laid aside. + +Among those who opposed Bolivar's rule in Peru, none was more bitter or +reckless than the guerilla chief, Raymon Sorillo. Unfortunately for +him, the war had greatly weakened the society of the Silver Key. His +bravest men and ablest lieutenants had died fighting, and he was left +with only a shadow of his former power. + +Undaunted by this, he openly defied Bolivar's authority. For several +months he held his own against the regular troops, but at last, being +captured, was tried as a traitor, and condemned to death. + +My father made strenuous efforts to save him, and would have succeeded +but for Sorillo himself. + +"The man is a desperate ruffian," said Bolivar, in answer to my +father's appeal for mercy; "but I will pardon him on condition that he +takes the oath of allegiance and swears to obey the laws." + +Overjoyed by his success, my father hurried to the prison where Sorillo +was confined. The doughty mountaineer refused the offer with scorn. + +"I took up arms for the independence of Peru," said he, "not to +exchange the tyranny of the Spaniards for that of a Venezuelan +adventurer. I thank you, senor, from my heart, but I prefer death to +these conditions." + +My father stayed with him nearly the whole day, but could not shake his +resolve. So in the early morning the redoubtable chief was led into +the prison yard, and was placed near a wall. Some of the soldiers +wished to bandage his eyes, but he would not allow it. + +"No," said he; "I have looked in the face of death too closely and too +often to fear it. Fire! I shall not tremble." + +Thus he died, and whatever else may be said, it cannot be denied that, +in his own headstrong, obstinate way, he was faithful to the cause for +which many better men had laid down their lives. + +Of my friend Plaza it is only necessary to say that, through General +Miller's influence as well as by his own merit, he rapidly advanced to +high office, being made governor of one of the inland provinces. He +has paid me several visits since he left the hussars, and his sole +regret is that Cordova did not live to share in the general good +fortune. + +An old acquaintance, who has also since done well in the world, is +Barriero. When the victory at Ayacucho became known, the prisoners on +the island rose in revolt, and overpowered their guards. Barriero +placed himself at their head, seized all the arms and ammunition, and +formed the patriots into a company. Then, assisted by some Indians, he +crossed the morass and marched to Cuzco, where, to his joy and +astonishment, he heard that Alzura and I had safely escaped across the +dreaded swamp. + +Alzura resigned his commission shortly after the regiment returned to +Lima. He succeeded to a fine estate near the capital, and is one of +our most frequent visitors. My father is very fond of him, and as for +my mother, I sometimes say she thinks more of him than of myself; +indeed, the dear fellow has almost become like a second son to her. + +Jose is still my father's right-hand man. He has long since amassed a +snug fortune; but I expect he will die in the old home, where he is an +esteemed and valued and trusty friend. + +Felipe Montilla's hacienda no longer stands desolate. Rosa has again +taken up her residence there, but under the name of Crawford, and +employs me, as my father jokingly says, to look after her estates. She +is still a Royalist at heart, but as the years pass she becomes more +and more reconciled to the changes which have taken place since Peru +obtained its independence + + AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD. + + + + +THE END. + + + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD *** + +***** This file should be named 22595.txt or 22595.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/5/9/22595/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |